Get Started in App Store Connect

App Store Connect workflow

You use App Store Connect to submit and manage your apps for sale on the App Store, distribute beta versions of your app using TestFlight, accept legal agreements, enter your tax and banking information, view trends and financial reports, and more. An App Store Connect API is also available for you to automate your workflow.

Initially, only the Account Holder (the person who joins the Apple Developer Program) can sign in to App Store Connect and perform these steps. Once you sign in, find functionality by clicking a section on the homepage.

Step 1: Accept agreements, and enter tax and banking information

If you want to sell your apps for a price, in the Agreements, Tax, and Banking section, you need to sign and update agreements, specifically the Paid Applications agreement. Then you enter your contacts, enter banking information, and provide tax information.

Step 2: Add users and assign roles

To delegate responsibilities to other persons, in the Users and Access section, add users and assign roles by entering their names and email addresses. Then other users can begin performing these tasks depending on their user roles. For more information, see User accounts and roles overview.

Step 3: Add your app and upload a build

In the My Apps section, add your app to your account so your app’s information, such as name, description, and keywords, is ready for delivery and distribution on the App Store. You don’t need to be done creating your app in Xcode before entering information about your app in App Store Connect. However, you must have an app record in App Store Connect before you can upload a build of your app. You can upload multiple builds (see Upload tools), and then view the builds and variants in App Store Connect.

Step 4: Test and submit your app

Before you make your app available on the App Store, you should distribute your app for testing, using the TestFlight beta testing (iOS, tvOS, watchOS) feature. You can add internal testers and invite external testers. Testers download and use TestFlight to install your app on their devices. When you are ready, choose the build to submit and submit your app to App Review. Later, you can make improvements to your app by creating new versions periodically.

Step 5: Monitor your apps status, usage, and sales

You can monitor the status of your app as it goes through App Review. Once it’s live on the App Store, you can gain insights into your customer base by responding to customer reviews, viewing the usage of your app in App Analytics, viewing sales daily in Sales and Trends, and viewing monthly financial statements in Payments and Financial Reports. You can also use App Store Connect for iOS to monitor your app's status, respond to App Review issues, and track your sales and trends on your device.

Sign in to App Store Connect

Use your Apple ID to sign in to App Store Connect. If you are the Account Holder user, use the Apple ID you used to join the Apple Developer Program and add other users to your App Store Connect organization.

  1. Go to App Store Connect, then sign in with your Apple ID.

  2. Click any section on the homepage to access its features.

Homepage overview

The homepage provides access to all sections of App Store Connect. You have access only to the functionality within each section that’s related to your user role.

Tip: You can return to the App Store Connect homepage at any time by clicking App Store Connect at the top of any page.

Section

Description

My Apps: Add apps to your account, edit app information, create new versions, and submit your app for review. Also, configure App Store technologies such as Game Center, in-app purchase, and TestFlight.

App Analytics: View analytics that track user app acquisition, usage, and monetization.

For more information, see About app analytics.

Sales and Trends: View reports that show sales and trends over time.

For more information, see About Sales and Trends.

Payments and Financial Reports: View and download your monthly financial reports and payments information, including earnings, amount owed, and last payment.

For more information, see Getting Paid.

Users and Access: Add users, delete users, and create sandbox testers. Change user roles and change user notifications.

Agreements, Tax, and Banking: Sign agreements, such as the iOS or Mac Paid Applications agreement, and download a copy of an agreement. Enter tax information and set up electronic banking information to receive earnings payments from Apple.

Resources And Help: Get access to more resources on App Store Connect by visiting the Apple Developer website.

App Store Connect for iOS

App Store Connect for iOS allows you to view sales data, app metadata, and customer reviews on your mobile device. You can also check app status, release new versions of your app, and respond to active Resolution Center issues. App Store Connect for iOS is available on the App Store.

If you create a new user on App Store Connect, the new user may need to wait up to 24 hours before they can access App Store Connect for iOS.

Manually release a version

If you choose to manually release a version when you submit your app for review, you can release the version after it’s approved and the status changes to Pending Developer Release. If you have an app in the Pending Developer Release state for longer than 30 days, you’ll receive an email reminder from Apple.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From the bottom of the landing page, tap My Apps.

  2. Select your app.

  3. Select the app version that is Pending Developer Release.

  4. Tap Release.

Remove a build from review

You can use App Store Connect for iOS to release apps with Pending Developer Release status. You can also reject apps that have been submitted for review.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From the bottom of the landing page, tap My Apps.

  2. Select your app.

  3. Select the app version that is Pending Developer Release.

  4. Tap Reject

Read and reply to App Review communications

If App Review or Beta App Review rejects your app, you can communicate with Apple and resolve issues in Resolution Center on App Store Connect for iOS.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

To access the Resolution Center issue:

  1. From the bottom of the landing page, tap My Apps.

  2. Select your app.

  3. Under Store Information, select Resolution Center.

  4. Select the issue.

  5. Review the details of the issue and respond as needed.

View ratings and reviews

You can use App Store Connect for iOS to view customer reviews for your apps on the App Store. You can also opt to receive notifications for reviews by star rating.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Customer Support, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

To view customer reviews:

  1. From the bottom of the landing page, tap My Apps.

  2. Select your app.

  3. Under Store Information, select Ratings and Reviews.

To turn on push notifications for customer reviews:

1. From the upper right corner of the landing page, tap your Username.

2. Tap Notifications.

3. Use the toggles to turn notifications on or off.

To turn on notifications by star rating:

1. From the bottom of the landing page, tap My Apps.

2. Select your app.

3. Under Notifications, tap Mobile.

4. Use the toggles to select a star rating.

Respond to customer reviews

You can use App Store Connect for iOS to respond to customer reviews on the App Store.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin or Customer Support. See Role permissions.

To respond to customer reviews:

  1. From the bottom of the landing page, tap My Apps.

  2. Select your app.

  3. Under Store Information, select Ratings and Reviews.

  4. Tap on the review you wish to view.

  5. At the bottom of the review, tap Reply.

  6. Enter your reply and tap Reply.

View units, proceeds, and sales

You can view sales data in the Trends tab of App Store Connect for iOS.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. See Role permissions.

To view data for a specific app:

  1. From the bottom of the landing page, tap My Apps.

  2. Select your app.

  3. Under the app name, tap Trends.

  4. Select a metric to see detailed sales data. You can tap View to select specific metrics, such as Units, Proceeds, Sales, or Updates.

For more detailed data, go to Sales and Trends on the App Store Connect website.

Data for the previous day is available by 7:00 a.m. PST. On Monday morning, data for the previous week is available. Trends data is displayed in coordinated universal time (UTC). A day includes transactions that happened from 12:00 a.m. to 11:59 p.m. UTC on that day.

Switch to another user account

  1. From the bottom of the landing page, tap My Apps.

  2. In the top right corner, tap your username.

  3. From the pop-up menu next to Account, tap your current account.

  4. From the pop-up menu, tap the account you would like to use.

Add, edit, and delete users

User accounts and roles overview

You can manage users, add Sandbox testers, and manage API Keys in the Users and Access section of App Store Connect.

User roles determine access to sections of App Store Connect and the Apple Developer website, and privileges for performing tasks. The person who enrolls in the Apple Developer Program is the Account Holder and is the only user that can sign legal agreements, renew membership, submit Safari Extensions, or create developer ID certificates. There can only be one Account Holder.

Individuals enrolled in the Apple Developer Program can give up to 10 users access to their content in App Store Connect. All users receive access only to App Store Connect and are not considered part of the team in the Apple Developer Program. They will not receive access to membership resources on the Apple Developer website or other membership benefits.

Organizations enrolled in the Apple Developer Program can add members to their team with no limit. All users are considered part of the organization’s team in the Apple Developer Program. They will receive access to App Store Connect, membership resources on the Apple Developer website, and other membership benefits.

In most cases, a role can be assigned to more than one user and a user can have more than one role. Users that are added by the Account Holder as an Admin or App Manager can also add users. To compare user roles, see Role Permissions.

View and edit your personal account

You can view and edit your Edit Profile in App Store Connect. If your Apple ID is associated with more than one account, you can switch between your user accounts.

View your personal account

  • Click your user name in the top-right corner of any App Store Connect page, then select Edit Profile.

Set your preferred currency

The preferred currency you select is the default currency that will display to you in App Store Connect when you select pricing for your app or in-app purchase. It's not the currency that displays for customers on the App Store, or the currency you are paid in.

  1. Click your user name in the top-right corner of any App Store Connect page, then select Edit Profile.

  2. Choose your preferred currency from the Preferred Currency menu, then click Save.

Switch to another user account

If your Apple ID is associated with more than one App Store Connect or iTunes Connect (for offering books, music, or videos) account, you can switch between the accounts.

  • In the top-right corner, click your name, then select a different account.

Set email notifications

You can customize the notifications you receive when events occur related to your App Store Connect account.

  1. Click your user name in the top-right corner of any App Store Connect page, then select Edit Profile.

  2. Under Notifications, choose an option from the pop-up menu.

    Users and Access Notifications options
  3. To remove an option, click the Delete button (x) next to the option.

  4. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

Leave a team

If you no longer wish to be part of a team, you can remove yourself from that team. If you are the Account Holder, you have legal responsibility for the team and can’t leave the team until you transfer the Account Holder role to another team member. If you have any other user role, you can leave the team at any time.

  1. In the top-right corner of any App Store Connect page, click your name, then select Edit Profile. Ensure you are logged into the team you wish to remove yourself from. If not, switch to another user account.

  2. At the bottom of the page, click Leave Team, then confirm in the dialog.

    Users and Access Leave Team confirmation

Add and edit users

You can add and edit users in Users and Access.

If you’re enrolled in the Apple Developer Program as an individual, you can give users access to your content in App Store Connect. All users receive access only to App Store Connect and are not considered part of your team in the Apple Developer Program. They will not receive access to membership resources on the Apple Developer website or other membership benefits.

If your organization is enrolled in the Apple Developer Program, you can add members to your team. All users are considered part of your organization’s team in the Apple Developer Program. They will receive access to App Store Connect, membership resources on the Apple Developer website, and other membership benefits.

Add a user

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From Users and Access, under People, click the Add button (+).

  2. Enter the required information:

    • The user’s first name, last name, and email address.

    • The email address must be valid to activate the account. It can be any email address, not necessarily one that’s associated with an Apple ID.

    • Select the user roles. User roles determine which sections a user has access to and which tasks they can perform.

    • Determine whether the user should be granted access to any specific apps. Users must have the same user role for all apps they can access.

    • If applicable, determine if the user should have access to Certificates, Identifiers, and Profiles on the Apple Developer website. If you grant access to Certificates, Identifiers & Profiles, all app information in this section will be visible to this user.

  3. Click Invite.

The new user receives an email that includes a link to activate the account.

If the account was created with an existing Apple ID, the user is asked to sign in to App Store Connect.

If the account was created with an email address not already associated with an Apple ID, they'll be able to create an Apple ID as part of their account activation.

Users manage their own Apple ID names and passwords on the My Apple ID webpage.

Change user role

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. See Role permissions.

  1. In Users and Access, the list of users in your App Store Connect account appears under People.

  2. Click the Apple ID for the user you want to edit.

  3. Select one or more roles for the user or edit the app access.

    Change roles
  4. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

Delete a single user

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. See Role permissions.

  1. In Users and Access, the list of users in your App Store Connect account appears under People.

  2. Click the Apple ID for the user you want to delete.

  3. Click Delete User, then click Delete in the dialog that appears.

    Delete user

Delete multiple users

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. See Role permissions.

  1. From Users and Access, under People, click Edit in the upper-right corner.

  2. Select the checkbox for each user you want to delete, then click Delete.

    Delete users
  3. In the dialog that appears, click Delete.

  4. Click Done.

Change user app access

You can limit which apps users with the App Manager, Customer Support, Developer, Marketing, or Sales (without Access to Reports) roles have access to. If you don’t change their user app access, they will have access to all apps by default.

Note: App access cannot be limited on the Apple Developer website. If a user is part of an organization's team in the Apple Developer program and has access to Certificates, Identifiers & Profiles, all app information in this section of the Apple Developer website will be visible to them.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role Permissions.

Change access for a single user

  1. From Users and Access, under People, click the Apple ID for the user you want to edit.

  2. In the Apps section, choose an option from the pop-up menu:

    • All Apps: Gives the user access to all apps.

    • Add an app: Choose an app, or multiple apps, you want the user to have access to.

  3. To remove an app, click the Delete button (x) next to the app name.

    If you remove all individual apps from the list, the user will have access to all apps by default.

  4. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

Edit access for multiple users

  1. From Users and Access, under People, click Edit in the upper-right corner.

  2. Select the checkbox for each user you want to edit, and click Edit App Access.

  3. In the dialog, choose an option from the pop-up menu:

    • All Apps: Gives the users access to all apps.

    • Add an app: Choose an app, or multiple apps, you want the users to have access to.

  4. To remove an app, click the Delete button (x) next to the app name.

  5. Click Save.

  6. Click Done.

Create a sandbox tester account

If your app uses in-app purchase or Apple Pay, you can create Sandbox Apple IDs in App Store Connect, which you can use to run your app in the test environment before you make the app available to users (see Preparing Apps for Review). To connect to your development servers and the test environment for the App Store, run a development-signed version of your app and sign in using a Sandbox Apple ID.

For each sandbox tester, you’ll need to collect the following information:

  • First name

  • Last name

  • Email address that has never been used as an Apple ID to purchase iTunes or App Store content, nor associated with any existing Apple ID. Consider creating a dedicated email address for each sandbox tester.

  • Password

  • Secret question and answer

  • Date of birth

  • App Store territory

To learn more about testing Apple Pay apps, go to Apple Pay Sandbox Testing.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Developer. See Role permissions.

Add a sandbox tester account

After you create a Sandbox Apple ID, you can’t edit the account information.

  1. From Users and Access, click Testers under Sandbox.

  2. Click the Add button (+).

  3. Enter the tester information and click Invite.

Delete a sandbox tester

  1. From Users and Access, click Testers under Sandbox.

  2. Click Edit.

  3. Select the checkbox for each user you want to delete, click Delete, then click Delete in the dialog that appears.

If you delete a sandbox tester, the associated Apple ID can no longer be used for either sandbox testers or App Store Connect users.

Generate an API Key

If your access to the App Store Connect API has been approved, you can generate an API key to configure, authenticate, and use App Store Connect services with that key.

For more information on managing and securing your keys, see Creating API Keys for App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. See Role permissions.

Generate an API Key

  1. From Users and Access, click on Keys. The page opens with App Store Connect API selected.

  2. Click Generate API Key.

    If you already have an Active API key generated, you will click the Add (+) button to add more.

  3. Enter a name for the key. The name is used for your reference only and is not part of they key itself.

  4. Under Access, select the role permissions to determine what the API can be used for. API keys are applied across all apps — it is not possible to limit app access for an API key.

  5. Click Generate.

Once you generate an API key, you won't be able to edit its name or access level. If you need to make changes, revoke the API key and generate a new one.

Download an API Key

API keys are private and can only be downloaded once. After downloading the key, store it in a safe place. If the key becomes lost or compromised, remember to revoke it immediately.

  1. From Users and Access, click on Keys. The page opens with App Store Connect API selected.

  2. Navigate to an API key under the Active section, and click Download API Key for the key you want to download. Keep in mind that API keys can be downloaded only once.

  3. In the dialog, click Download.

Revoke an API Key

If you no longer want to use an API key to authenticate into App Store Connect services, you can revoke the key.

  1. From Users and Access, click on Keys. The page opens with App Store Connect API selected.

  2. In the upper-right corner, click Edit.

  3. Select the API Keys you want to revoke.

  4. In the upper-right corner, click Revoke Key, then click Revoke in the dialog.

Once you revoke an API Key, you won't be able to reinstate it. You will see any revoked keys from the past 30 days under the Revoked section of the API Keys page.

Generate keys for auto-renewable subscriptions

In order to provide subscription offers, you must first generate a subscription key. Generating a subscription key allows Apple to authenticate and validate a subscription request. Subscription keys are created for your account, and can be applied to multiple apps, individual apps, or individual subscription products. You can have a maximum of 10 active subscriptions keys at a time, and they don't expire.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. See Role permissions.

Generate a subscription key

  1. From Users and Access, click on Keys and select Subscriptions.

  2. Click Generate Subscription Key.

    If you already have an Active subscription key generated, you will click the Add (+) button to add more.

  3. Enter a name for the key. The name is used for your reference only and is not part of they key itself.

  4. Click Generate.

Once you generate a subscription key, you won't be able to edit its name. If you need to make changes, revoke the key and generate a new one.

Download a subscription key

Subscription keys are private and can only be downloaded once. After downloading the key, store it in a safe place. If the key becomes lost or compromised, remember to revoke it immediately and ensure that offers using this key are updated.

  1. From Users and Access, click on Keys and select Subscriptions.

  2. Navigate to a key under the Active section, and click Download Key for the key you want to download. Keep in mind that keys can be downloaded only once.

  3. In the dialog, click Download.

Revoke a subscription key

If you no longer want to use a subscription key to validate your offers, you can revoke the key.

  1. From Users and Access, click on Keys and select Subscriptions.

  2. In the upper-right corner, click Edit.

  3. Select the keys you want to revoke.

  4. In the upper-right corner, click Revoke Key, then click Revoke in the dialog. You won't be able to reinstate a key after it's been revoked.

Note that if you revoke a key, customers won't be able to redeem offers associated with that key. Ensure that offers using that key are updated. You will see any revoked keys from the past 30 days under the Revoked section.

Manage apps and versions

Add a new app

Before you can upload a build of your app to App Store Connect, you must first create an app record in your App Store Connect account.

If you would like to offer an app with multiple platforms together as a single purchase for customers, create it as a single record in App Store Connect. All platforms will share the same bundle ID, but information specific to each platform is added separately.

Note: You can’t add an app to your account until the Account Holder user signs the latest agreement in the Agreements, Tax, and Banking section.

Required role: Account Holder, App Manager, or Admin. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, click the Add button (+) in the top-left corner.

    The My Apps page is blank until you create your first app record.

  2. From the pop-up menu, select New App.

  3. In the New App dialog, select one or more platform(s) and enter the app information.

    Note: Watch-only apps are considered part of the iOS platform in App Store Connect. See Creating Independent watchOS Apps to learn more about how to create these apps.

    Screenshot for adding new app
  4. Under User Access, choose Limited Access or Full Access. If you choose Limited Access, select the users that you would like to be able to access this app.

    Users with the Account Holder, Admin, Finance, and Access to Reports roles cannot have their app access limited, so they will see all apps.

  5. Click Create, and look for messages that indicate missing information.

After you create an App Store Connect record for an app, the app appears in My Apps, and the app status is Prepare for Submission. You can select the app on this page to view and edit app information.

Can I deliver my app information using XML?

Yes, Apple offers a command-line tool, Transporter, for submitting metadata, in-app purchases, or screenshots and app previews to the App Store. You can also request Catalog Reports. If you already have Xcode or Transporter for macOS the Transporter command-line is included. See the App Metadata Specification and the Transporter User Guide for more information.

How do I offer an app that runs on multiple platforms as a single purchase?

You can add a platform to an app to create a universal purchase.

Set your developer name on the App Store

Your developer name appears under your app's name on your app's App Store product page. By default, your legal name is used. If you enrolled in the Apple Developer Program as an organization, you may set a different developer name if it's a registered trade name, DBA, or fictitious business name. For example, if your legal name is “Apps Company LLC”, your trade name may simply be “Apps Company”, which can be used on the App Store.

If you’re enrolled as an individual, this option is not available to you and the developer name is the same as your legal name.

You can set your developer name only when adding an app to your account the first time. It cannot be edited or updated later, so it is important to add it correctly.

  1. From My Apps, click the Add button (+).

    The My Apps page is blank until you create your first app.

  2. From the pop-up window, enter your developer name into the Company Name field.

  3. Fill in the other required details and click Create.

Once your app is approved for the App Store, you will see it display under your app name on your product page.

Enter app information

View and edit app information

After you add an app to your account, you can view and edit the app information and platform version information in the My Apps section.

Before you enter app information, review the required, localizable, and editable properties. Some information is required before you upload a build or submit your app for review. You can edit some properties anytime and other properties only when the app status is editable. In addition, you can localize App Store information that appears on the App Store.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

    Tip: If you have several apps, you can use the toolbar controls to find an app.

  2. In the sidebar, select the app version under the platform you wish to edit.

    You can localize the information that appears under Version Information. The information under General App Information is shared across localizations. To learn more about a property, click the question mark next to the field, or go to Platform version information.

  3. To update information that is shared across platforms, select App Information under General from the sidebar. To learn more about a property, click the question mark next to the field, or go to App information.

  4. Click Save.

I updated my app information. Why isn’t it displaying in some app store territories?

When you update your app’s metadata, it can take up to 24 hours to appear in the App Store.

How is my app searchable on the App Store?

Your app is searchable by app name, app subtitle, keywords, and your company name. Learn more about discovery on the App Store.

Set app ratings

You are required to set an age rating for your app. An age rating is a platform version information property that is used by the parental controls on the App Store. App Store Connect provides a list of content descriptions for which you identify how frequently the content appears in your app. Your selections are converted into an App Store app rating as well as additional territory-specific app age ratings.

Some App Store territories have more specific ratings requirements for app sales than others. When you describe your app’s content, App Store Connect displays additional age ratings and restrictions to help you understand the consequences of including some types of content in your app.

The App Store also has a special category for apps targeted at children aged 11 and under. Even if your app isn’t specifically targeted at kids, you help your customers make good choices for children and adults by providing content ratings. If your app rates 9+ or lower in Apple’s age ratings, you can include your app in the Kids category on the store. You target apps inside the Kids category by specifying the age range appropriate for your app. Apps are organized by age range inside the Kids category.

To make sure parents understand what information your app collects and how that information is used, when you identify your app as Made for Kids, provide a URL that links to the privacy policy governing the app.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Edit app age ratings

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the version under the platform you wish to edit.

  3. Scroll to the General App Information section, and next to Age Rating, click Edit.

  4. Select the frequency of the content, and click Done.

  5. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

View territory ratings

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the General Information section, under Age Rating, click Rating in Other Countries/Regions.. A popover appears showing the age ratings in other territories. These age ratings are displayed alongside Apple's rating on your app's product page.

Provide advertising identifier details

Your app must comply with the Advertising Identifier (IDFA) usage in order to be approved by App Review. Therefore, you'll need to indicate whether your app uses IDFA before you submit your app for review.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version you want to submit.

  3. On the right, under the Advertising Identifier section, indicate whether your app uses IDFA.

    If your app uses IDFA, select Yes; otherwise, select No.

    Important: If you select No and App Review later determines that your app uses IDFA, you are notified by email. If you select Yes and your app uses IDFA in ways that don’t match your answers, the app is rejected and the app status changes to Rejected. In either case, correct the answers and resubmit the build.

  4. If you select Yes, enter further details about how your app uses IDFA.

After you submit the app, the app status changes to Waiting for Review. When the review process starts, the app status changes to In Review. For information about tasks you can do in these states, see App statuses.

Do I have to submit all platform builds for review at the same time?

No. Builds for each platform can be submitted separately and the status of one platform’s build does not affect the other.

Provide a custom license agreement

Apple provides a standard EULA (End-User License Agreement) that applies in all territories. If you don’t provide a custom license agreement, the standard Apple EULA is applied to your app and the license agreement link won’t be shown on your App Store product page.

For information about creating a EULA, go to Instructions for Minimum Terms of Developer’s End-User License Agreement. For the text of the standard agreement, go to Licensed Application End User License Agreement.

Edit the license agreement

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar click App Information under General.

  3. On the left, in the General Information section, click Edit next to License Agreement.

  4. In the dialog that appears, select “Apply a custom EULA to all chosen countries or regions.”

  5. In the Custom License Agreement field, enter your custom end-user license agreement as a plain text document.

    All HTML tags are stripped and escaped, and only line break characters are accepted.

    Tip: To add localized text or specify a country or region for your license agreement, add each language and enter the translated text after the previous one, so that your license agreement includes multiple languages.

  6. In the Countries or Regions section, select each country or region where you want to apply your custom license agreement.

  7. Click Done.

  8. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

Localize App Store information

After you add an app to your account, you can add languages and enter localized metadata on your App Information page. For a list of supported languages, see App Store localizations. For the properties you can localize, see Required, localizable, and editable properties.

For example, if the primary language you select for your app in App Store Connect is English and it’s the only language you provide, your app metadata in all App Store territories appears in English. If you localize your app metadata in French, users whose language setting is French will see the French localization. Users in territories where the App Store supports French but not English also see the French localization. Users can search for your app using localized keywords in all territories where the App Store supports French. If there’s no localization available that matches the language setting, the next most relevant localization is used. In other App Store territories, users see your metadata in the primary language (English in this example).

Adding languages to your App Information page in App Store Connect is related to your app metadata, and is not the same as adding languages to your app in Xcode when you localize your binary. To learn about localizing your app binary, read Internationalization and Localization Guide.

Important: You can manage languages only when the app status is editable.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Add a language

When you add a language to your app, screenshots and the properties for the new language default to those for the primary language, except for the description and keywords. When you add a localization from the platform version section, it will automatically be added to the shared metadata under App information and to other platforms.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the upper-right corner, click the primary language to display the language pop-up menu.

  3. Below Not Localized, hover over the language (and locale) you want to add, then click the Add button (+) that appears.

  4. Enter the localized metadata—such as descriptions and keywords—for the platform, then click Save.

    For property descriptions, see Platform version information.

  5. To enter information that is shared across platforms, click App Information under General

  6. In the upper-right corner, click the primary language to display the language pop-up menu.

  7. Hover over the language (and locale) you want to add, then click the Add button (+) that appears.

  8. Enter the app name and privacy policy URL for the language or locale, then in the upper-right corner, click Save.

    For property descriptions, see App information.

Edit localizations

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the upper-right corner, choose the language from the pop-up menu.

  3. Edit the localized information, then in the upper-right corner, click Save.

Delete a language

When you delete a language, the App Store territories that display app information in that language revert to showing the information you entered for the primary language.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the upper-right corner, click the primary language to display the language pop-up menu.

  3. In the Localized section, hover over the language you want to delete and click the Delete button (–).

Change the primary language

You can change the primary language for an app. In order for a language to be selectable as a primary language:

  • You must already have added the language to a previous version.

  • The new language must be approved by App Review. If the language has not been approved, submit a version with this localized metadata to be approved. Then, select it as your primary language on a subsequent update.

  • You must already have uploaded screenshots for that language that were approved by App Review. If the screenshots for that localization are being derived from another localization’s screenshots, you must first manually add screenshots for that language and submit a version with these screenshots to be approved. Then, select it as your primary language on a subsequent update. See Add screenshots and previews for other device sizes and localizations.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. Click App Information under General in the sidebar.

  3. From the Primary Language pop-up menu, choose the new primary language.

  4. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

Set up an app clip experience

An app clip is a small part of your app that you can make discoverable for your users the moment they need it. Users running iOS 14 or later can quickly access these experiences without needing to download the full app. You can set up a default app clip experience and an advanced app clip experience through App Store Connect.

Default app clip experiences can only be invoked through Safari and Messages, and advanced app clip experiences can be invoked by app clip codes that encode a URL and incorporate NFC tags, QR codes, and place cards in Maps. For more information, see Introducing App Clips.

Setting up a default app clip experience is required and includes adding metadata such as the header image, subtitle, and call-to-action verb in App Store Connect. If you choose to register advanced app clip experiences, additional setup is required. See Configuring Your App Clip’s Launch Experience for more details.

When you are ready to submit your app for review, you can optionally provide up to three URLs that are representative of your app clip experience for App Review to evaluate. Add these URLs in the App Clips URLs section below App Review Information toward the bottom of the Version Information page.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Set up a default app clip experience

To get started, upload a build that has an app clip to App Store Connect. You cannot edit the App Clip section until you upload a build with an app clip.

  1. From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, select the iOS app version you wish to add an app clip experience for.

  3. On the right, below App Clip, enter in the required metadata (the header image, subtitle, and a call-to-action verb).

    Default app clip metadata

    This metadata appears on the app clip card when the experience is invoked from Safari or Messages. For the required and localizable properties, refer to Required, localizable, and editable properties.

  4. In the upper-right corner of the page, click Save.

Set up an advanced app clip experience without place association

To get started, upload a build that has an app clip to App Store Connect. You cannot edit the App Clip section until you upload a build with an app clip.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, select the iOS app version you wish to add an app clip experience for.

  3. Below Advanced App Clip Experiences, click Edit Advanced Experiences to register your advanced app clip experience. A new page opens with general information on what to provide for the experience you’re registering.

    App clip landing page
  4. Click Next.

  5. In the App Clip Experience URL field, enter the app clip invocation URL for your app clip experience.

    The bundle ID of the app clip URL will be prepopulated.

  6. Click Next.

  7. Enter the information for the app clip card. To add a Default Display Title and Default Subtitle in an additional language, click Add additional Titles.

  8. Specify that your app clip experience is not associated with a place.

    See tooltips next to each field for more details.

  9. Select a call-to-action verb and click Next.

    Advanced app clip metadata
  10. Answer the question about what is being promoted in this app clip experience. Specify whether the app clip experience represents your app business, service, or brand or if it is promoting a different business, service, or brand powered by your app.

    See Create app clips for other businesses for more information.

  11. If you select a different business or service, select a category.

    Other business options
  12. Click Send to Apple.

    Once you have completed registering an experience, you’ll see all the experiences you’ve configured along with their statuses on the App Clip Experiences page.

Set up an advanced app clip experience with place association

To get started, upload a build that has an app clip to App Store Connect. You cannot edit the App Clip section until you upload a build with an app clip.

If you have a place association, you have to choose a Maps action (this will determine what action appears in the Maps place card if your experience is shown in Maps), place association, and the relationship between your app and your associated place.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, select the iOS app version you wish to add an app clip experience for.

  3. Below Advanced App Clip Experiences, click on Edit Advanced Experiences to register your advanced app clip experience. A new page opens with general information on what to provide for the experience you’re registering.

    Advanced app clip landing page
  4. Click Next.

  5. In the App Clip Experience URL field, enter the app clip invocation URL for your app clip experience.

    The bundle ID of the app clip URL will be prepopulated.

  6. Click Next.

  7. Enter the information for the app clip card. To add a Default Display Title and Default Subtitle in an additional language, click Add additional Titles.

  8. Specify that your app clip experience is associated with a place.

    See tooltips next to each field for more details.

  9. Select a Maps action that best fits the experience and click Next.

    Advanced app clip with no place associated
  10. Choose a place to associate with this app clip experience.

  11. Answer the question about the relationship between your app and the place associated with this app clip experience.

  12. Answer the question about what is being promoted in this app clip experience. Specify whether the app clip experience represents your app business, service, brand, or if it is promoting a different business, service, or brand powered by your app.

    See Create app clips for other businesses for more information.

    Advanced app clip map action
  13. Click Send to Apple.

    Once you have completed registering an experience, you’ll see all the experiences you’ve configured along with their statuses on the App Clip Experiences page.

Deactivate an advanced app clip experience

  1. From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, select the iOS app version you wish to deactivate an app clip experience for.

  3. Below Advanced App Clip Experiences, click on Edit Advanced Experiences.

  4. You’ll see a list of your active app clip experiences. Click on the experience you wish to deactivate.

  5. Scroll to the bottom of the App Clip Experience details page and click Deactivate App Clip Experience.

    Advanced app clip deactivate
  6. In the confirmation dialog that appears, click Deactivate. You’ll be able to reactivate the experience later.

    Advanced app clip deactivate confirmation

View domain URL status

You can check the validation status of your app clip in App Store Connect. The cache status is automatically available to view, but to validate the status of your domains in real time, you can load the debug status.

  1. From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, select the iOS app version that has the app clip you would like to view the domain status for.

  3. In the build section, you can view the cache status under the Domain Status column.

    App clips domain status
  4. To view the debug status, click View Status under the Domain Status column.

  5. In the dialog, click Load Debug Status to view the debug status.

Add watchOS app information

You can use watchOS 6 SDK to create apps for Apple Watch. These can be either iOS apps with a watchOS app or watch-only apps.

To prepare watchOS apps for distribution on the App Store, simply add an iOS app to App Store Connect, then add additional information specific to your app.

Make sure your description includes the app’s functionality on Apple Watch. You also need to provide screenshots for Apple Watch and an App Store icon. Your screenshots and icon will be reviewed by App Review after you submit your new app version.

For details on how to prepare watchOS metadata, go to Preparing Your watchOS App for Submission.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Add watchOS app information

  1. From My Apps, click the Add button (+) in the top-left corner.

  2. From the pop-up menu, choose New App.

  3. In the New App dialog, check the box next to iOS and enter the app information.

  4. Click Create.

  5. Scroll down to the Apple Watch section and if necessary, click the disclosure triangle to reveal the icon and screenshot well.

  6. Drag either Apple Watch Series 3 or Apple Watch Series 4 or Series 5 screenshots to the well.

    See Screenshot specifications. Follow the Human Interface Guidelines when creating your App Store icon.

  7. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

    Note: iOS screenshots are also required for apps with an iOS component, but not required for watch-only apps.

Note: See add an App Store icon for details on uploading your App Store icon.

Add iMessage app information

You can use the Messages framework to create sticker packs or iMessage apps that will be available on the App Store for iMessage. These can be standalone apps or app extensions within a containing iOS app. For more information, see iMessage Apps.

If your app is an iMessage app, sticker pack, or an extension of one of the two, you add your app to App Store Connect, and then add additional information specific to your iMessage app or sticker pack. Keep in mind that you must also submit an App Store icon in addition to the iMessage app icon.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Add iMessage screenshots

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the version under the platform you wish to edit.

  3. Scroll down to the iMessage App section and if necessary, click the disclosure triangle to reveal the well.

  4. Drag the screenshots to the well.

Change iMessage app type

If you want to change the type of iMessage app you offer, you may need to create and submit it as a new app. Currently, sticker packs or iMessage apps can be offered as either:

  • Standalone apps: the app is only accessible within iMessage

  • Extensions to an iOS app: there is a containing iOS app with additional functionality outside of iMessage

You may rebuild your standalone iMessage app as a standalone sticker pack and vice versa, or rebuild your iMessage extension as a sticker pack extension and vice versa, and submit it as a version update to the same app record in App Store Connect. To rebuild your app from a standalone app to an extension of an iOS app or vice versa, you will need to create it as a new app.

Add export compliance information

Export compliance overview

Apps uploaded to App Store Connect are uploaded to an Apple server in the United States. When you submit your app with the intention of distributing your app on the App Store or to external testers through TestFlight outside of the U.S. or Canada, it is considered a U.S. export and is subject to U.S. export laws (regardless of where your legal entity is based).

If your app uses, accesses, contains, implements, or incorporates encryption, this is considered an export of encryption software, and is therefore subject to U.S. export and other country or region import compliance requirements.

Use of encryption includes, but is not limited to:

  • Making calls over secure channels (i.e. HTTPS, SSL, and so on).

  • Using standard encryption algorithms.

  • Using crypto functionality from other sources such as iOS or macOS.

  • Using proprietary or non-standard encryption algorithms. The U.S. Government defines "non-standard cryptography" as any implementation of "cryptography" involving the incorporation or use of proprietary or unpublished cryptographic functionality, including encryption algorithms or protocols that have not been adopted or approved by a duly recognized international standards body ( e.g., IEEE, IETF, ISO, ITU, ETSI, 3GPP, TIA, and GSMA) and have not otherwise been published.

There are also several exemptions available in U.S. export regulations that release apps from compliance obligations if the app is using low level encryption or using encryption for specific purposes. It is your responsibility to read the Export Administration Regulation to determine if your app’s use of encryption is exempted from the compliance requirements. All liabilities associated with misinterpretation of the export regulations or claiming exemption inaccurately are your responsibility. To learn more about encryption export controls, visit the U.S. Department of Commerce Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS) website and search for encryption policy. The Government of France also controls the import and export of encryption apps distributed in France. The main items of control for France are Secure Storage, Secure Communications and Security Anti-Virus applications. Exemptions include Banking and Medical applications. For more information about these French controls, visit the The Agence nationale de la sécurité des systèmes d’information (ANSSI) website.

When you submit a new version of your app, you will be required to answer questions in App Store Connect about your app's use of encryption. Take the steps below before submitting your app to App Review to ensure that you are submitting the right documentation and to bypass these questions if your app does not use encryption.

Step 1: Determine your Export Compliance requirements.

App Store Connect provides a simple way for you to determine your export compliance requirements by presenting you with a set of questions about your app and where you plan to make it available. Keep in mind that these questions are not the same questions that are required prior to submitting an app.

Step 2: Upload your documentation.

If you are required to, use App Store Connect to submit your export compliance documentation.

Step 3: Update your Xcode settings for your build.

Once you've determined that you aren't required to submit export compliance documentation or have uploaded required documentation and received your key from Apple, you can update your Xcode settings so that you don't need to answer encryption questions with each app submission.

Determine your export compliance requirements

App Store Connect provides a set of questions to help you determine if export compliance documentation is required from you, and which forms are needed.

See Export compliance documentation for encryption to understand what documentation you may need to provide.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. Click the Features tab, and in the sidebar, click Encryption.

  3. To access the questions, click the Add button (+) and answer the questions in the dialogs that display.

Note: If you have not entered a description for your app’s primary language, you will need to do that on the platform version page before you can view the questions. See View and edit app information.

If export compliance documentation is required, upload your file using the dialog and take the additional steps.

If no documentation is required, update your Xcode settings to let us know that your app doesn't use encryption or is exempt from providing documentation.

Upload export compliance documentation

If you are required to upload export compliance documentation, you can use the App Store Connect Encryption section to do so before you submit a build to App Review or Beta App Review. Before you provide this documentation, populate certain app information—app description, territories where you intend to distribute your app, and price—in order to avoid delays in approving your documents. Without this information, Apple can’t determine whether the export compliance documents are sufficient.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. Click the Features tab, and in the sidebar, click Encryption.

  3. Click the Add button (+) and answer the questions in the dialogs that display.

    Note: If you have not entered a description for your app’s primary language, you will need to do that on the platform version page before you can view the questions. See View and edit app information.

  4. When presented, click Attach to upload your document.

  5. Click Save.

Apple evaluates export compliance reviews on a case-by-case basis. If complete information is provided, Apple expects to be able to review and clear apps in approximately two business days. Once your documentation is approved, Apple will provide you with a key value to enter in Xcode.

If you have specific questions about Apple's export process, contact us.

Create a new version

When you’re ready to distribute a new version of your app, you create a version using the same app record you created for the original version. The new version will be available free to customers who purchased a previous version. You can only create a new version if the current version status is Ready for Sale or Developer Removed from Sale.

Keep in mind that it's not possible to revert to a previous version on the App Store if you have an issue with your app. You must create and submit a new version.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the Add button (+) next to the desired platform.

  3. In the New Version dialog, enter an incremental App Store version number, and click Create.

  4. Review and enter metadata about the new version.

    When you create a new version, the metadata from the current version is transferred to the new version automatically.

    For a description of the version properties, go to Platform version information. For the required and localizable properties, refer to Required, localizable, and editable properties.

  5. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

  6. Upload your new build to App Store Connect.

    In Xcode, increment the build string before you upload your build to App Store Connect, as described in Set the version number and build string.

  7. When you are ready to submit your build, add it to your latest App Store version, then submit your app to app review.

Add a platform

You can add platforms to an app to create a universal purchase. For example, add the macOS and tvOS version of your app to an existing iOS app to distribute the iOS, macOS, and tvOS apps together.

Similar to creating a new version, the macOS app and tvOS app uses the same Apple ID (an app identifier), SKU, and bundle ID as the iOS app.

When adding macOS and tvOS platforms to an existing iOS app, you must upload the macOS and tvOS builds from a separate Xcode target. In the Xcode project set the bundle IDs to match the iOS app’s bundle ID. However, the macOS app and tvOS app may have different version numbers and build strings than the iOS.

Note: A watchOS app with an iOS companion app is already included in the same Xcode project as the iOS app, so you don't need to add it to a universal purchase. Learn how to add watchOS app information.

Watch-only apps cannot be part of universal purchase.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click either Add iOS App, Add tvOS App, or Add macOS App for the platform you wish to add.

    A version for the platform appears selected in the sidebar with the version number 1.0. You can change the version number in the Version section under General App Information.

    Add platform
  3. Review and enter metadata about the new platform version.

    When you add a platform, metadata from the existing platform version is transferred to the new platform version, except for the promotional text, description, and screenshots.

    For a description of the version properties, go to Platform version information. For the required and localizable properties, refer to Required, localizable, and editable properties.

You can delete a platform if a build has never been uploaded for the platform you wish to delete. Additionally, at least one existing platform version needs to be in an editable app status. See App statuses. If the criteria is met, hover over the platform you wish to delete and click the delete button (–) that appears to the right of the platform.

Transfer an app

App transfer overview

You transfer an app when you’ve sold the app to another developer or you want to move it to another App Store Connect account or organization.

You can transfer the ownership of an app to another developer without removing the app from the App Store. The app retains its reviews and ratings during and after the transfer, and users continue to have access to future updates. Additionally, when an app is transferred, it maintains its Bundle ID — it's not possible to update the Bundle ID after a build has been uploaded for the app.

Step 1: Verify that the app can be transferred

The app must meet specific criteria to be transferable. For example, at least one version of the app must have been released to the App Store. For more criteria, go to App transfer criteria.

Step 2: Back up all app information

Because an app is removed from your account after an app transfer, you should back up all information about the app before you transfer it.

Step 3: Initiate the app transfer

The Account Holder user in your organization initiates the app transfer. Go to Initiate an app transfer.

Step 4: Accept the app transfer

The Account Holder in the recipient organization accepts the app transfer. Go to Accept an app transfer.

Apps that offer auto-renewable subscriptions

Apps that offer auto renewable subscriptions must use an app-specific shared secret.

  • Initiate an app transfer

    Before initiating a transfer for an app that offers auto-renewable subscriptions, generate an app-specific shared secret. Then, share the code with the user of the developer account you are transferring the app to. After sharing the code, initiate the app transfer.

  • Accept an app transfer

    Before you accept an app transfer for an app that offers auto-renewable subscriptions, obtain the app-specific shared secret from the initiator, so that you can update your servers to use the code to verify auto-renewable subscriptions. Once the app transfer is complete, generate an app-specific shared secret so that users outside of your organization no longer have access to it.

Keychain sharing apps

  • Keychain sharing continues to work only until the app is updated. Therefore, the keychain needs to be rebuilt when submitting an update. If the keychain group is defined in the Xcode project, it must be replaced with a keychain group created by the recipient (that includes the recipient's Team ID) for the app to continue using keychain sharing. After users update their app, it will not find an authentication token in the keychain and will ask for a one-time re-login.

Push notifications apps

  • Associated client SSL certificates for push notifications aren’t transferred. If the app uses Apple Push Notifications service (APNs), the recipient needs to create a client SSL certificate using the recipient’s developer account to reenable it.

Game apps

  • Apps that are part of a cross-app Multiplayer Compatibility Matrix are no longer compatible with or appear in the other app’s matrix.

    Apps that are part of a Game Center group are removed from the group during the transfer. After the transfer, all leaderboards and achievements revert back to their original status. Leaderboards that were originally a group leaderboard retain the grp. prefix in their identifier.

    Leaderboards that were originally single leaderboards but were merged into a group lose the grp. prefix. They also revert back to the original leaderboard IDs they had before the merge. Make sure you update the app build with the new leaderboard IDs so that scores are posted correctly.

App bundles

  • When you transfer an app that is part of an app bundle, you can no longer view your app bundle’s history. It is important to make a record of your app bundle information before you transfer the app.

Apple Pay apps

  • If you transfer an app that uses Apple Pay, the merchant ID is not transferred along with the app. Transactions continue to be successful as long as the original certificates are valid. However, when you submit an update, a new merchant ID must be created on the recipient’s account.

Apps using Sign in with Apple

As part of preparing your data for the recipient team, you will need to generate a transfer identifier for all users in your database prior to initiating a transfer. You can generate the transfer identifier for your users at any time via a REST service endpoint provided by Apple.

Additionally:

  • If you have grouped your apps for Sign in with Apple, you will need to ungroup related apps before initiating a transfer. To learn how to do this see Group Apps for Sign in with Apple.

  • The Services ID associated with an app that has configured Sign in with Apple will also be transferred. If you do not want the Service ID to be transferred, you can remove its association to your app before you initiate the transfer.

Apps created with Mac Catalyst

In order to transfer apps created with Mac Catalyst that are not offering universal purchase, both the iPad app (primary app ID) and the Mac app (Mac Catalyst app ID) need to be transferred.

You will need to initiate the transfer for your iPad app first, and then the associated Mac app after. It is important to transfer the Mac app (Mac Catalyst app ID) to the recipient as well, as they will not be able to create a new Mac app based off of the iPad app (primary app ID).

What happens during and after an app transfer

After an app is transferred, its associated App ID is also transferred to the recipient’s developer account. If the transferor’s App ID was a wildcard App ID, it’s converted to an explicit App ID that exactly matches the app’s bundle ID.

The transferor is responsible for exchanging the actual code set and build assets directly with the recipient. Be sure to inform the recipient about any capabilities or App Store configuration added to the app, such as keychain sharing, Game Center, or push notifications, so these are maintained in future updates.

Keep in mind that regardless of app ownership status, new or additional promo codes do not become available after an app has been transferred. Only 100 promo codes can be generated per app version, and are valid for four weeks from the day they are generated.

Data for Sales and Trends and Payments and Financial Reports

If you transfer your app, you will continue to have access to information for payments and sales that occurred prior to the transfer. You will not be able to access information for sales after the transfer has been completed. The recipient of the transferred app will only receive payment and sales information for transactions that occurred after the transfer.

Data for App Analytics

When you transfer an app from your account to someone else, you will no longer have access to the app's data in App Analytics. You can find the historical data of the app in Sales and Trends. If someone transfers an app to you, you'll see all analytics data starting April 1, 2015, or since the app was first made available on the App Store, whichever occurred later.

App transfer criteria

The app must meet the following criteria to be transferable:

  • Both the transferor and recipient accounts can’t be in a pending or changing state, and the latest version of their paid and free agreements in the Agreements, Tax, and Banking section must be accepted.

  • No version of the app can use an iCloud entitlement.

  • No version of the app can use a Passbook entitlement.

  • The App must have had at least one version that has been released to the App Store.

  • The app should have one of the following app statuses:

    Ready for Sale

    Prepare for Submission

    Developer Removed from Sale

    Invalid Binary

    Developer Rejected

    Rejected

    In-app purchase products can have one of the following statuses:

    Approved

    Ready to Submit

    Developer Removed from Sale

    Rejected

  • In-app purchase product IDs on the app can’t be the same as product IDs on any apps in the recipient’s account.

  • TestFlight beta testing should be turned off for all beta versions of the app. You must remove all builds and testers from the app you want transferred and clear each information field below Test Information.

  • Sandboxed Mac apps that share the Application Group Container Directory with other Mac apps cannot be transferred.

Initiate an app transfer

Before you begin, you need the Apple ID for the Account Holder in the receiving organization and meet the criteria for an app transfer. Go to App transfer criteria.

Note: Because an app is removed from your account after an app transfer, you should back up all information about the app for your records. It’s a good idea to keep a record of your appʼs metadata and pricing, note dates the app was available on the App Store, and save sales and download information.

Required role: Account Holder. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. Click App Information under General in the sidebar and scroll to the Additional Information section.

  3. Click Transfer App.

  4. If all criteria have been met, click Continue. Otherwise, click Cancel and resolve the issues.

    See App transfer criteria for details on how to resolve common issues.

  5. Enter the Apple ID for the recipient’s Account Holder and Team ID for the account, and click Continue.

  6. Read the terms, select “I have read and agree to the agreement presented above,” and click Request Transfer.

  7. Click Done to return to the App Information page.

After you initiate the transfer, the app stays in its previous status, with the Pending App Transfer status added, until the recipient accepts it.

While the app is in this state, you (the transferor) can’t edit the app metadata, rights, pricing, and in-app purchases. Any open communications in the Resolution Center are closed. If the app is part of a Game Center group, the recipient can’t make changes to the group.

The transferor and the recipient can cancel an app transfer in Agreements, Tax, and Banking while it is still in the Waiting for Recipient state. To cancel the transfer, the transferor must click Cancel Transfer next to the app in the App Transfers section of the Agreements tab.

Accept an app transfer

You must accept the transfer within 60 days of its initiation.

Required role: Account Holder. See Role permissions.

  1. Sign in to App Store Connect as the Account Holder user.

    A notice indicates that an app is ready to be transferred.

  2. From Agreements, Tax, and Banking, you will see an app transfer alert in the Agreements section.

  3. Under App Transfers on the right, click Review.

  4. Enter the new metadata.

    • Support URL

    • Atom feed URL (required if the app previously had an atom feed URL)

    • Marketing URL (required if the app previously had a marketing URL)

    • Privacy policy URL (required if the app previously had a privacy policy URL)

    • CCATS (a new CCATS form is required for apps that use export compliance)

    • App Review contact information

    • App Store contact information

  5. Read the terms, select “I have read and agree to the agreement presented above,” and click Accept.

It can take up to two business days for the app transfer to complete, during which the app status is Processing App Transfer.

While the app is in this state, the transferor can’t edit the app metadata, rights, pricing, and in-app purchases. Any open communications in the Resolution Center are closed. If the app is part of a Game Center group, you can’t make changes to the group.

The transferor and the recipient can cancel an app transfer in Agreements, Tax, and Banking while it is still in the Waiting for Recipient state. The recipient can cancel the transfer by clicking Review next to the app in the App Transfers section and clicking Decline on the App Transfer page.

When the transfer is complete, you own it. The app no longer appears in the transferor’s App Store Connect account.

Remove an app

To remove an app from your main view in My Apps, it must be first removed from the App Store and any associated in-app purchases must be removed from sale.

Additionally, you can only remove apps if all versions of that app are in one of the following states:

Prepare for Submission

Invalid Binary

Developer Rejected

Rejected

Metadata Rejected

Developer Removed from Sale

Removed from Sale

Apps can’t be removed if they are part of a Game Center group, in an app bundle, currently available on the App Store, associated with in-app purchases available for sale, or if they're being actively transferred to another account.

If the app is part of a Game Center group or app bundle and hasn't been approved yet, it must be removed from the group or bundle before it can be removed from your main view in My Apps. App bundles and approved apps that are part of a Game Center group cannot be removed.

WARNING: If you remove an app, you will lose ownership of the app name. Removed apps can only be restored if the name is not currently in use by another developer account. In addition, the SKU can’t be reused in the same organization and if you’ve uploaded a build, your bundle ID can’t be reused.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin. See Role permissions.

Remove an app

  1. From My Apps, select the app you want to remove. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. Click App Information under General in the sidebar.

  3. Scroll to the Additional Information section, then click Remove App. If you don’t see Remove App, make sure you are an Account Holder or Admin and that your app is in a state which allows removal.

  4. In the dialog that appears, click Remove.

Restore an app

  1. From My Apps, click the arrow next to All Statuses in the upper right-hand corner.

  2. From the drop-down menu, choose Removed Apps.

  3. Select the app you want to restore.

  4. Click App Information under General in the sidebar.

  5. Scroll to the Additional Information section and click Restore App.

  6. In the dialog that appears, choose Limited Access or Full Access. If you select Full Access, all users will have access to the app. Users with the Admin, Finance, and Access to Reports roles will always have access to all apps. Then click Restore.

If the app name is no longer available, the app cannot be restored. If you believe an app is preventing you from using your trademark as an app name on the App Store, you can submit a claim.

Edit an app's user access

You can limit app access to specific people within your App Store Connect account if they have the App Manager, Customer Support, Developer, Marketing, or Sales (without Access to Reports) roles.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. Click App Information under General in the sidebar, then scroll to the Additional Information section and click Edit User Access.

  3. Choose Limited Access or Full Access. If you select Full Access, all users will have access to the app. Users with the Admin, Finance, and Access to Reports roles will always have access to all apps.

  4. Select the users that should have access to the app, then click Save.

Add app icon, app previews, and screenshots

App Store icon, app preview, and screenshots overview

You provide an App Store icon, three app previews, and 10 screenshots of your app for your App Store product page.

App Store Icon

You must provide an App Store icon, which is used to represent your app in different sections of the App Store. Follow the Human Interface Guidelines when creating your App Store icon. For details, go to Add an App Store icon.

Screenshots and App Previews

You use screenshots and app previews to visually communicate your app’s user experience through images or a short video captured from your app that will display on your App Store product page. You must upload at least one screenshot of your app, and uploading an app preview is optional. For marketing guidelines, go to Making the most of your product page on the App Store or Show More with App Previews.

There are two ways to upload your screenshots and app previews to the App Store. You can upload them on the platform section of your app’s page in App Store Connect, or you can use a Transporter XML feed to deliver screenshots in batches, as described in App Metadata Specification and Transporter User Guide.

For screenshot specifications, go to Screenshot specifications or App preview specifications.

App Preview Requirements

You can upload app previews for macOS, iOS, and tvOS apps. To create and upload an app preview, you must have:

  • A Mac running macOS 10.10 or later, with Safari 8 or later

  • A video editor such as iMovie or Final Cut Pro X

  • A device running iOS 8 or later for the 5.5-Inch Display for iPhone and 12.9-Inch Display for iPad or an Apple TV

When you upload your app previews, keep this in mind:

  • App previews appear on the App Store before screenshots on Mac, iPhone, iPad, and Apple TV.

  • You set the app preview poster frame, which is the image that displays to customers on the App Store.

  • After you upload your app previews, they may take up to 24 hours to be processed.

  • You can remove an app preview at any time, but upload an app preview only when the app status is editable.

  • App previews are not available on the App Store for iMessage.

  • For iOS apps, you can upload app previews in Landscape or Portrait mode. When the customer plays the video, the app preview rotates to the native orientation. For macOS and tvOS apps, you can only provide app previews in landscape.

To create an app preview, go to Creating Videos for App Previews.

Add an App Store icon

You must provide an App Store icon, which is used to represent your app in different sections of the App Store. Follow the Human Interface Guidelines when creating your App Store icon.

To change your App Store icon after you published your app on the App Store, you must create and upload a new version and Submit your app for review.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Developer. See Role permissions.

Add an App Store icon in Xcode

  1. To add your App Store icon to an asset catalog located in the Xcode project, go to Add an App Store icon in Xcode Help.

  2. After you add icons in Xcode, upload the build to App Store Connect.

Upload app previews and screenshots

Upload up to three app previews and up to ten screenshots. If your app is the same across multiple device sizes and localizations, simply provide the highest-resolution screenshots required.

For iPhone, screenshots for 6.5-inch iPhone Xs Max and 5.5-inch devices (iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8 Plus) are required. These screenshots will scale down for smaller device sizes.

For iPad, screenshots for 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) and 12.9-inch iPad Pro (3rd generation) are required. These screenshots will scale down for smaller device sizes.

If your app doesn’t look or behave identically in all languages and on all supported devices, you can add screenshots or app previews for other device sizes and localizations.

Whether you choose to use higher-resolution assets to cascade down to smaller device sizes, or use an individual set of assets for every device size, you must use the same option for both your app previews and screenshots per localization.

If your app uses the Messages framework or WatchKit, additional screenshots are required. For macOS and tvOS apps, a separate set of screenshots is required.

You can rearrange the screenshots and app previews when you edit the app record, but app previews will always appear before the screenshots.

Screenshots and app previews can be uploaded only when the app status is editable.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.

  3. Drag your screenshots and app preview in to the appropriate well.

    Optionally, click View All Sizes in Media Manager to view the high-resolution screenshots scaled for the other device sizes.

    If you don’t want to use the scaled screenshots or app previews, you can add screenshots for other device sizes using Media Manager.

After you submit your app for review and your app is approved, you need to create a new version to update screenshots.

Add screenshots and previews for other device sizes and localizations

If you don’t want to use scaled versions of your high-resolution screenshots or app previews for the other device sizes, you can add custom screenshots for the other device sizes and localizations using Media Manager.

Screenshots and app previews can be uploaded only when the app status is editable.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.

  3. In the App Preview and Screenshots section, click View All Sizes in Media Manager.

  4. In the upper-right corner, choose the language from the pop-up menu.

  5. Click Edit for the device size where you wish to upload custom screenshots.

  6. Drag the screenshots or app previews to the appropriate device size well.

Remove an app preview or screenshots

You can remove an app preview at any time but remove screenshots only if the app status is editable. For the statuses that are editable, go to App statuses.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.

  3. In the App Preview and Screenshots section, click View All Sizes in Media Manager.

  4. Scroll to the device size where you want to delete the app preview or screenshots.

    If you want to remove it for a specific localization, in the upper-right corner, choose the language from the pop-up menu.

  5. Hover over the screenshot or app preview that you want to delete, and click on the Delete button (–).

    Keep in mind that if a screenshot or app preview is used for other device sizes or localizations, it will be deleted in all places.

Set an app preview poster frame

An app preview poster frame can be edited only when the app status is editable.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.

  3. In the App Preview and Screenshots section, click View All Sizes in Media Manager.

  4. Scroll to the device size where you want to edit the app preview.

  5. Hover over the app preview and click Edit Poster Frame.

  6. Select the new poster frame or restore the default frame.

    Use the playback controls to navigate to the frame of the video you want to use for your poster frame.

  7. To select the currently displayed frame of the video as your poster frame, click Set Poster Frame.

  8. To save the poster frame, click Done.

Manage builds

Uploading builds overview

After you add an app to your account, you can upload a build with one of several upload tools (see Upload tools for more information). Later, you can upload more builds as your app changes, distribute a build for testing, or submit your app for review.

The first time you upload a build, a beta version of the app is created in your account. However, the build needs to be processed in Apple’s system before it appears in App Store Connect. You receive an email when this process is complete.

When you upload a build, the bundle ID and version number (located in the app bundle) are used to associate the build with the app and version record in App Store Connect. The build string is used to uniquely identify the build throughout the system.

View builds and file sizes

You can view all the builds you upload for an app and the size of variants created by the App Store. Some builds may not appear after the app is released on the App Store.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Developer. See Role permissions.

View build details

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the Activity tab to view all builds.

  3. In the sidebar, select the platform you want to view builds for (iOS, macOS, or tvOS).

    The builds are organized by version number.

  4. To show builds you uploaded for a version, click the disclosure triangle next to the version number. You can see the app status description under the App Store Status column.

  5. To view details about a build, click the app icon or build string that appear in the Build column.

    The build details shows the file sizes of a build (iOS, tvOS), whether the build contains an iMessage extension, and other build information.

View the file sizes of a build (iOS, tvOS)

After you upload a build to App Store Connect, it goes through a process called app thinning, which creates variants of your app for different devices and operating system versions. You can view the size of the variants—the amount of space the app takes on the customer’s device—directly in App Store Connect.

Note: When your app is approved for the App Store, it is encrypted with DRM and recompressed. The added encryption and DRM affects the ability to compress your binary, and as a result you may see a larger App Store file size for your binary than the binary you uploaded on App Store Connect. The exact final size for your app cannot be determined in advance to the accuracy of a single byte.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the Activity tab

  3. In the sidebar, select the platform you want to view builds for (iOS, macOS, or tvOS).

  4. On the right, in the Build column, click the app icon or build string for the build you want to view.

  5. Below General Information, click App Store File Sizes.

    A table appears showing the different variant sizes.

    • The device type is the target device for the variant. Universal refers to the variant that runs on all supported operating systems and target devices that are delivered to customers running iOS 8 and earlier, apps purchased in volume through Apple School Manager and Apple Business Manager or through Mobile Device Management (MDM), or apps downloaded using iTunes 12.6 or earlier.

    • The install size is the amount of disk space the app consumes on the customer’s device. The install size also appears on your app’s product page in the Information section.

    • The download size is the compressed size of the app that is downloaded over the air, using cellular bandwidth or Wi-Fi.

If any of the device variant sizes exceed the 200 MB over-the-air download limit, a yellow warning appears next to the build string in the Builds table and next to the variant size in the App Store File Sizes table. Click the warning icon to read the full warning. Apple will also send you an email with this information.

Choose the build before you submit to review

Before you submit an app to App Review, you choose which build (from all the builds you uploaded for a version) that you want to submit. You can associate only one build with an App Store version. However, you can change the build as often as you want until you submit the version to App Review.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Add a build to a version

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.

  3. On the right, scroll down to the Build section, then click the Add button (+) next to Build.

    The Add button appears if you’ve uploaded builds and have not selected a build yet. If you see a build, remove the build first.

  4. In the Add Build dialog, select the build you want to submit.

    If an earlier version of your app has the status Ready for Sale in the App Store, then the builds list includes only builds you have uploaded since that version became available. For details on which builds are available, go to View builds and file sizes.

  5. Click Done.

    In the Build section, the app icon, build string, and upload date and time appears.

  6. In the upper-right corner of the page, click Save.

    Note: If you have selected a build that shows Missing Compliance Information, you will need to answer the Export Compliance Information questions before you can submit for review. Click on Missing Compliance next to the build and answer the questions or follow the steps in Upload export compliance documentation.

Remove a build from a version

Removing a build from an App Store version doesn’t remove the build from your account.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.

  3. On the right, scroll down to the Build section.

  4. Hover over the build and click the Delete button (–) that appears to the right of the upload date.

  5. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

Test a beta version

TestFlight beta testing overview (iOS, tvOS, watchOS)

TestFlight beta testing lets you distribute beta builds of your app to testers and collect feedback. You can enable TestFlight beta testing for up to 100 apps at one time in your App Store Connect account. Learn more.

Make improvements to your app and continue distributing builds until all issues are resolved before you submit your app to the App Store.

If your app includes an app clip, you can also have your testers test the app clip experience, see Test an app clip experience. Testers who are invited to test your app will be able to test both the beta app and the app clip. Only the app or the app clip can be installed on a device at one time, but testers may choose to switch between the two at any time.

Step 1: Enter your test information

Enter test information about your app, such as a description and feedback email. You will need this if you plan to distribute your build to external testers (persons outside your team).

Step 2: Upload your build

Upload your build to the App Store. Read Cryptography and U.S. Export Compliance to determine if you need to provide export compliance documentation for your app. After builds are uploaded, they are available for testing for 90 days.

Step 3: Invite internal and external testers

Add internal testers (up to 100 App Store Connect users in your organization) so they have access to the builds you distribute. You can create groups for external testers, then assign specific builds to them. After you've added builds to your group, you can add external testers (up to 10,000 persons outside your organization) who you want to test your app. If you invite external testers, the build needs to be approved by Beta App Review before testing can begin.

Step 4: Testers download TestFlight and accept your invitations

Testers install the free TestFlight app on their devices. Then testers use their invitation email or a public link to accept invitations, install your app, send feedback, and get updates. Testers download and install thinned variants of your app.

Step 5: View tester and build information

Track your tester engagement and your app’s performance by viewing build status and metrics in App Store Connect—such as numbers of sessions and crashes. You can also resend email invitations to testers who have not yet accepted their invitation.

Step 6: Collect feedback from testers

Testers running TestFlight for iOS, version 2.3 and later and iOS 13, can send feedback through the TestFlight app or directly from your beta app by taking a screenshot. You can view this tester feedback in the Feedback section in App Store Connect. Testers running tvOS or earlier versions of iOS can send feedback to the email address you specified in Step 1.

Step 7: Stop testing

When you are done testing, you can optionally expire a build to stop testing it, and then go to Overview of publishing an app for the process of submitting your app to the App Store. If you don’t expire your build and submit it to the App Store, testers that have received an invite to test will still be able to test your build even after it goes live on the App Store. Your build will become unavailable in TestFlight after 90 days.

Do I need to get approval to start testing beta builds?

To make your beta builds available to members of your App Store Connect team, your app doesn’t need review by Beta App Review. To make your beta builds available to external users, your beta build may require review. When you add the first build of your app to a group, the build gets sent to beta app review to make sure it follows the App Store Review Guidelines. A review is only required for the first build of a version and subsequent builds may not need a full review. Testing can begin once a build is approved.

Enter test information for external testing

If you distribute your app to external testers, you need to enter additional TestFlight test information about your app for Beta App Review. You can enter this information when you add your app to your account or before you invite external testers.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under App Information, click Test Information.

  4. On the right, choose a language option and enter required test information.

    The information you enter for your beta app can be different from the information you enter later when submitting your app to the App Store.

    • In the Beta App Description text field, enter a description of your beta version.

    • In the Feedback Email field, enter the email address that testers can use to contact you through the TestFlight app. This is also the reply-to address in email invitations to testers.

    For descriptions of the Beta App Review Information properties, go to App Review information.

You can update this information anytime and testers will see the updates in the TestFlight app.

Test an app clip experience

With app clips, you can take a small part of your app and make it discoverable and quick to launch at the moment it’s needed. If your app contains an app clip, you can add up to three invocation URLs to launch different experiences. Testers running TestFlight for iOS, version 2.7 or later, and iOS 14 beta or later can test and provide feedback on all available app clip experiences. Testing of other invocation methods is not currently supported. See Testing Your App Clip’s Launch Experience for more information on invocation URLs for testing.

To view tester feedback for your app clip experiences, see View tester feedback.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Add an app clip invocation

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, below Builds, click the iOS platform.

  4. On the right, in the Builds column, click the app icon or build string for the build that has the app clip you would like to test. The page opens with the Test Information tab selected.

  5. Under App Clip Invocations, click App Clip Invocation.

    Add app clip invocation
  6. In the dialog that appears, enter the title and URL for your app clip invocation.

    Add app clip invocation dialog

    Note: You can localize the app clip title for each URL based on the localizations you have added for your build in TestFlight, but the URL will be the same across localizations.

  7. Click Add.

  8. In the upper-right corner of the page, click Save.

    Note: An app clip experience can be launched and tested in TestFlight as long as an app clip is added to the build, but if you want to provide defined experiences, you can add up to three invocation URLs.

Delete an app clip invocation

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, below Builds, click the iOS platform.

  4. On the right, in the Build column, click the app icon or build string for the build that has the app clip invocation you would like to delete. The page opens with Test Information tab selected.

  5. Under App Clip Invocations, hover over the app clip invocation and click the delete button (–) that appears to the right of the URL.

    Delete app clip
  6. In the dialog that appears, click Delete.

    App clip delete confirmation
  7. In the upper-right corner of the page, click Save.

Manage testers

Add internal testers

You can add up to 100 internal testers (your App Store Connect users) to test your app using TestFlight beta testing. You won't be able to add testers until you’ve uploaded at least one build.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Testers & Groups, click App Store Connect users.

  4. Next to Testers, click the Add button (+).

    The users that are eligible to be internal testers appear in a dialog.

    Note: If a user you want to add doesn’t appear, change their user roles.

  5. Check the box next to the users you want to invite, and click Add.

If you have builds available for testing, the users you selected will receive an email inviting them to test the app. The users will be directed to accept the invitation using the TestFlight app on their device or via a redemption code. Internal testers will be able to download and test all builds for 90 days.

Invite external testers

You can invite external testers (persons outside your team) to test your app using TestFlight beta testing once you’ve uploaded at least one build. To make your build available for external testing, create a group, add builds, and then invite testers using their email address or by sharing a public invitation link.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Create a group

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, click the Add button (+) next to Testers & Groups, to add a new group.

  4. In the dialog that appears, enter a group name and click Create.

    Later, you can change the name of the group if needed.

Add builds to a group

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Testers & Groups, select the group you want to add builds to.

  4. On the right, click the Add button (+) next to Builds.

  5. In the build dialog, select the platform and version from the pop-up menus.

  6. From the table, select a build and click Next.

    You can add only one build at a time, but can add additional builds to the group later.

  7. In the What to Test dialog, enter what you want your testers to focus on.

  8. Optionally, enter localized versions of testing information in the text fields under each language specific drop-down.

  9. Optionally, select “Automatically notify testers.”

    If you leave this box unselected, you will have to manually distribute the build to testers after it's approved by Beta App Review later.

  10. Depending on the status of the build, click either Submit Review or Start Testing.

    You will only be able to have one build in each version in review at a time. Once that build is approved, you can submit additional builds.

After you submit your build to Beta App Review, Apple reviews the build and the accompanying metadata. The first build you submit requires a full review, but later builds for the same version may not.

If Apple approves your build for TestFlight beta testing, users on the App Store Connect account with the Admin role will receive an email notifying them of the approval.

If Apple rejects your build or metadata, the external status will be Rejected and you can click status to see rejection details.

Note: Submitting a build to Beta App Review doesn’t submit it to App Review for sale in the App Store.

Invite external testers

Once you have builds available to test, and you've added them to a group, you can invite testers.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Testers & Groups, select a group.

    You can Invite testers using a public link, email, or both.

To invite testers using a public link:

1. Click Enable Public Link, and confirm in the dialog that appears.

2. Under Tester Count, click Set Limit to limit the number of testers that can join this testing group using the public link. Enter a number between 1 and 10,000.

set tester limit

3. Copy the link, and share it using social media, messages, email, or other channel.

Keep in mind that anyone can share this link, so testers may be able to join your testing group even if you don't invite them directly. If a tester joins your group using a public link, their name and email will not be displayed in the Testers section in App Store Connect (it will display as anonymous), but you will be able to see their installation date, sessions, and crashes. You can disable the public link at any time.

To invite testers using their email address:

1. Click the Add button (+) next to Testers.

2. In the pop-up menu that appears, choose an option. You can add new testers using their emails address, existing testers you've previously added, or import testers from a CSV file.

3. Testers you invite will get an invitation email to start testing. If a tester accepts an email invitation, their name, email address, installation date, sessions, and crashes, will display in the Testers section in App Store Connect.

Notify external testers after your build is approved

If you didn’t select “Automatically notify testers” when you added your build to your group, you must manually notify testers when your build is approved.

Note: This does not apply to testers that join an external group with a public link.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Builds, click the platform for your app (iOS or tvOS).

  4. Choose a version, then under Status, click Notify Testers for the build row.

The build status changes to Testing. The external testers will receive a notification directing them to accept the invitation using the TestFlight app on their device.

Remove a build from a group

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Testers &Groups, select a group.

  4. On the right, under Builds, hover over the build you want to remove.

  5. Click the delete button.

  6. In the dialog that appears, confirm you want to remove the build from the group and click Remove.

If you want to remove a build from testing for all your testers, go to Stop testing a build.

How do I appeal if my beta build was rejected?

To appeal your beta build being rejected, contact Beta App Review.

View tester information

If you use TestFlight beta testing, you can view information about testers and measure tester engagement.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Testers & Groups, select a group.

  4. In the Status column, view the status of testers. If a user was invited with an invitation email, their name and email address will display. If a user was invited with a public link, they will display as anonymous.

    The possible statuses are:

    Status

    Description

    Invited

    The invite was sent to the tester.

    Accepted

    The tester accepted the invite. (You can resend email invites to testers who have not yet accepted.)

    Installed

    The tester downloaded the build.

  5. In the Sessions column, view the number of times the app has been in the foreground for at least two seconds.

    If the app is in the background and is later used again, that counts as another session.

  6. In the Crashes column, view the number of crashes for each build.

    You can view crash reports for TestFlight builds in the Crashes organizer in Xcode.

    You can also download a CSV by clicking on the download button from the top right of the page, which includes your tester’s first name, last name, and email address. Data points such as Status, Sessions, and Crashes are not included.

    Additionally, testers invited with a public link are not included in the CSV since their first name, last name, and email address is anonymized.

Remove or delete testers

Remove testers from a group

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Testers & Groups, select a group.

    Note: If you have testers that were added by both email and public link, first select the invitation type you would like to remove testers from.

  4. On the right, above the table of testers, click Edit.

    how to remove testers from a group
  5. Select the testers you want to remove and click Remove.

  6. In the dialog that appears, select to remove testers from the group.

    select to remove testers from the group
  7. Click Remove from Group.

If you want to delete the testers from TestFlight all together, select Delete this tester from TestFlight.

Delete testers from TestFlight

Testers deleted from TestFight will no longer have access to your app in TestFlight.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Testers & Groups, select All Testers.

  4. On the right, above the table of testers, click Edit.

    Delete from TestFlight
  5. Select the testers you want to remove and click Delete.

  6. In the dialog that appears, click Delete from TestFlight.

    How to delete from TestFlight

Manage beta builds

Add testers to builds

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Add a group to a build

You will need to create a group before adding it to a build. All testers in these groups will have access to the build.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Builds, click the platform (iOS or tvOS).

  4. On the right, in the Build column, click the app icon or build string for the build.

  5. Next to Group, click the Add button (+).

  6. Select the group you want to add to the build and click Add.

    You will not be able to select a group that the build is already added to.

    Add group to build

Add individuals to a build

You can add individual internal or external testers to a build.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Builds, click the platform (iOS or tvOS).

  4. On the right, in the Build column, click the app icon or build string for the build.

  5. Next to Individual Tester(s), click the Add button (+) and choose an option from the pop-up menu.

    You can add new testers, existing testers, or import testers from a CSV file.

    TestFlight add tester
  6. Enter the required information for a tester and click Invite.

Remove external groups or individuals from a build

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Builds, click the platform (iOS or tvOS).

  4. On the right, in the Build column, click the app icon or build string for the build.

  5. Under either Groups or Individual Tester(s), hover over the group or individual tester you want to remove and click the Delete button (–) that appears to the right of the table.

  6. In the dialog that appears, click Remove.

    All eligible builds are automatically available to users in the App Store Connect Users group. See Remove testers from a group to remove a user from this group.

View build status and metrics

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, under Builds, click the platform (iOS or tvOS).

  4. In the table on the right, view the build status and metrics.

    TestFlight build status metrics

    In the Status column, view the status of a build. In the other columns, view the number of invited testers, number of installations on devices, and number of active testers in the past 7 days. In the Crashes column, view the number of times the build crashed on tester devices. In the Feedback column, for iOS builds, view the number of feedback submissions you received from your testers.

TestFlight testers automatically share crash logs with developers. Therefore, you can view crash reports directly in Xcode for apps distributed using TestFlight.

View tester feedback

Feedback submitted by testers running TestFlight for iOS, version 2.3 or later and iOS 13 or later can be viewed in App Store Connect. This includes screenshots, comments related to a crash, or just general comments.

App clip experience feedback can be submitted by users running iOS 14 beta or later.

Testers running TestFlight for iOS, version 2.2.1 or earlier and iOS 12.4 and earlier can send feedback to the email address you specify in the feedback email field in test information.

Note: If a tester was invited with an invitation email, their email address will display in the detailed feedback view. If a tester was invited with a public link, they will display as anonymous, unless they entered their email address when submitting feedback. The email address will only display for that particular piece of feedback. See Beta tester feedback to learn more about the additional information that is available in the detailed feedback view.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

View feedback

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, below Feedback, click Screenshots.

  4. View screenshots and comments submitted by testers.

    You can filter your view by app versions, builds, devices, iOS versions, or tester groups.

    screenshot feedback
  5. Click on the feedback to view the full screenshot and what testers had to say about their experience. Tester, app, and device information is also available in the detailed feedback view. See Beta tester feedback to learn more.

  6. In the upper-right corner, click the download icon to download the feedback as a .zip file. This file will include the screenshot and the comments associated with the screenshot.

View crash feedback

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, below Feedback, click Crashes.

  4. In the table on the right, view when the feedback was submitted and other crash details.

    You can filter your view by app versions, builds, devices, iOS versions, or tester groups.

    crash feedback
  5. Click on the feedback to read what testers had to say about their experience. Tester, app, and device information is also available in the detailed feedback view. See Beta tester feedback to learn more.

  6. In the upper-right corner, click the download icon to download the feedback as a .zip file. This file will include the crash report and the comments associated with the crash.

Delete feedback

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, below Feedback, click Crashes or Screenshots.

  4. Then, click on the feedback you want to delete.

  5. From the detailed feedback view, click Delete.

  6. In the dialog that appears, click Delete Feedback.

    Delete feedback

You can also delete the tester that submitted the feedback by clicking Delete Tester & Feedback. The tester will be removed from TestFlight. Removed testers may be re-invited to test your app.

Disable Feedback

You can disable the ability for tester groups to take a screenshot and submit feedback from your beta app and provide additional details about a crash. If you decide you want to receive feedback directly from your beta app and feedback related to a crash again, you can re-enable it. All testers will still be able to send email feedback from the TestFlight app.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, below Testers & Groups, select a tester group.

  4. Under Tester Feedback, click Disable.

  5. In the dialog that appears, select Disable.

    disable tester feedback
  6. To enable feedback, click Enable below Tester Feedback. In the dialog that appears, select Enable.

    Enable tester feedback

Why is one of my testers unable to submit feedback through my beta app even though they are part of a group that feedback is enabled for?

If a tester is a part of multiple groups, and one of the groups has feedback disabled, they will only be able to submit email feedback from the TestFlight app.

Provide export compliance for beta builds

If you don’t complete the export compliance, the status of the beta build is Missing Compliance. You can answer the required export compliance questions in the TestFlight section.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, below Builds, click the platform (iOS or tvOS).

  4. In the table on the right, in the Build column, click the app icon or build string for the build that is missing compliance information.

    Export compliance for TestFlight

    Alternatively, you can click Manage and answer the required questions.

  5. Click Provide Export Compliance Information, and answer the required questions.

Stop testing a build

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the TestFlight tab.

  3. In the sidebar, below Builds, click the platform (iOS or tvOS).

  4. In the table on the right, in the Build column, click the app icon or build string for the build that is missing compliance information.

  5. Click Expire Build.

Internal testers and external testers will no longer be able to install this build.

Publish on the App Store

Overview of publishing an app

This is the general workflow for publishing an app to the App Store.

Step 1: Choose your build

Each app can have multiple versions, and each version can have multiple builds. To publish your app on the App Store, choose which build to submit to review.

Step 2: Set pricing and availability

You must set a price for your app and can select specific territories for your app. Your app is available in all App Store countries and regions by default. You also have the option to publish your app as a pre-order.

Step 3: Submit your app for review

You submit your app for review to start the App Review process and to make your app available on the App Store. Before you submit an app, enter all the required metadata and choose if you want to release your app manually or automatically, or if you want to release your app in phases.

Step 4: View your app status and resolve review issues

After you submit the app, the app status changes to Waiting for Review. If there are any issues with your app, read and reply to App Review communications. After your app is approved, it can take up to 24 hours to go live on the App Store.

Step 5: Request promo codes

After your app is approved, you can request promo codes to distribute to users before you make your app available on the App Store. You can distribute the promo codes by email or other means, and the user enters the promo code when purchasing the app.

Set pricing and availability

Set a price for your app

Before you submit your app for review, you must set a price for your app, which will be used for all App Store territories. If you don’t have a Paid Applications agreement, you can only choose a free price.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

    On the right, the Price Schedule appears showing the price.

  3. In the Price column, choose a price tier from the pop-up menu.

  4. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

What currency is used for a given App Store territory?

You can refer to Exhibit C of your Paid Applications agreement to see the currency used by a specific App Store territory.

Publish your app as a pre-order

Before releasing your app on the App Store for the first time, you can choose to offer it as a pre-order. Customers can see your product page and order your app before it's released for download. Once your app is released, customers will be notified and your app will automatically download to their device. For paid apps, customers will be charged before download.

Free or paid apps on all Apple platforms are eligible to use this feature. In-app purchases cannot be set up for pre-order, but you can set up your in-app purchases, including promotional metadata, in App Store Connect prior to and during the pre-order period so that everything is ready once your app is released for download. Promoted in-app purchases will not display on your App Store product page until your app is released for download.

To make your app available for pre-order, select the appropriate setting and submit your app, build, and metadata to App Review. After your app is approved, you can publish it as a pre-order on the App Store. Your pre-order will be available in all territories where your app is available.

While your app is available for pre-order, you can update your app by creating and submitting a new version. The new version must be approved before it can be published as a pre-order on the App Store, so be sure to follow the App Review Guidelines. If you submit a version update during the pre-order period, customers will receive the latest version published to the App Store once your app is released for download.

You may also adjust the price of your app during the pre-order period, but keep in mind that if you change pricing, customers will be charged the price that is lower — the price they accepted for pre-order or the price on the day of release.

The app will automatically download to the device on which a customer made the pre-order, and will download to all of a customer’s other devices if the customer has turned on automatic downloads.

Keep in mind that app bundles cannot be made available for pre-order and cannot include apps that are available for pre-order. Apps that are offered for pre-order will not be made available in new app bundles.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Publish your app as a pre-order

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

    You'll see the Pre-Orders section if your app has never been published on the App Store.

    Select Pricing and Availability in the left column.
  3. Select Make available for pre-order, choose a date to release your app for download, then click Save in the upper-right corner.

    The release date must be at least two days in the future, but no more than 90 days in the future.

    Making your app available for pre-order removes other Version Release options from the platform version information page.

    Select Make available for pre-order.
  4. Submit your app for review.

  5. Once your app is approved and you're ready to make it available for pre-order, return to Pricing and Availability. Confirm the date your app will be released for download, and click Release as Pre-Order in the upper-right corner.

    You may edit the release date during the pre-order period, but it must be within 90 days from when the app was first available for pre-order on the App Store.

    Click Release as Pre-Order in the upper-right corner.

Release your app to customers immediately

While your app is available for pre-order, you have the option to release your app to customers immediately.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

  3. In the upper-right corner, click Release App Now.

  4. In the dialog that appears, select Release.

    Release app now screenshot

    Your app will be released to the App Store. Customers who pre-ordered your app will be notified and your app will automatically download to their device. For paid apps, customers will be charged before download.

Remove your pre-order offer from the App Store

  • To remove your pre-order offer from the App Store, select Remove from Sale in the Pricing and Availability section, then click Save. For more information, see remove an app from the App Store.

  • If you remove your pre-order offer from the App Store, customers who already pre-ordered your app will not receive the app and will not be charged unless you make it available for pre-order again before the release date. Additionally, once the release date passes, you will no longer be able to re-publish your app as a pre-order.

Schedule price changes

If you have a Paid Applications agreement, you can schedule price changes for your app over time. You can schedule pricing changes that have a definite start and end date, as well as permanent pricing changes that have no end. For example, you can set a promotional price for a month then return to the regular price.

For apps that offer in-app purchases, you can also schedule pricing changes for the in-app purchases. For more information, see Set in-app purchase pricing or Manage pricing for auto-renewable subscriptions.

To schedule price changes, you must have an app that has been submitted for review. You can schedule one or more price changes.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

    On the right, the Price Schedule appears showing the price, start date, and end date for each price change.

  3. Click the Add button (+) next to Price Schedule.

  4. In the dialog that appears, choose a price tier from the Price pop-up menu.

  5. Then select a Start Date and End Date.

    The start date can’t be more than a year from the current date. The default start date is the current date, and the default end date is No End Date (meaning the price remains the same indefinitely).

    Schedule price change
  6. Click Done, then in the upper-right corner, click Save.

Select territories for your app

You can select the territories where you want your app to be available on the App Store. By default, all countries or regions are selected, but you can deselect territories where you don’t want your app for sale. Your app will appear on the App Store in the updated or changed countries or regions within 24 hours.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

    You must set a price for your app before you can edit countries or regions.

  3. Under Availability, click Edit.

  4. In the dialog that appears, select the countries or regions you want to make your app available in.

    • Select all countries or regions: Select All.

    • Select specific countries or regions: Select the checkbox next to the countries or regions you want to include and deselect the checkbox next to the countries or regions you want to exclude.

    • Add new App Store countries or regions automatically: In the upper-left corner, select the New Countries or Regions checkbox.

  5. Click Done at the bottom of the dialog, then click Save in the upper-right corner.

Manage availability of iOS apps on Mac

Compatible iOS apps will be made available to Mac users running macOS 11 or later on the Mac App Store, unless you edit availability for these apps. These apps will run natively and use the same frameworks, resources, and runtime environment as they do on iOS.

If your iOS app offers universal purchase and has an existing macOS platform, the option to offer the iOS app on the Mac App Store will not be available. Additionally, if your iOS app is available on the Mac App Store by using this option and you later add a macOS app by adding the macOS platform in App Store Connect, releasing it to the store will replace the iOS app on the Mac App Store. All existing users for the iOS app will be updated to the macOS app.

You can opt in and out from having your iOS app available on the Mac App Store at any point. This is set at app level and will apply to all versions of your app.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Edit availability on an individual app basis

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

    On the right, the iOS Apps on Mac section appears.

  3. Deselect “Make this app available on Mac.”

  4. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

    Manage iOS availability

Edit availability for multiple apps at a time

  1. From My Apps, select iOS Apps on Mac Availability from the the ellipsis menu (…) in the top left.

  2. In the dialog that appears, select the iOS apps you do not want to make available on the Mac App Store.

    iOS Apps on Mac availability screenshot
  3. Click Done.

To opt out of having any of your iOS apps available on the Mac App Store, click Don’t Make Available.

Distribute your app to businesses or education

All apps on the App Store are automatically available for volume purchase for the same price in Apple Business Manager and Apple School Manager, which is where businesses and educational institutions download apps for volume distribution. You can offer your apps to educational institutions for a reduced price or identify specific businesses you’d like to let download your app. This includes the ability to distribute proprietary apps for internal use within your organization. This option is available only if your app hasn’t been approved yet. Once your app is approved, distribution settings cannot be updated. Apple Business Manager and Apple School Manager are available in many countries and regions.

Required role: Admin or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Offer an app at a reduced price for educational institutions

You can offer your app at a 50% discount to educational institutions when they purchase 20 or more copies of your iOS app or Mac app through Apple School Manager.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

  3. Under Distribution for Business and Education, select “Available on the App Store, for volume purchasing on Apple Business Manager, and for volume purchasing at a reduced price on Apple School Manager”.

    Distribution for Business and Education
  4. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

Once your app is approved, it will be available in the Apps and Books section of Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager.

To offer an app for volume purchasing without the discount select Available on the App Store and for volume purchasing on Apple Business Manager and Apple School Manager.

Make an app available only to specific businesses or organizations

You can specify one or more organizations that can see and download the app in Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager. They can then distribute it through Mobile Device Management or redemption codes.

Note: This option is only available before your app has been approved.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

  3. Under Distribution for Business and Education, select Available for private distribution to specific organizations on Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager

  4. Under Type, choose either Organization ID or Apple ID, and enter the required information. Enter the Organization ID to make the app visible in the organization's Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager account. For businesses still using the legacy Volume Purchase Program, you can assign an app to their volume purchasing Apple ID.

    Private distribution
  5. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

Submit to App Review

Submit your app for review

You submit your app to App Review to start the review process for making your app available on the App Store.

However, before you can submit an app to App Review, you must provide the required metadata and choose the build for the version.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Submit the app

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version you want to submit.

  3. On the right, scroll down to the Build section and verify that you set the build for the version to the correct build.

  4. In the Version Release section, select a release option:

    • Release the app yourself: Select “Manually release this version.” (Later, manually release the version.)

    • Automatically release the app after approval: Select “Automatically release this version.”

    • Automatic release the app but no earlier than a specified date: Select “Automatically release this version after App Review, no earlier than” and below this option, enter a date and time.

    When releasing your app on the App Store for the first time, you can choose to publish your app as a pre-order. Making your app available for pre-order removes other Version Release options from the platform version information page.

    If you are submitting a version update, select whether you want to release your update in phases under the Phased Release for Automatic Updates section.

    If you are submitting a version update, you can choose to reset your app’s summary rating under the Reset Summary Rating section.

  5. In the upper-right corner, click Submit for Review.

  6. If necessary, respond to the export compliance questions and upload encryption authorization documents.

    Because all apps are loaded on Apple servers in the United States, they are subject to U.S. export laws.

  7. Answer questions about Content Rights.

    If the app has third-party content, you must confirm that you have permission to use the third-party content in each territory in which the app is available. It’s your responsibility to determine and follow regulations that apply in each territory.

  8. In the dialog that appears, Provide advertising identifier details.

  9. Click Submit.

After you submit the app, the app status changes to Waiting for Review. When the review process starts, the app status changes to In Review. For information about tasks you can do in these states, see App statuses.

Do I have to submit all platform builds for review at the same time?

No. Builds for each platform can be submitted separately and the status of one platform’s build does not affect the other.

View app status history

You can view the app status history for a version of your app. Each row in the history table includes an app status, the time the app status changed, and the originator of the change. Use this information to track your app through the App Review process.

To receive user notifications when the app status changes, go to Add and edit users.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager, Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Version History.

    In the table, click the disclosure triangle next to the version you want to view app status history for. The app status appears in the Activity column, the user who originated the change appears in the User column, and the date of the change appears in the Date column.

Resolve app rejection issues

If App Review or Beta App Review rejects your app, you can communicate with Apple and resolve issues in the Resolution Center.

A communication from Apple contains information about an app rejection, including how the app is out of compliance with App Store Review Guidelines. You can correspond with Apple through the Resolution Center until you resubmit the build to App Review. You can include attachments in your replies, such as screenshots and supporting documents. If your app has been rejected because of a metadata issue, you can resolve the issue and resubmit the same build.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Read and reply to communications

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. At the top of the page, click the link that indicates there is one or more unresolved issues.

    Unresolved issue banner

    The Resolution Center appears showing communications in the left column and the selected communication on the right.

  3. In the left column, choose a communication to view the details.

    The communications are grouped by thread with App Store App Review communications appearing before Beta App Review communications.

  4. To reply, enter text in the Reply field.

  5. To include a file, click Attach File and in the dialog that appears, choose a file.

  6. Click Send.

Remove a build from review

To stop the App Review process, you can, remove the app version from App Review. The app status must be one of the following to do this:

  • Waiting for Export Compliance

  • Waiting for Review

  • In Review

  • Pending Developer Release

  • Pending Apple Release

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version you want a build removed from review for.

  3. In the message that appears up top, click “remove this version from review.”

  4. In the dialog that appears, click Remove.

The app version is removed from Apple’s review queue and the app status changes to Developer Rejected. Later, when you resubmit the app, the review process will start over from the beginning.

Release a version update in phases

When you release a version update of your app, you can choose to release your apps in stages. This option is available if you are submitting a version update and your app has one of the following app statuses.

  • Prepare for Submission

  • Waiting for Review

  • In Review

  • Waiting for Export Compliance

  • Pending Developer Release

  • Developer Rejected

  • Rejected

  • Metadata Rejected

If you choose this option, your version update will be released over a 7-day period to a percentage of your users (selected at random by their Apple ID) on macOS or iOS with automatic updates turned on. Users are not notified that that they are in a phased release of your app.

Day of Phased Release

Percentage of Users

1

1%

2

2%

3

5%

4

10%

5

20%

6

50%

7

100%

Keep in mind that all users who have downloaded your app will still be able to update your app manually  from the App Store at any time.

While your app is in phased release, you can choose to pause the release for a total of 30 days, regardless of the number of pauses. If you remove your app from sale, your current phased release will stop and will not be available for that version again.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Release a version update in phases

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version you want to submit.

  3. On the right, scroll down to the Phased Release for Automatic Updates section, select Release update over a 7-day period using phased release.

  4. Click save.

When you submit your app for review and it's approved, the app status will be Ready for Sale, and will be appended with “Phased Release” next to the status when viewing your app's version page. 

When the update completes, all users with the Admin or App Manager (who have access to this app) roles will be notified when the phased release is complete.

Pause and resume a phased release

If you find an issue with your version update, you can pause your phased release at any time, for up to 30 days total.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the Ready for Sale app version.

  3. In the Phased Release for Automatic Updates section, select Pause Phased Release or Use Phased Release to resume the update.

  4. Click Save.

You can pause your release for a total of 30 days. For example, if you pause your release for 10 days, and then resume, you will have 20 days left to pause the release a second time. If you resume a release that was previously paused, your phased release will pick up on the day it was left off when it was paused.

Release a version update to all users

If you opted to release your app in phases, you can choose to release your app to all users at any time once your app has the Ready for Sale status. When you select this option, all users whose devices have automatic updates turned on will get the latest app version supported on the user’s device.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version that you've submitted.

  3. In the top right of the page, click Release to All Users.

Manually release a version

If you choose to manually release a version when you submit your app for review, you can release the version after it’s approved and the status changes to Pending Developer Release. If you have an app in the Pending Developer Release state for longer than 30 days, you’ll receive an email reminder from Apple.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, select the app version that is Pending Developer Release.

  3. In the upper-right corner, click Release This Version.

Alternatively, if you want to cancel this release of this version, in the message that appears on the version page, click Cancel This Release.

Maintain your app

Overview of maintaining an app

After you publish your app on the App Store, you perform a number of tasks to respond to customer feedback and to maintain your app throughout its lifetime. You can perform these tasks in any order.

Monitor customer reviews, sales, and analytics

You can read and respond to customer reviews in the App Store tab. To better understand how your app is doing, you can view sales and trends and view app analytics, such as crashes, sessions, and active users.

Download catalog reports

If you have several apps in your account, generate catalog reports that detail the information and settings for all your organization’s apps, including in-app purchase, and metadata for Game Center leaderboards and achievements.

Create a new version

When you’re ready to distribute a new build of your app, you create a new version using the same app record as your previous version. You can update the metadata for the new app version and add a description of the new features. The new version is available for free to customers who purchased a previous version.

Change pricing and availability

You can change the price, schedule price changes, and change the territories for your app at any time. Scheduling price changes is useful for promotions that have a start and end date.

Remove an app

If you no longer want your app to be available to customers, you can remove it from the App Store, which removes all versions of the app.

Remove an app from the App Store

If you no longer want your app to be available to customers, you can remove it from the App Store, which removes all versions of the app. Users with previous versions of the app can’t update the app, but they can still download the latest available version or restore the app to a new device, as long as you have an active contract.

In order to remove an app from the App Store, the app needs to have one version whose status is Ready for Sale.

Note: Removing an app from the App Store doesn’t automatically remove its associated in-app purchases. Customers can still download in-app purchases unless you explicitly remove them from sale.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

  3. On the right, below Availability, select Remove from sale.

  4. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

The app status changes to Developer Removed from Sale, and within 24 hours your app won’t be available on the App Store.

Restore an app to the App Store

If you remove an app from the App Store then create a new version of it, the app status remains Developer Removed from Sale, even after the version is approved by App Review. To release the new version, you must restore it to the App Store first.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

  3. Below Availability, select All countries or regions selected (which restores the app to every App Store).

    Click Edit if you want to select specific countries or regions.

  4. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

The app status changes to Ready for Sale. Your app reappears in the store within 24 hours.

Monitor customer reviews

Ratings and reviews overview

Ratings and reviews on the App Store

Customers can rate your app on a scale from 1 to 5 stars. They can also write a review for your iOS and macOS apps, but not your tvOS apps. When a customer edits their rating or review, the most recent change will display on your App Store product page. If a customer submits a new rating or review, the existing customer review is replaced.

Your product page displays a single summary rating for your app for each country or region of the App Store, as well as individual customer ratings and reviews. iOS apps that use the WatchKit or Messages frameworks share the same rating across the App Store for iPhone, iPad, Apple Watch, and iMessage.

View ratings and reviews

You can view all customer ratings and reviews from the App Store directly in App Store Connect. You can view the summary rating for specific countries or regions. The country or region for a rating is the App Store country or region where the customer originally purchased the app. You can also view individual reviews of your app.

Respond to customer reviews

For iOS, macOS, and watchOS apps, you can respond to customer reviews. When you respond to a customer review, the customer is notified of your response and has the option to update their review. If you edit your response multiple times within a short period of time (for example, to correct a typo), customers will only be notified once that you've edited your response. If a customer that you respond to changes their review, all App Store Connect users with the Admin or Customer Support role that have access to the app receive a notification (if they set their user notifications accordingly).

Your response will remain publicly visible regardless of edits made by the customer to their own review, unless you edit a response or delete a response. You can edit your response at any time and only one response per review will display on your App Store product page.

All ratings, reviews, and responses are publicly viewable on your App Store product page, and therefore, your responses should be appropriate for a public audience. If you believe a review is offensive or inappropriate, report a concern.

Reset app rating

You can reset your app’s rating when you release a new version. Your product page will display a message stating that the app's summary rating was recently reset. This message will be displayed until enough customers have rated the new version and a new summary rating appears.

View ratings and reviews

You can view the summary rating of your app or individual customer reviews. If necessary, you can report a concern about a review.

Note: Customers can rate and review for your iOS and macOS apps, but can only rate your tvOS apps.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Customer Support, Developer, Marketing. See Role permissions.

Why does my app’s rating appear to have been re-set?

On iOS 11 and later, individual ratings inform your app’s summary rating, which is displayed on your product page and in search results. This summary rating is based on the ratings of the version of your app that was available as of September 19, 2017, as well as ratings of later versions. This summary rating is specific to each territory on the App Store and you can reset it when you release a new version of your app. However, we recommend using this feature sparingly; while resetting the summary rating can ensure that it reflects the most current version of your app — useful if an update addresses users’ previous concerns — having few ratings may discourage potential users from downloading your app. In addition, keep in mind that resetting your summary rating does not reset your app’s written reviews. Past reviews will continue to display on your product page.

Why am I seeing a different rating for my app on devices running different versions of iOS?

Customers running iOS 10 or earlier will see your apps rating based on all ratings of your app. Customers running iOS 11 or later will see a summary rating based on all ratings after Sept 19, 2017.

View summary ratings

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.

    Users with only the Customer Support role will be taken directly to Ratings and Reviews after selecting an app

  3. From the drop-down menu on the right side, select the platform you wish to view ratings and reviews for. For tvOS apps, you will only see ratings.

  4. To view the summary rating for a specific country or region, choose the country or region from the menu above the summary rating.

View individual reviews

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.

    Users with only the Customer Support role will be taken directly to Ratings and Reviews after selecting an app.

  3. From the drop-down menu on the right side, select the platform you wish to view ratings and reviews for. For tvOS apps, you will only see ratings.

  4. To filter the list, use the pop-up menus.

    • View reviews for a specific app version: Choose the version from the All Versions menu.

    • View reviews with a specific rating: Choose the rating from the All Ratings menu.

    • View reviews that have been edited or responded to: Choose the option from the All Reviews menu.

Report a concern

If there is an issue with a customer review, you can report your concern to Apple. The customer who wrote the review will not be notified if you report a concern.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.

    Users with only the Customer Support role will be taken directly to Ratings and Reviews after selecting an app.

  3. From the drop-down menu on the right side, select the platform you wish to view ratings and reviews for. For tvOS apps, you will only see ratings.

  4. Find the review and click Report a Concern

  5. In the dialog that appears, choose a concern from the pop-up menu, enter a description of your concern, and click Submit.

Respond to customer reviews (iOS, macOS, watchOS)

You can respond publicly to customer reviews but only one response per review appears on your App Store product page. You can reply to a review, edit your response, and delete your response.

Responses may take up to 24 hours to appear on the App Store. Until then, they will show as pending in App Store Connect. All edited responses will have a notation that it has been edited. Responses are only visible in the App Store app running on iOS 10.3 and later, and macOS 10.6.6 and later.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin or Customer Support. See Role permissions.

Reply to a review

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.

  3. From the drop-down menu on the right side, select the platform (iOS or macOS) with the review you wish to reply to.

  4. Find the review and click Reply next to the review.

  5. In the dialog that appears, enter a reply in the text field and click Submit.

Edit a response

If you respond to customer reviews, you can edit and delete your responses.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.

  3. From the drop-down menu on the right side, select the platform (iOS or macOS) with the review you wish to edit the response for.

  4. Find the review and click Edit Response next to the review.

    You don't need to be the person who wrote the response to edit it.

  5. In the dialog that appears, edit the response and click Save.

Delete a response

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.

  3. From the drop-down menu on the right side, select the platform (iOS or macOS) with the review you wish to delete the response for.

  4. Find the review and click Edit Response

  5. In the dialog that appears, click Delete Response.

Reset app summary rating (iOS, tvOS, macOS)

You can reset your app's summary rating when you release a new version. Your product page will display a message stating that the app's summary rating was recently reset. This message will be displayed until enough customers have rated the new version and a new summary rating appears.

Ratings may only be reset globally - you cannot reset by individual country or region. Keep in mind that when you reset your summary rating, it will not apply to customer reviews, which will continue to display on the App Store.

For universal apps, the reset only applies to the platform version that you reset your rating for. You cannot reset the rating of your app bundles.

Important: If you choose to reset your app's summary rating, once the new version is released you will not be able to restore the previous rating.

To see when your app's summary rating was last reset, see View ratings and reviews.

Required role: Admin or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version you want to submit.

  3. In the Reset Summary Rating section, select Reset rating when this version is released.

  4. Click save.

    After you submit your app for review, your app's summary rating will reset on the App Store when the version is released.

    Reset iOS summary rating

Generate catalog reports

You can generate catalog reports that detail the information and settings for your organization’s catalog of apps, including in-app purchases, and metadata for Game Center leaderboards and achievements.

First you request catalog reports of different types, and after you receive an email that the reports are ready, you can then download the catalog reports.

Each type of catalog report can be generated once per 24-hour period. If one or more of the reports requested has already been requested in the current 24-hour period, a message indicates that the report or reports won’t be generated again.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. See Role permissions.

Request catalog reports

  1. From My Apps, select Catalog Reports from the Ellipsis menu (…) at the top-left.

  2. In the dialog that appears, click Request New Reports.

  3. Under Catalog Reports, select the type of reports you want, and click Request New Reports.

Download a catalog report

  1. From My Apps, select Catalog reports from the the Ellipsis menu (…) at the top-left.

  2. In the row of the report you want to view, click Available for download.

  3. Open the downloaded file using your preferred spreadsheet application.

    The format of a report is a tab-delimited .txt file.

Make a previous version unavailable for download

If a legal or usability issue occurs with a previous version of your app, you can prevent that version from being available for download by customers.

If the status of the version is Ready for Sale and the version has a legal or usability issue, you must submit an update for the app and indicate the issue with the previous version when submitting the new version. If you are unable to submit an update, you must remove the app from the App Store.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.

  3. At the bottom of the page, under the Last-Compatible Version Settings, select the available version.

  4. In the dialog that appears, uncheck any version that should not be available, and click Done.

  5. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

If the legal or usability issue is resolved, follow the same steps to enable the app version.

Measure app performance

Analytics and reporting overview

App Store Connect provides the following analytics and reporting to measure the performance of your app and view final payments made to you.

App Analytics

App Analytics provides data on user engagement and marketing campaigns with metrics such as App Store Impressions, Product Page Views, Sales, Sessions, Deletions, and more. Keep in mind that App Analytics displays data from devices running macOS 10.14.1, iOS 8, ND tvOS 9, or later, and that data is displayed only when a certain number of data points are available.

For more information, see About app analytics.

Sales and Trends

Sales and Trends provides next-day sales and unit data so that you can measure the performance of your free or paid apps, as well as any associated in-app purchases. Transactions reported in Sales and Trends are based on the date the customer purchased the app or in-app purchase.

For more information, see the About Sales and Trends.

Payments and Financial Reports

Payments and Financial Reports provides information on final payments made to you based on settled transactions and finalized proceeds using the Apple fiscal calendar. Financial reports only include paid transactions where we are able to collect payment from the customer (see Schedule 2 of your Developer Agreement). You can opt-in to email alerts that notify you when financial reports are available for download in App Store Connect.

For more information, see Getting Paid.

Automating Reports

You can automate downloads of your sales and financial reports with our command-line tool, Reporter, or with the App Store Connect API.

Differences in reporting

You may see differences between Sales and Trends reports and Payments and Financial Reports due to the following reasons:

  • Processing status. Transactions may take time to process and close. Transactions initiated in a particular month and shown in Sales and Trends may not be reflected in Financial Reports until the customer’s payment is processed and collected and an invoice is issued, which may be in the following fiscal month. Further, transactions where we are never able to collect payment will not be shown in financial reports.

  • Exchange rate. Sales and Trends estimates the USD amount of sales and proceeds based on a rolling average of the previous month's exchange rates. All downloadable reports show amounts in the local currencies transacted by customers. Final payments in Payments and Financial Reports are based on the exchange rate used to convert each report currency to the currency of your bank account. For more information about this exchange rate, see Getting Paid.

You may see also differences in sales reporting between App Analytics and Sales and Trends for the following reasons:

  • App Analytics only displays data from devices running macOS 10.14.1, iOS 8 or tvOS 9, or later. Sales and Trends displays all sales data from devices running iOS, tvOS, and macOS.

  • App Analytics data is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). By default, Sales and Trends data is shown in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), but users can change the time zone to Pacific Standard Time (PST).

App Analytics

About app analytics

App Analytics lets you measure user engagement, marketing campaigns, and monetization for your iOS and tvOS apps with aggregated metrics such as App Store Impressions, Product Page Views, App Units, Sales, Installations, Sessions, and more. You can view App Analytics in App Store Connect as well as opt-in to an App Analytics Weekly Email Summary to quickly see how your top 20 apps are performing.

App Analytics displays data from devices running macOS 10.14.1, iOS 8 or tvOS 9, or later. Data from TestFlight beta testing is not included. Data is displayed when a certain number of data points are available.

Universal Apps

iOS and tvOS apps associated through universal purchase are displayed as a single app in App Analytics.

App Extensions

For iOS apps that use the WatchKit or Messages frameworks, App Store and sales data for the app extensions are included in the containing iOS app.

App Bundles

For app bundles, usage and in-app purchase data is associated with the individual apps in the app bundle, based on the Apple ID for that individual app. Data for app bundles does not include data for individual apps sold separately.

View app analytics

App Analytics provides App Store, sales, and usage data.

App Store

Find out how many times your app has been viewed on the App Store with Impressions, and see the number of Product Page Views.

Sales

View sales performance with App Units, In-App Purchases, and Paying Users.

Usage

Measure user engagement with Installations, Sessions, Active Devices, Active in Last 30 Days, and find out how many times your app crashes each day. App Analytics only shows data from users who have agreed to share their diagnostics and usage information with app developers. Learn more about usage data and opt-in.

Usage data is only available for iOS and tvOS apps.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. See Role Permissions.

View App Store, sales, and usage data

  1. From App Analytics, select your app. The Overview page provides a summary of key metrics about your app.

  2. Click Metrics.

  3. Click View By or Add Filter, then choose a dimension.

  4. Filter by dimensions such as device, region, or source type. You can also create saved views.

    Tip: To export the data in the chart, click the download icon at the upper right above the graph. Data will be exported in CSV file format.

View user retention

You can view daily retention for your app.

  1. From App Analytics, select your app.

  2. Click Retention.

  3. In the upper-right corner, choose a date.

  4. Click Add Filter, then choose a dimension.

Why can’t I see my app in Analytics?

An app needs to have at least one approved version to display in App Analytics. Deleted apps won't display in the apps list.

Why do I sometimes see an error that there isn’t enough data?

To protect customer privacy, we only show data in App Analytics after a certain number of data points are available.

Why am I seeing more crashes than sessions?

We don't record sessions unless they are longer than 2 seconds. So, it's possible that the app crashes right when users open it, which is a crash without a session.

Why are App Store product page views are lower than App Units?

You may see more App Units than product page views if customers downloaded your app without visiting your app’s product page on the App Store. For example, if a customer searches for your app in the App Store and downloads it directly from the search results, we count an App Unit and Impression, but not a product page view.

How do I view sales for individual in-app purchases?

You can view sales for individual in-app purchases by filtering by purchasable item. Data for the purchasable item dimension is available starting December 4th, 2017.

Why do I see different data in Search Ad Reports than in App Analytics

App Analytics and Search Ads Reports are used for different purposes and therefore capture metrics differently. While you may see metrics with the same labels (such as Impressions) in App Analytics and in Search Ads Reports, these metrics and attribution windows are not defined in the same way, resulting in different data. Comparing data from these two tools is not recommended. App Analytics lets you measure user engagement and monetization of your iOS and tvOS apps, as well as track the impact of marketing campaigns based on custom campaign links. Search Ads Reports helps you understand the performance of your Search Ads campaigns on the App Store for iPhone and iPad. For details on Search Ads Reports, see Understanding reports.

Measure user acquisition sources

App Analytics lets you view data based on where customers discover your app, including browsing or searching the App Store, within other apps, or on the web. User acquisition sources include App Store Browse, App Store Search, App Referrers, and Web Referrers.

Impressions and Product Page Views are attributed to App Store Browse or App Store Search when a customer views your app while browsing or searching the App Store.

When a customer taps a link from an app or website that brings them to your App Store product page, the immediate product page view is attributed to the referring app or website. If the customer then taps to download the app for the first time, the resulting App Unit will also be attributed to the referring app or website.

All sales and usage data are attributed to the source recorded when a customer tapped to download your app for the first time. This includes data from redownloads, downloads to multiple devices sharing the same Apple ID, and Family Sharing downloads.

Sales and usage data will display sources as unavailable if customers downloaded your app before App Analytics started tracking source attribution on April 15, 2017. As new customers download your app for the first time, you will see more complete sources data.

If a customer downloaded your app from outside of the App Store (for example, through the Volume Purchase Program), the source will also show as unavailable.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. See Role permissions.

sources

View data by acquisition source

  1. From App Analytics, select your app. The Overview page provides a summary of key metrics about your app.

  2. Click the Sources tab.

  3. In the upper-right corner, select a metric, such as Product page Views.

  4. From the date picker in the top-right, choose a date range. You can view a predefined period (for example, Last 7 Days) or enter a custom range. By default the date picker will display the last 30 days.

View app and web referrers

You can view the apps and websites that led to the most views of your app's product page.

  1. From App Analytics, select your app. The Overview page provides a summary of key metrics about your app.

  2. Click the Sources tab.

  3. Click App Referrer or Web Referrer.

  4. From the date picker in the top-right, choose a date range. You can view a predefined period (for example, Last 7 Days) or enter a custom range. By default the date picker will display the last 30 days.

  5. In the upper-left corner, choose an App Purchase Date.

    Tip: To export the data in the list, click the download icon in the upper-right corner of your screen. Keep in mind that this list includes only a limited number of your top referrers. Data will be exported in CSV file format.

Measure campaign performance

To measure the performance of a campaign, generate campaign links that you can use in advertising, promotions, and other marketing materials. When a user clicks on an ad with your campaign link, they will be redirected to your app's App Store product page.

If a customer downloads your app for the first time within 24 hours of using your campaign link, you will see this counted as an App Unit. If a customer uses more than one campaign link during a certain period, only the most recent campaign link is credited for sales that happen after it's used.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. See Role permissions.

View campaign data

Campaigns only display in App Analytics after more than a day has passed since campaign launch and at least five App Units are attributed to the campaign. Your campaign must also include your provider token and a campaign token.

  1. From App Analytics, select your app. The Overview page provides a summary of key metrics about your app.

  2. Click Sources, then click Campaigns.

  3. From the date picker in the top-right, choose a date range. You can view a predefined period (for example, Last 7 Days) or enter a custom range. By default the date picker will display the last 30 days.

  4. In the upper-left corner, choose an App Purchase Date.

    Tip: To export the data in the list, click the download icon in the upper-right corner of your screen. Keep in mind that this list includes only a limited number of your top referrers. Data will be exported in CSV file format.

Generate a campaign link with App Analytics

You can generate campaign links for your iOS and tvOS apps.

  1. From App Analytics, select your app. The Overview page provides a summary of key metrics about your app.

  2. Click Sources, then click Campaigns.

  3. In the upper-left corner next to Campaigns, click the add (+) button.

  4. In the pop up window under App, select your app from the list.

  5. In the Campaign field, enter a campaign name.

  6. Copy the campaign link to use in your advertising, promotions, and other marketing materials.

    Example:https://apps.apple.com/app/apple-store/id123456789?pt=123456&ct=test1234&mt=8

  • For targeted campaigns for the App Store for iMessage, add the &app=messages parameter to your campaign link to ensure that the customer is directed to your app's product page in the App Store for iMessage. iMessage and sticker pack extensions share the same product page with the containing iOS app.

    Example:https://apps.apple.com/us/app/apple-store/id439104108?pt=8668&ct=test123&mt=8&app=messages

Generate a campaign link with iTunes Link Maker

  • For links created using iTunes Link Maker, add your campaign token and provider token using the ct= and pt= parameters.

    Example:https://apps.apple.com/app/apple-store/id123456789?mt=8&pt=123456&ct=test1234

Track promotions in Smart App Banners

Track promotions in apps that use StoreKit

Where does campaign and website data for Apple TV come from if web searches are not available on Apple TV?

Metrics for Apple TV are tracked by the user's Apple ID, which means that data for web searches on any Apple device, including iPhone or iPad, will be displayed in App Analytics. If a user comes across a campaign or website on their phone that led them to your app, and they also downloaded that app on Apple TV, that purchase will be tied to that campaign or website.

Sales and Trends

About Sales and Trends

Sales and Trends provides next-day sales and unit data so that you can measure the performance of your free or paid iOS, tvOS and macOS apps, as well as any associated in-app purchases. Data in Sales and Trends is recorded when a customer initiates a transaction on the App Store. Sales data for iMessage apps and sticker packs is included in the data for the containing iOS app.

  • On the overview page, view top apps or in-app purchases and their contribution to your overall business.

  • If you offer auto-renewable subscriptions, view subscriptions data on the summary, retention, state, and event pages to gain quick insight into the performance of your subscriptions business.

  • View units, proceeds, sales and pre-orders with options to filter data by selected time period, app, subscription, and territory.

  • You can also download and view reports in order to further analyze the performance of your app or subscriptions.

Note: If you transfer your app, you will continue to have access to information for sales that occurred prior to the transfer. You will not be able to see data for sales that occur after the transfer has completed.

View Units, Proceeds, Sales, and Pre-Orders

Sales and Trends estimates the USD amount of sales and proceeds based on a rolling average of the previous month's exchange rates.

By default, data is shown in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). To match the time zone used by downloaded reports, select Pacific Standard Time (PST). A day includes transactions that happened from 12:00 AM to 11:59 PM for the selected timezone.

Units

By default, units displays app units, in-app purchases, and app bundles. You can apply filters to view the number of updates, re-downloads, and app units originated from pre-orders.

App and Bundle Units

The number of first-time purchases of your app or bundle. An app unit or bundle unit is counted when a customer taps the 'Buy' or 'Get' button for the first-time. App updates, downloads from the same Apple ID onto other devices, and re-downloads to the same device are not counted. Family Sharing downloads are included for free apps, but not for paid apps.

In-App Purchases

The number of in-app purchases, including consumables, non-consumables, auto-renewable subscriptions, and non-renewable subscriptions. In-app purchases restored by users are not counted. For more information, see in-app purchase types.

Sales

The total amount billed to customers for purchasing apps, app bundles, and in-app purchases. Sales are inclusive of any applicable taxes we collect and remit per Schedule 2 of the Paid Applications agreement. Sales for iMessage apps and sticker packs is included in the data for the containing iOS app.

Proceeds

The amount you receive on sales of your apps and in-app purchases. This is the Customer Price minus applicable taxes and Apple’s commission, per Schedule 2 of your Paid Applications agreement. Proceeds in Sales and Trends are not final. To view final proceeds based on closed transactions, view Getting Paid.

For paid subscriptions that have been active for less than one year, you receive 70% of the subscription price, minus applicable taxes, or the Rate Before One Year. After a subscriber accumulates one year of paid service, you receive 85% of the subscription price, minus applicable taxes, or the Rate After One Year.

Pre-Orders

Before releasing your app on the App Store for the first time, you can choose to offer it as a pre-order. Making your app available for pre-order allows customers to order it before its release date and automatically download it once it's available. Upon fulfillment to the customer, a pre-order will be reflected as an app unit. If a pre-order is a paid app unit, then the associated sales from the pre-order will also appear upon fulfillment.

Required role: Admin, Finance, or Sales. See Role Permissions.

View top apps or in-app purchases

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

    Users will be taken to an overview of their top apps and in-app purchases.

  2. In the upper-right corner, choose a date range.

  3. Use the drop down menu to select app units, sales, or in-app purchases.

    Select app units
  4. Use the graphs at the bottom to view data by device type and territory.

    Use graphs to view by device type and territory
  5. To see what apps and in-app purchases have the most sales, select sales from the drop down menu.

    Select sales from dropdown menu

View units, proceeds, sales, and pre-orders

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. On the left side, click Units, Proceeds, Sales, or Pre-Orders.

    By default, units displays app units, in-app purchases, and app bundles. Updates and redownloads are excluded, but can be added using a filter.

  3. In the upper-right corner, click the pop-up menu and choose a time zone.

  4. In the upper-right corner, choose a date range.

    You can view a predefined period (for example, Last 7 Days) or enter a custom range. You can also choose a period using the date slider below the main graph.

  5. Click Add Filters, and choose a dimension.

    You can create saved views based on the selected dimensions.

  6. Click a row in the table below the graph to add the corresponding value to your filters.

    For example, if you filter by territory and click the Europe row, the graph and table will display data for territories in Europe.

Create saved views

You can save your current chosen date range, group, and filter selections. You can later choose your saved views from the Sales page menu.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. On the left side, click Units, Proceeds, Sales, or Pre-Orders.

  3. Click Add Filters, and choose a dimension.

  4. On the left side, select the + next to Saved Views.

  5. Give the saved view a name and click Save.

  6. Return to your saved view at any time by choosing it from the Saved section on the left side.

View refunds

Your daily Unit totals include any processed refunds. However, you can see your total number of refunds in Sales and Trends by using Filters.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. In the upper-right corner, choose a date range.

  3. In the upper-left corner, click Add Filters and choose Transaction Type.

  4. Under Transaction Type, choose Refunds. Refunds are shown as negative unit values on the right hand side. Percentage Range shows the change in Refund totals from the previous period for each app or in-app purchase.

View hourly sales data

You can view data for your apps and in-app purchases for the last 24 hours. Data is displayed for a rolling period of the previous 24 hour period, and is generally available within two hours.

To view your last 24 hours of sales data:

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. On the left side, click Units, Proceeds, Sales, or Pre-Orders.

  3. In the upper-right corner, click the date picker and select Last 24 Hours.

  4. Filter by Content to see data for a specific app or in app purchase, or by Territory to view where your app’s performance is highest.

Why do I see sales for in-app purchases in territories in which my app is not available?

While apps are only available for sale in the territories you specify, in-app purchases are available in all territories. This allows customers to continue using apps they own, for example, after they move to a different country or region. Customers can only make in-app purchases if they already own that app.

Why am I seeing more updates than the total downloaded units in Sales and Trends?

Your total downloaded units are based on unique users. Updates are counted on every device on which they are installed, even when the device shares the same Apple ID. If you release frequent updates of your app, you may see significantly more updates than total downloads.

View Subscriptions Data

On the Subscription Summary Retention, Event, and State pages, you can see sales and activity for your auto-renewable subscriptions.

Time Zone: Data is shown in Pacific Standard Time (PST). A day includes transactions that happened from 12:00 a.m. to 11:59 p.m. PST.

Required role: Admin, Finance, or Sales. See Role Permissions.

View subscription data for a selected period

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. On the left side, choose Subscriptions Summary.

  3. In the upper-right corner, choose a date.

    Data in the graphs will change based on the chosen end date. For example, if you select an end date of April 26th, you will see the number of Active Subscriptions on April 26th, as well as a graph showing daily Active Subscriptions for the 30 days prior to April 26th.

  4. Click Add Filters, and choose a dimension.

    You can filter by dimensions such as app, subscription, or territory.

  5. Navigate to the graph that you want to view.

View retention and conversion rates

You can view monthly retention and introductory price conversion rates for the twelve months preceding a selected end date. By default, you will see the rate across all of your subscription offerings (for example, 1-month and 1-year subscriptions), unless you filter by a particular subscription.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. On the left side, select Subscription Summary.

  3. Scroll down to Retention and Conversion Rates.

    View retention and conversion rates

Selecting Retention Rate will show the number of subscriptions that renewed during a specific period, divided by the number of subscriptions that were up for renewal during the same period. Upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades do not count as a subscription renewal.

Selecting Conversion Rate by Introductory Offer and Conversion Rate by Promotional Offer will show the percentage of subscriptions that converted to the standard price at the end of the introductory or promotional period.

View active subscriptions by proceeds rate

For paid subscriptions that have been active for less than one year, you receive 70% of the subscription price, minus applicable taxes, or the Rate Before One Year. After a subscriber accumulates one year of paid service, you receive 85% of the subscription price, minus applicable taxes, or the Rate After One Year.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. On the left side, choose Subscriptions Summary.

  3. Scroll down to Active Subscriptions by Proceeds Rate.

  4. Hover over the graph to view the data by month.

Only subscriptions active on the last day of each month are counted.

View active subscriptions by proceeds

View subscription events

You can view subscription events in Sales and Trends, including the number of times subscribers activate, change, and cancel their subscriptions. To view your subscription events:

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. On the left side under Subscriptions, choose Events.

  3. From the right side, click the date picker to choose a date range. The graph will update to show data for the selected period.

  4. Click Add Filters, and choose a dimension.

Subscription events are grouped into the following event types:

  • Activations: the number of times your customers started a subscription for the first time. Includes standard price subscriptions and introductory offers.

  • Cancellations: the number of canceled subscriptions. Cancellations can occur when a subscriber turns off auto-renew, or when the App Store is unable to successfully bill a customer in billing retry for a renewal. In the case of a subscriber turning off auto-renew, the event is counted when the subscription expires at the end of the period. In the case of subscriptions in billing retry, the event is counted at the last billing attempt.

  • Conversions to Standard Price: the number of introductory or subscription offers that have renewed to a standard price subscription.

  • Reactivations: the number of previously canceled subscriptions that have re-reactivated to a subscription in the same group, including upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades.

  • Refunds: the number of subscriptions refunded to customers. Includes full and partial refunds.

  • Renewals: the number of subscriptions that have renewed. Includes upgrades, downgrades, and cross grades, as well as introductory or subscription offer renewals.

  • Renewals from Billing Retry: the number of subscriptions that have successfully renewed out of the billing retry state. Does not include subscriptions that renewed during a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window.

  • Enter Billing Retry: the number of subscriptions that have have not renewed due to a billing issue. When a subscription expires due to a billing issue, Apple will attempt to renew the subscription and collect payment for up to 60 days. Includes subscriptions that previously entered a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period but did not renew.

  • Enter Billing Grace Period: the number of subscriptions that have not renewed due to a billing issue, and have entered a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window.

  • Renewals from Billing Grace Period: the number of subscriptions that successfully renewed from a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window.

For a complete list of subscription events by type, see Subscription Events.

View active subscription data

Active paid subscriptions are the total number of auto-renewable subscriptions that are currently active, including paid subscriptions with introductory pricing, paid subscription offers, excluding free trials and marketing opt-ins. A subscription is active during the period for which the customer has paid.

You can also view your daily subscription units, which are the total number of subscription purchases, renewals, and reactivations (minus refunds) and the associated sales from those transactions. Free trials are not included.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. On the left side under Subscriptions, choose Summary.

  3. Your active subscriptions data will display at the top of the page.

View active subscriptions data

Compare retention by start month

Subscription Start Month allows you to compare retention of subscriptions started in specific months.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. On the left side, choose Subscription Retention.

  3. Scroll down to Retention Trends.

  4. From the right side, click Subscription Start Month to choose a month. The graph will update to show retention rate over consecutive renewal periods. By default, all subscription durations are included.

  5. Click Add Filters, and choose a dimension.

    You can filter by dimensions such as duration.

How can I determine which prices my subscribers are paying?

The Subscription report includes the number of active subscriptions and corresponding customer prices.

Download and View Reports

You can download Sales and Trends reports directly from App Store Connect. You can also automate downloading of reports using the App Store Connect API or Reporter.

The following reports are available for download in Sales and Trends:

  • Summary Sales Report. Aggregated sales and download data for your apps and In-App Purchases.

  • Sales Events Report. The dates of significant sales events for your apps and in-app purchases across various territories and devices.

  • Subscription Report. Total number of Active Subscriptions, Subscriptions with Introductory Prices, and Marketing Opt-Ins for your auto-renewable subscriptions.

  • Subscription Event Report. Aggregated data about subscriber activity, including upgrades, renewals, and introductory price conversions.

  • Subscriber Report. Transaction-level data about subscriber activity using randomly generated Subscriber IDs.

  • Magazine & Newspapers Report. Transaction-level data for Magazines & Newspapers apps using randomly generated Customer IDs.

  • Opt-In Report. Contact information for customers who opt in to share their contact information with you.

  • Pre-Order Report. Aggregated data for your apps made available for pre-order, including the number of units ordered and canceled by customers.

Time zone: Reports are based on Pacific Standard Time (PST). A day includes transactions that happened from 12:00 a.m. to 11:59 p.m. PST.

Download & View Reports

You can also automate downloading of your Sales and Trends and Payments and Financial Reports with the command line tool, Reporter, or with the App Store Connect API.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.

  2. On the left side, choose Download Data Reports.

  3. Scroll to the Report that you want to download.

  4. Choose a vendor and date or report period.

  5. Click Download.

  6. Unzip the compressed gzip (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.

    On macOS, double-click on the compressed gzip (.gz) file to unzip it.

  7. Open the extracted tab-delimited text (.txt) file in a spreadsheet application.

    On macOS, control-click the tab-delimited text (.txt) file to open a shortcut menu and select Open With. Or right-click to open a shortcut menu on Windows.

Note: Opt-In reports are password-protected ZIP files, with a new password generated for each download. You can view this unique password on the Reports page on App Store Connect. If you use Reporter to download Opt-In reports, the password will be displayed on the command line after running getReport. To open these files, use a decompression tool that supports password-protected ZIP files.

Why don't my Sales and Trends reports match up with reports from Payments and Financial Reports?

Sales and Trends provides next-day data so that you can see the performance of your app and in-app purchases, while Payments and Financial Reports provides final proceeds. To learn more about differences in reporting, see Analytics and Reporting Overview.

Why do some transactions show zero proceeds, even though my app isn't free?

Your reports include app updates. Updates are always free and these transactions will show Product Type Identifier 7. App sales will show Product Type Identifier 1 and can either be free or paid.

Why am I seeing refunds for an amount that is less than the customer price?

Customers that paid for subscriptions may get a pro-rated or partial refund to factor in the content they’ve already received.

Manage agreements, tax, and banking

Agreements, tax, and banking overview

To sell your apps for a price or offer in-app purchases, the Account Holder user must sign your Paid Applications agreement. The Paid Applications agreement is an optional agreement that is part of the Developer Program License agreement in your developer account.

To receive payments from Apple, you will also need to set up contacts, enter banking information, and submit tax forms. App Store Connect uses your legal information to match the information you provide.

Your legal name displays in the Agreements, Tax, and Banking section of App Store Connect, which was provided when the Account Holder enrolled in the Apple Developer Program. This is also the default name that displays on the App Store as either the “provider” or “seller”, depending on your country or region, which is used for navigation and to group your apps.

If you enrolled in the Apple Developer Program as an organization, you may also set a customer-facing company name different from your legal entity name if that company name is a registered trade name. For example, if your legal entity name is “Apps Company LLC” or “Apps Corporation”, your trade name may simply be “Apps”, which appears under the name of your app on the App Store product page. You can set this in the company name field only when adding an app to your account for the first time.

If you’re enrolled as an individual, this option is not available to you and the provider name is the same as your legal name.

You must have the Admin or Finance to view agreements, tax and banking, but only the Account Holder user can sign an agreement. You must have the Admin and Finance roles to provide tax, banking, and contact information too.

Sign and update agreements

To sell your apps for a price or offer in-app purchases, the Account Holder user must sign your Paid Applications agreement.

Required role: Account Holder. See Role permissions.

Sign a paid agreement

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section, find the Paid Applications agreement, then click View and Agree to Terms.

  3. Verify your legal entity information is correct in the dialog, then click Add. Enter the same information that is provided when the Account Holder is enrolled in the Apple Developer Program.

  4. Read and accept the terms, then click Agree. You can also download a copy of the agreement.

Important: Once this contract is requested, you can’t undo this action or revert to the Developer Program License Agreement for free apps.

Renew an expiring paid applications agreement

When an agreement is nearing its expiration date, users with Account Holder, Admin, and Finance roles will receive email notifications. Email messages are sent when there are 30, 15, and 5 days remaining. On the day the agreement expires, all users in the developer account receive an email indicating that the agreement has expired.

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section, find the Paid Applications agreement on the right, then click Renew Agreement.

To renew the Free Applications agreement, which is tied to your developer program membership, see Program Renewal.

Update to the latest agreement

When a new version of the Paid Applications Agreement is available for you to sign, you will be notified with an alert in App Store Connect. You will not be able to create a new app or in-app purchase unless until you have agreed to the most recent version of the Paid Applications Agreement

To update your agreement:

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section, find the Paid Applications agreement on the right, then click View and Agree to Terms.

  3. In the dialog, read and accept the terms, and click Submit.

Update your legal entity information or address

Your legal entity information is provided when you enroll in the Apple Developer Program for the first time. You cannot update your legal entity information in App Store Connect.

To update the legal entity name and address that displays in Agreements, Tax, and Banking, contact us.

  • You may need to provide business documentation to support your request.

  • Keep in mind that once changes are approved, it can take up to two weeks for the updates to display in App Store Connect.

Some updates may generate a new Paid Application agreement for processing. Make sure you've also provided any required tax and banking information in order for your update to complete processing. Once the agreement has been processed and your update has been completed, you’ll see the agreement in the Contracts In Effect section and your company and provider or seller names updated on the App Store.

View agreements status

You can view all your agreements and their status, and if necessary, enter any missing information. You can also view expiration dates and download PDFs of your agreements.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. See Role permissions.

View the status of an agreement

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section, find the agreement you want to view.

  3. View the status and expiration date columns and rows of the agreement:

    Status

    Description

    New

    The agreement has not been signed.

    Pending User Information

    You've signed an agreement, but it's not in effect because you haven’t finished providing required information.

    Processing

    You've provided all information and we're reviewing your agreement.

    Active

    The agreement is in effect.

    Active (Pending User Information)

    The agreement is in effect, but you haven’t finished providing required information.

    Active (New Agreement Available)

    A new version of the existing active agreement is available for you to sign.

    Pending (New Legal Entity)

    You've made changes to your legal entity and new banking, contacts, and/or tax forms are required.

    Pending (New Agreement Available)

    A new version of the existing pending agreement is available for you to sign.

    Inactive

    The agreement has expired.

Download a copy of an agreement

You can download a copy of your agreements at any time in App Store Connect.

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section, find the agreement you want to download and on the right, the click View.

  3. Scroll down to the Terms section, then click Terms to expand.

  4. Click Download Agreement Terms.

Enter contacts

Apple requires that you provide contact information for people who can address legal, financial, or marketing topics for your business. In order to add contacts, you first need to sign a paid applications agreement. These people do not need to be App Store Connect users.

Contact information for the following roles are required:

  • Senior Management

  • Financial

  • Account Holder

  • Marketing

Add your contacts

To enter your company contacts:

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section, find the agreement you want to sign and click Set up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. In the Contacts section, select the role you would like to add.

  4. From the pop up window, choose from the list of existing contacts. If you have not entered any contacts previously, select Add a New Contact.

  5. Fill in the required details and click Add.

Edit your contacts

You may edit your contacts in App Store Connect at any time.

To edit your contacts:

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. From the menu, select Contacts.

  3. Under the Contacts section, click the name of the contact you want to edit.

  4. Edit the desired fields and click Save.

Enter banking information

To receive payments from Apple, you need to enter electronic banking information. In order to add banking information, you first need to sign a paid applications agreement.

The information you provide should apply to your own bank only (not for an intermediary or correspondent bank), and should have its own routing number.

You may also be required to provide additional documentation to receive payments in certain territories. If an Apple banking partner needs more documentation than what you provided, they'll reach out to you directly. If you'd like us to verify the request from the Apple banking partner before you send them the requested documents, contact us. Note that Apple may also request additional information or documentation.

Processing of your banking information will not complete until you have submitted the required tax forms for your paid contract.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. See Role permissions.

Add banking information

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section, find the agreement you want to sign and click Set up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under Bank Accounts, click Add Bank Account.

  4. Fill in the required fields and click Add. Note: Be sure to enter the name exactly as it appears on your bank account or your payment may be rejected.

    • The look up field will allow you to search by your Bank Name, City, or Postal Code in order to find and and select your bank. Not all branch locations are published in App Store Connect. Select a branch using your bank code for your account if you do not see your branch location listed.

    • In the Bank Account Number field, enter the bank account for the legal entity or individual responsible for the Paid Applications agreement.

    • In the Account Holder Name, enter the name on your bank account held at your financial institution.

    • In the IBAN field, enter your IBAN if applicable. An IBAN (International Bank Account Number) is used for payments to bank accounts in Europe and certain other countries or regions.

    • From the Bank Account Currency pop-up menu, choose the primary currency of the bank account to ensure successful payments.

  5. Once your banking information is complete, your bank account info will appear under the Banking tab. Please note that depending on the country or region of your bank, there may be additional required fields than those listed above.

Edit existing bank information

You may update your banking information at any time, unless the information you submitted is currently processing. Keep in mind that if you change your banking information, we may have already begun processing your payment for the fiscal month, so it may not be applied to your new payment until a future payment.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. From the menu bar, click Banking.

  3. Click the name of the Bank Account you want to edit.

  4. Edit the desired fields and check the box next to “I have read and agree to the statement above.”

  5. Click the Save button.

    Property to Edit

    How to Update

    Account Holder Name

    Account Holder Type

    Bank Account Type

    Bank Account Currency

    IBAN (if applicable), or other territory-specific information such as tax IDs or vendor contact information

    Edit existing Bank Account and edit the property.

    Bank Territory

    Bank Code

    Bank Account Number

    Add a new Bank Account and enter the new information.

    Select another bank account that is already set up

    Under the Agreements tab, select another existing bank.

Change bank accounts

If you would like to receive payments from Apple to a different bank account from what you are currently using, you can change your primary bank account at any time in App Store Connect. Keep in mind that if you change your bank account, we may have already begun processing your payment for the fiscal month, so it may not be applied to your new payment until a future payment.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. Under the Agreements tab, click “Paid Applications” on the left hand side.

  3. Scroll down to the Bank Accounts section.

  4. Next to your primary bank account, click “Edit”.

  5. From the pop-up menu, choose Replace with New Account. If you would like to change your primary bank account to a previously used account, choose Replace with Existing Account.

Can I receive payments to multiple banks?

No, you may only have one bank selected to receive payments.

Why am I getting a “Please enter valid bank account number” error message?

Some bank account numbers have leading zeros. Be sure to include all leading zeroes when entering your banking information on App Store Connect. Your bank account number and your IBAN are two separate numbers. Don't enter your IBAN into the bank account number field.

Submit tax forms

Tax forms overview

In order to submit tax forms, you first need to sign a paid applications agreement. After you have signed the agreement, you will be able to submit tax forms.

App Store Connect lists the required tax forms and allows you to submit many of the forms electronically. The tax forms required in the context of a particular agreement are shown in the agreement detail page.

The App Store Connect tax pages offer different information depending on the choices you make the first time you enter the tax information. If you submit incorrect tax information the first time through the pages, you won’t have an opportunity to change that information in App Store Connect, but may contact us to make updates.

Note: Agreements, Tax, and Banking won’t show changes to tax forms sent to Apple. You’ll continue to see the tax information that you originally provided online. We process all submitted changes to tax information that we receive. We will notify you if there is a question or concern about a request to change your form.

Form

Required

U.S. Tax Forms

Required for all developers. Go to Provide U.S. tax information.

Australia Tax Forms

Required for developers based in Australia or registered for Australian GST. Go to Provide Australian tax information.

Canada Tax Forms

Required for developers based in Canada or registered for Canadian GST/HST. Go to Provide Canadian tax information.

Brazil Tax Forms

Required for developers based in Brazil. Optional for developers based outside of Brazil. Go to Provide Brazilian tax information.

Taiwan Tax Forms

Required for developers based in Taiwan, or who file taxes in Taiwan. Go to Provide Taiwanese tax information.

Korea Tax Forms

Required for developers based in Korea. Go to Provide Korean tax information.

Singapore Tax Forms

Required for developers based in Singapore. Go to Provide Singapore tax information.

Mexico Tax Forms

Required for developers based in Mexico or developers tax registered in Mexico. Go to Provide Mexico tax information.

Provide U.S. tax information

To meet the requirements of the Paid Applications agreement, all developers must complete a U.S. tax form.

Depending on where your legal entity address is based, you will be required to complete a U.S. tax form and any applicable certification for your agreement to go into effect. If you are based in the United States, you are prompted to complete a W-9 form. If you are based outside the United States, the W-8BEN, W-8BEN-E, or W-8ECI may be required, but you will be prompted to complete a series of questions to direct you to the most appropriate tax form and any applicable certification. If your tax form is not available to you in App Store Connect, contact us.

The U.S tax form section will display a field for a tax identification number. For an individual, this is either a Social Security Number (SSN) or an Individual Taxpayer Identification Number (ITIN). For a business entity, the taxpayer identification number is the Employer Identification Number (EIN). For more information about tax identification numbers, see the Internal Revenue Service website.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. See Role permissions.

Add U.S. tax information

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section next to Paid Applications, click Set up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under Tax Forms, click Complete U.S. Tax Forms and follow the instructions.

    The form or certification presented must be completed for your Paid Applications Agreement to go in effect.

    Tip: Use the downloadable instructions and tip sheets near the top of the page to help you provide the right information for your W9, W-8BEN, or W-8BEN-E.

  4. Verify that the information you entered if correct and complete, and then click Submit. Note: After you click Submit, you won’t be able to make changes to this form.

View and update U.S. tax information

To make updates to your tax information, you must download, complete, and sign your applicable tax form from the Internal Revenue Service website, and send it to Apple by email or mail.

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. From the top menu bar, click the Tax tab.

  3. In the U.S. Tax Forms section, click View to see your relevant tax form. Depending on your circumstances, this may be a W-9, W-8BEN, or another form.

  4. Find your applicable form from the Internal Revenue Service website.

  5. Download, complete, and sign your tax form with your updated information.

  6. Include a cover letter with the Apple ID that you use to sign in to App Store Connect, and mail or email the the form to Apple.

Email

Mailing Address

vendortax@apple.com

Apple Inc. MS: 580-GL 12545 Riata Vista Circle Austin, TX 78727 USA

Keep in mind that you will continue to see the information you originally provided in App Store Connect even after we have your updated information on file. We will notify you if there is a question or concern with an updated form.

1099 Tax Forms

U.S. based individuals or entities that meet the following requirements for each Apple legal entities sold in will be issued Form 1099-K:

  • Had at least $20,000 in unadjusted gross sales (the total amount of your sales, unadjusted for Apple’s commissions, fees, refunds, and other adjustments).

  • More than 200 transactions in a calendar year.

If you meet these requirements, your form will be mailed by January 31 of the following year.

Keep in mind Apple will not send a U.S. 1099-MISC tax form. Sales on the App Store are between you and the customer. You are the seller of copyrighted works, and we make payments to you for products or goods, which are specifically exempt from reporting on Form 1099-MISC. This is true even though the payments may be reportable on Form 1099-K and may be taxable income to you.

Provide Australian tax information

If you are based in Australia or registered for Australian GST, you are required to complete Australian tax information. Although you may not be required to register for goods and services tax (GST) with the Australian government, Apple requires that Australia-based developers have a GST registration to sell apps.

To meet Apple’s tax requirements, you’ll need an electronic copy of your GST registration and evidence of your Australian Business Number (ABN). The evidence can be screenshots or PDF files of the ABN registration. Collect the current details with enough information to associate this ABN with the legal entity name you’ve given Apple and the historical details to show that the developer is registered for the GST.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. See Role permissions.

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section next to Paid Applications, click Set up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under Tax Forms, click Complete Australian Tax Forms.

  4. Upload the file or files with ABN and GST registration evidence.

  5. Enter your ABN.

  6. Verify that the information you entered is correct and complete, and then click Submit.

  7. Click Done.

Once you submit this page, you won’t be able to make any changes in App Store Connect. Contact us for any corrections or additional tax forms.

Provide Canadian tax information

Canadian tax information is required if you are based in Canada or registered for GST/QST in Canada.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. See Role permissions.

Submit Canadian tax information

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section next to Paid Applications, click Set up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under Tax Forms, click Complete Canadian Tax Forms.

  4. Complete the appropriate information:

    • GST/HST Form 506: Add your Business Number and RT number. Both are optional.

    • Quebec Form FP-2506-V: Add your Business Number, RT, Quebec Enterprise Number (NEQ), Identification Number, and TQ to Quebec Form FP-2506-V. All fields are optional.

  5. Verify that the information you entered is correct and complete, and then click Submit.

Once you submit this page, you won’t be able to make any changes in App Store Connect. Contact vendortax@apple.com for any corrections or additional tax forms.

Your certification will complete Part 4 of the Quebec Form FP-2506-V, or part D of GST/HST Form 506. Apple will complete Part 5 or Part E respectively, and make the form available for you to download for your records.

Submit tax information if you're registered in Canada, but based elsewhere

If you are based outside of Canada, but registered in Canada, send either of the following forms to Apple:

  • GST506

  • Quebec Form FP 2506-V

Note that email is the preferred method.

Email

Mailing Address

vendortax@apple.com

iTunes K.K.

c/o Apple Inc.

MS: 580-GL

12545 Riata Vista Circle

Austin, TX 78727-6524

USA

Provide Brazilian tax information

Brazilian tax information is required if you are based in Brazil. You must provide either a CNPJ, a 14-digit number issued to companies or organizations, or a CPF, an 11-digit number issued to individuals. If you are based outside of Brazil and have a CPF or CNPJ, this field is optional.

If you are based outside of Brazil or the United States you also have the option to provide a local tax ID, a tax processing number issued to you by the tax authority in your country or region of residence. If you are based in the United States, you won't need to provide your U.S tax ID again, because you've already provided this information in the U.S Tax forms section.

If you are based outside of Brazil and your country or region of residence has a tax treaty agreement with Brazil, you may also upload your tax residency certificate. If you don’t provide a certificate, your sales in Brazil may be subject to the applicable withholding tax at the standard rate. If your region is blacklisted under the Brazilian legislation, no reduced rate of withholding is available. Contact your tax authority if you have questions regarding how to obtain a tax residency certificate.

Your withholding tax rate won’t be reduced until your tax residency certificate is received and reviewed for applicable treaty benefits between Brazil and your country or region of residence. You can start selling content in Brazil (assuming you’ve submitted all required banking and tax information), but payments will be subject to the applicable withholding tax at the standard rate until your residency certificate is reviewed and tax rate benefits are confirmed.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. See Role permissions.

Submit Brazilian tax information

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section next to Paid Applications, click Set up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under Tax Forms, click Complete Brazilian Tax Forms.

  4. Enter your Brazil Tax ID, Local ID, or upload your Tax Residency Certificate.

  5. Ensure that all information is correct, and click Submit. Once you submit this page, you won’t be able to make any changes in App Store Connect. Contact us for any corrections or additional tax forms.

Download tax withholding certificate

If you sell content on the App Store in Brazil, an annual withholding tax certificate can be downloaded in App Store Connect. If there are multiple vendor numbers associated with your account, you will receive a withholding certificate for each vendor number.

To download your Brazil tax withholding certificate:

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. Click the Tax tab.

  3. Scroll down to the Tax Statements section.

  4. Next to your desired document, click the download button.

Download monthly tax withholding information

To download your monthly tax withholding information:

  1. From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.

  2. In the top right corner, click Create Reports.

  3. Select Tax Statements from the menu.

  4. Select the fiscal month for the report you would like to download.

  5. Select Brazil from the list of countries or regions.

  6. Select the checkbox next to the report or reports you would like to download.

  7. Click Create Reports. A status bar will display showing progress of your reports being created.

  8. When reports are ready, a download link will be provided. Click Download Reports.

  9. Unzip the compressed gzip (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.

Provide Taiwanese tax information

Taiwan tax forms are required if you are based in Taiwan or you have a Taiwan Tax Identification Number (TIN). If you do not file taxes in Taiwan, Taiwanese tax forms are not required. Apple collects and remits taxes to the appropriate tax authorities in Taiwan, consistent with Schedule 2 of the Paid Applications Agreement. The amount of tax collected will differ depending on whether or not you have provided a TIN in App Store Connect. Your TIN is necessary to ensure we are calculating your proceeds correctly.

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section next to Paid Applications, click Set up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under Tax Forms, click Complete Taiwan Tax Forms. Under Taiwan Tax ID, choose either Company ID or Citizen ID, depending on whether you file taxes as an individual or an organization.

  4. Enter the required information and hit Save.

Once you submit this page, you won’t be able to make any changes in App Store Connect. Contact us for any corrections or additional tax forms.

Provide Korean tax information

Apple requires developers based in the Republic of Korea with an in-effect Paid Apps Agreement to have a Korean Business Registration Number (BRN) or a Registration Number with Korean National Tax Service (Korean Tax ID). Failure to provide this may result in a delay of payment on your earnings.

A standard BRN is generally used for organizations in the Republic of Korea, and a Registration Number with NTS may be used for non-profit organizations. Consult with your tax advisor for information on the registration type appropriate for your business or organization.

You can also provide trade representative contact information to display on the Korean App Store in compliance with Korean e-commerce regulations. If you are based in the Republic of Korea, the contact information includes your e-commerce and business registration numbers.

Field

Description

Trade Representative

Someone within your company or organization who has the authority to represent the organization, such as the CEO, Representative Director, or other responsible officer.

Trade Representative Contact Information

If provided, this contact information is displayed in the App Store in the Republic of Korea.

E-Commerce Registration Number

A registration number issued by the government of the Republic of Korea for companies doing business on the Internet. This property appears only for organizations based in the Republic of Korea.

Registration Number with Korean National Tax Service (NTS)

A registration number issued by the district tax authority in the Republic of Korea to non-profit organizations there. This property appears only for organizations based in the Republic of Korea.

Enter your Korean tax information

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section next to Paid Applications, click Set up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under Tax Forms, click Complete Republic of Korea tax forms.

  4. Enter your Korean tax information.

  5. Click Submit.

Edit your Korean tax information

If your tax information expires or changes, you can edit it at any time in App Store Connect.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section next to Paid Apps, click Set Up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under the Tax Forms section, click Republic of Korea Tax Information.

  4. Review or edit your information.

  5. Click Submit.

Provide Singapore tax information

Developers based in Singapore are required to either provide a Singapore GST Registration number in App Store Connect, or indicate a non-registered status for Singapore GST.

If you do not provide a Singapore GST Registration Number or indicate non-registered status, Apple’s commissions earned in relation to your sales on apps and in-app purchases on the App Store in Singapore will be considered taxable under the Singapore GST Act. Completing Singapore tax forms in App Store Connect are required to ensure your proceeds are calculated correctly.

Note: Singapore GST registration number is different from a Singapore Tax ID. For more information about Singapore GST registration, consult your tax advisor or visit the IRAS website.

Enter your Singapore registration number

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section next to Paid Apps, click Set Up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under the Tax Forms section, click “Complete Singapore Tax Forms”.

  4. In the pop up window, indicate whether you have a Singapore GST Registration Number. If you select “Yes.” you will be prompted to enter your number.

  5. Click Submit.

Update your Singapore tax registration status

You can update your Singapore tax registration status at any time in App Store Connect. Your status will be reflected in the same month's earnings if the update is made before the end of the fiscal month, otherwise your status will be updated for the following month's earnings.

Note: Apple's fiscal month may not align exactly with the calendar month.

  1. From the App Store Connect homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. Under the Tax Forms section, click “Singapore Tax Forms”.

  3. Update your Singapore GST Registration status.

  4. Click Submit.

View GST adjustments on your account

App Store Connect shows the value of GST adjustments applied to your account, along with any other adjustments that apply in the territories where you sell your app. The adjustment will be displayed in the territory currency. This report is available beginning with your February 2020 earnings.

  1. Log into App Store Connect .

  2. Click on Payments and Financial Reports.

  3. In the top-right corner, click Create Reports.

  4. From the date picker, choose a month.

  5. From the drop-down menu, select “Singapore GST on Commission.”

  6. Click Create Reports.

  7. When the reports are ready, click Download Reports.

Tax documents for Irish entities

Apple Distribution International has exporter status under Irish VAT law and is entitled to purchase from entities based in Ireland with no charge of Irish VAT. The current Apple Distribution International authorization from the Revenue Commissioners in this regard is available to you:

Provide Mexico tax information

All sales on the App Store in Mexico will be subject to a value added tax (VAT). Apple will collect and remit the VAT on your behalf.

If you are based outside Mexico, no action is required unless you are tax registered in Mexico — in which case you can provide your Clave en el RFC and Cédula de Identificación Fiscal in App Store Connect.

For developers based in Mexico, a withholding income tax and VAT on Apple’s commission may also apply, as described below.

  • Companies. You are required to submit your Clave en el RFC and Cédula de Identificación Fiscal. Your earnings are reduced based on the VAT on Apple’s commission, for which you may be able to get an input tax credit.

  • Tax-registered Individuals. You are required to submit your Clave en el RFC, Clave única de registro de población, and Cédula de Identificación Fiscal. Your earnings will be reduced by the VAT on Apple’s commission, for which you may be able to get an input tax credit, and withholding income tax.

  • Non-tax-registered Individuals. Your earnings will be reduced by the VAT on Apple’s commission, for which you may be able to get an input tax credit, and withholding income tax.

If you provide your Clave en el RFC, Apple will issue a certificate documenting the VAT withheld on a monthly basis. If applicable as described above, Apple will issue a certificate of income tax withheld and a VAT invoice for Apple’s commission on a monthly basis.

Enter your Mexican tax information

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section next to Paid Apps, click Set Up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under the Tax Forms section, click Complete Mexico tax forms.

  4. Complete the tax registration form.

  5. Click Submit.

Edit your Mexican tax information

  1. From the homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  2. In the Agreements section next to Paid Applications, click Set up Tax, Banking, and Contacts.

  3. Under the Tax Forms section, click Mexico Tax Information.

  4. Review or edit your information.

  5. Click Submit.

Download tax withholding information

Monthly tax certificates and invoices for your sales on the App Store in Mexico, including Mexico VAT on Commission Invoice, Mexico Withholding IT Certificate, and Mexico Withholding VAT Certificate, are available for download in Payments and Financial Reports.

To download your monthly tax withholding information:

  1. From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.

  2. In the top right corner, click Create Reports.

  3. Select Tax Statements from the menu.

  4. Select the fiscal month for the report you would like to download.

  5. Select which territories you would like to include in your report. By default, this is set to All Countries or Regions.

  6. Select the checkbox next to the report or reports you would like to download.

  7. Click Create Reports. A status bar will display showing progress of your reports being created.

  8. When reports are ready, a download link will be provided. Click Download Reports.

  9. Unzip the compressed gzip (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.

Getting Paid

Getting paid overview

Use the Payments and Financial Reports section of App Store Connect to view your payments owed, amounts paid to you, exchange rates applied, and more. You can also download monthly financial reports, which are made available for the previous fiscal month’s earnings by the end of the current fiscal month.

Financial reports show payments made to you based on closed transactions and finalized proceeds using the Apple fiscal calendar. Reports only include paid transactions where we are able to collect payment from the customer (see Schedule 2 of your Developer Agreement).

In order to receive payment from Apple for proceeds for your app or in-app purchase, you must have a Paid Applications Agreement in effect, and exceed the minimum monthly payment threshold for each country or region in which you sell content.

If you meet those requirements, payments are made to the bank account and currency you provided within 45 days of the last day of the fiscal month in which the transaction was completed. Payments are sent to the bank account on file at the time a payment is processed. Payments to multiple or split bank accounts are not supported.

All payments are made by Electronic Funds Transfer. Note that when available, payments are sent as a low value transfer as opposed to a high value wire transfer. Apple's bank will consolidate proceeds for each currency in which you have sales on the App Store, resulting in a single payment to your bank each fiscal month. Payments may be subject to bank fees and transaction costs charged by your bank or intermediate financial institutions, reducing the amount when deposited in your bank account.

Invoicing Apple (if required)

Developers may have different invoicing requirements in accordance with local laws and statutes. Consult with your own legal and tax advisors with respect to any invoice requirements you are subject to. If an invoice is required, contact us and send a soft copy of your invoice.

  • Apple requires hard copy invoices from Ireland VAT registered developers who sell in Europe through Apple Distribution International.

  • All invoices for GBP and EUR sales must be stated at 0% VAT.

  • When sending your hard copy, make sure that the billing address stated on the invoice is Ireland and that the invoice is sent to Ireland.

Send invoices to:

Billing address

App Store Invoicing

Apple Operations Europe

Apple Distribution International

Hollyhill Industrial Estate

Hollyhill

Cork, Ireland

Apple Distribution International Hollyhill Industrial Estate Hollyhill Cork, Ireland TVA/VAT No.: IE9700053D

What is the exchange rate applied to my payments?

Our bank converts payment amounts into the currency of your bank account. The exchange rate is established by our bank and, due to Apple's volume, is generally a more favorable rate than used by your local bank. The rates are typically the spot rate on the date of payment and no more than three business days prior to the date the proceeds are received into your account.

Why am I not receiving financial report notifications?

If financial reports are available for your account and you have not been receiving the related email notifications, confirm that your user profile is set up to receive financial report notifications. If these items are set up correctly, check your email client and/or spam filter to make sure the email address do-not-reply@apple.com is not being blocked.

View payments and proceeds

Payments and Financial Reports displays a summary of your proceeds for the current fiscal month, and information on sales of your apps and in-app purchases.

Proceeds are the amount you will receive on sales of your apps and in-app purchases. This is the Customer Price minus applicable taxes and Apple’s commission, per Schedule 2 of your Paid Applications agreement.

You can also view detailed information for each territory, such as the number of units sold, the amount earned in that territory's currencies, taxes and adjustments, the exchange rate applied to the payment, and the total proceeds owed to you displayed in the currency of your bank account.

At the top of the page, you will see either your total estimated proceeds, or the amount paid for that period. The value displayed depends on the fiscal month selected, and whether payment for that month has been transferred to your bank.

Important: Keep in mind that the amount paid displayed in App Store Connect represents the amount we've sent to your bank, but the amount you receive in your bank statement may vary depending on bank fees and transaction costs deducted by your bank or intermediate financial institutions. For more information see Analytics and Reporting Overview.

Sample payments and proceeds

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. See Role permissions.

View a previous month’s proceeds

  1. From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.

  2. In the center, click the month.

  3. From the pop-up menu, use the arrows to select a month.

View previous month’s proceeds

View your vendor number

You can view your Vendor Number at any time in App Store Connect. Vendor Numbers are needed for downloading reports using the App Store Connect API.

  1. From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.

  2. Your Vendor Number appears in the top left hand corner under your Legal Entity Name.

View proceeds from a different legal entity name or vendor number

View proceeds from a different legal entity name or vendor number

The drop-down menu at the top left lists Legal Entity Names and associated Vendor Numbers or revenue streams that have been reported to or paid.

If you see multiple Vendor Numbers in the drop-down menu, it indicates that more than one legal entity or revenue stream has been associated with your App Store Connect account. There may be a few reasons why you are seeing multiple Vendor Numbers:

  • You changed your Legal Entity Name. If you updated your Legal Entity Name, the new Legal Entity Name will be assigned a new and unique Vendor Number that is different than the Vendor Number assigned to your old Legal Entity Name. Both Vendor Numbers will be listed so you can view reports for the two legal entities.

  • You publish content on Apple News+ or Apple Arcade. If you recently linked your Apple News channel or added Apple Arcade apps to your App Store Connect account and set up contact, tax, and banking information, a new and unique Vendor Number will be assigned to those agreements.

To view proceeds from a different legal entity name or vendor number:

  1. From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.

  2. From the top left, click the arrow next to your vendor name.

  3. Choose from the pop-up menu to view reports for other legal entities. When selecting a Vendor Number from the drop-down menu, the page will update to reflect the financial activity of such entity.

View proceeds from a different legal entity name or vendor number

Resolve a returned payment error

If your bank returns a payment to us, we’ll show you an alert where your proceeds are displayed and on the App Store Connect homepage, including the reason the payment was returned, and the bank reference number. You can also opt-in to get email notifications for returned payments.

If you see this error you may need to:

  • Update your banking information in Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

  • If it appears that your bank account information is correct or the return reason doesn't indicate what changes are required, try reaching out to your bank using the reference number provided. Once the return is found, your bank should be able to identify the action needed to allow you to be paid.

Once you make all necessary updates, the system will automatically reattempt payment during the next monthly payment processing period. The Payment Returned alert will display until the issue is resolved and we’re able to successfully make a payment to you.

Download financial reports

Financial reports show your monthly proceeds, as well as final unit sales by territory and order type. They are automatically generated once a month, based on Apple’s fiscal calendar, and are only generated if there are purchases or refunds during that fiscal period.

Reports can be manually downloaded from App Store Connect. You can also automate downloading using the App Store Connect API.

There are three types of reports available.

All Countries or Regions (Detailed)

A detailed financial report covering all territories in which you have sales on the App Store. This report includes the transaction and settlement dates for purchases. This report is available once all respective individual currency reports are available. This report is available starting with your March 2020 report.

All Countries or Regions (Single File)

A consolidated financial report covering all territories in which you have sales on the App Store. This report is based on processed and settled transactions during the Apple fiscal month. These are available once all respective individual currency reports are available. This report is available starting with your March 2020 report.

All Countries or Regions (Multiple Files)

Separate financial reports for each territory in which you have sales on the App Store. If you change the territories where your products are available for sale, the number of reports you receive may increase or decrease accordingly. You may also see the number of reports increase, as we introduce new currencies to customers on the App Store. These reports are based on processed and settled transactions during the Apple fiscal month.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. See Role permissions.

Download and view reports from App Store Connect

  1. From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.

  2. In the top right corner, click Create Reports.

  3. Select the fiscal month for the report you would like to download.

  4. Select which territories you would like to include in your report. By default, this is set to All Territories.

    Note: When All Territories is selected, an App Store Connect user can only download the reports for which they have access.

  5. Click Create Reports. A status bar will display showing progress of your reports being created.

  6. When reports are ready, a download link will be provided. Click Download Reports.

  7. Unzip the compressed gzip (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.

  8. Open the extracted tab-delimited text (.txt) file in a spreadsheet application.

Download and view reports for Windows users

If you are using Microsoft Windows, you may need to take additional steps to open your financial reports. Recommended instructions can be found below:

  1. From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.

  2. In the top right corner, click Create Reports.

  3. Select the fiscal month for the report you would like to download.

  4. Click Create Reports. A status bar will display showing progress of your reports being created.

  5. When reports are ready, a download link will be provided. Click Download Reports.

  6. Unzip the compressed gzip (.gz) file by opening it or using WinZip.

  7. Once extracted, you will have a tab delimited text file (xxx.txt). If your system does not know how to open it, it will present you with a dialog box and the list of applications to choose from. You should select WinZip or anything equivalent to WinZip to extract the file.

  8. Launch Microsoft Excel.

  9. From the File menu in Excel, select Open and the file. The Import Wizard will start.

  10. In the Original data type box, select "Delimited" and click Next.

  11. In the Delimiters box, select "Tab" and click Next.

  12. Select the column that has UPC, ISRC, Vendor Identifier by holding the shift key and clicking the columns. Once selected, in the top right hand box called Column Data Format, select "Text". The label above those three columns will change from General to Text. Click Finish.

  13. Once the file has opened, save the file as an Excel Workbook.

Configure App Store features

Sell app bundles

Create and submit an app bundle

App bundles make it easy for you to group up to 10 of your apps together in a single download. Apps in a bundle must be either all paid or all free. A paid app bundle can only include paid apps and must be offered at a reduced price. Each app in a free app bundle must be free and offer an auto-renewable subscription that allows the user to subscribe to and access content or services in all apps of the bundle. Customers buy the bundle with a single tap and the individual apps appear on their device. Customers who previously purchased one or more apps in an app bundle can use the Complete My Bundle feature and will see the bundle price adjusted to account for those previous purchases.

All apps in a bundle must support the same platform as the first app you add to the bundle, called the primary app.

If the primary app supports more than one platform, you can add an app that supports all of the same platforms (or more) and/or an app that supports only one of the platforms. However, if you add an app that supports only one of the shared platforms, all apps added after that must include that platform.Additionally, apps that support tvOS only cannot be part of a bundle.

For business guidance, see App Bundles.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Create an app bundle

  1. In My Apps, click the Add button (+) next to Apps and select “New App Bundle."

  2. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the app bundle.

  3. Under Apps in This Bundle, click the Add button (+) next to the apps you want to add to the bundle.

    An app can be added to a bundle if it's in the Ready for Sale, Removed from Sale, or Developer Removed for Sale state. The first app you select to be part of the bundle is called the primary app. Some app bundle information is determined based on the primary app in the bundle.

  4. In the upper-right corner, click Create.

    Later, the app bundle will appear on your My Apps page.

  5. Under Bundle Information, enter the required app bundle information and click Save.

Submit an app bundle for review

  1. In My Apps, select your app bundle from the list.

  2. In the upper-right corner, click Submit for Review. The app bundle status changes to Waiting for Review and when the review process starts, the app status changes to In Review. After the app bundle is approved, you can’t add or remove apps from the bundle.

The app bundle status changes to Waiting for Review and when the review process starts, the app status changes to In Review. After the app bundle is approved, you can’t add or remove apps from the bundle.

Remove an app bundle from review

  1. From My Apps, select the app bundle.

  2. In the upper-right corner, click Remove from Review. The app bundle will be removed from Apple’s review queue and the app status will change to Developer Rejected.

The app bundle will be removed from Apple’s review queue and the app status will change to Developer Rejected.

Edit app bundle information

You can edit which apps belong to your app bundle only until the app bundle is approved. If your app bundle has been submitted to App Review, remove the app bundle from review to make changes.

If you make changes to an app bundle that has already been approved by App Review, some edits may need additional review. You can make the following changes without needing additional review:

  • Rearrange the apps in the bundle

  • Edit the bundle description and marketing URL

  • Change the primary language of the bundle

  • Change pricing and availability

  • Use an automatically generated app bundle icon

These edits will require the app bundle to be reviewed again:

  • Add localizations

  • Changes to an existing app bundle name or a custom app bundle icon

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Edit app bundle information

  1. From My Apps, select your app bundle.

  2. Under App Information, edit the name, description, or marketing URL.

  3. To add, delete, or reorder the apps in the bundle, click the Edit button next to Apps in This Bundle.

    Adding, deleting and rearranging the apps in the bundle will update the derived information once those changes have been saved.

  4. Under Availability and Price, change the price or edit clearances.

  5. In the upper-right corner, click Save.

Add custom app bundle icon

You can create a custom icon for your bundle in place of the icon generated automatically. If your app bundle currently has an automatically generated icon, you can submit a custom icon at any time, but it will need to go through App Review before it will be displayed on the App Store.

  1. From My Apps, select your app bundle.

  2. Select your app bundle from the list. 

  3. Scroll down to the General Information section.

  4. Drag the icon to the well, and in the upper right corner, click Save.

    The specifications for a custom app bundle icon are the same as for an App Store icon. Follow the Human Interface Guidelines when creating your app icons.

Remove custom app bundle icon

You can choose to delete your custom icon at any time and your bundle will revert back to the automatically generated icon.

  1. From My Apps, select your app bundle.

  2. Scroll down to the General Information section. 

  3. Hover over the icon that you want to delete, and click on the Delete button (–).

To change a property of derived metadata, edit the app information for the primary app. The app bundle metadata will be updated automatically when you make changes to the app’s information. Alternatively, choose a different primary app for the app bundle.

Set availability for an app bundle

After you have submitted an app bundle for App Review and it has been approved, it will automatically become available for sale when all of the apps it contains are available and all other requirements are met.

In order to be available, app bundles must meet the following requirements:

  • Apps in the bundle must be either all paid or all free. A paid app bundle can only include paid apps and must be offered at a reduced price. Each app in a free app bundle must be free and offer at least one auto-renewable subscription.

  • Paid app bundles must be sold at a reduced price, which is a price tier less than the sum total of the individual app prices in the bundle.

  • A paid app bundle’s price must not be lower than the highest app price in the bundle. If an app in the bundle goes to a price that is higher than the price of the bundle, the bundle will automatically be removed from the store.

  • There are no bundle-specific territory settings. An app bundle will be live only where all member apps have common territories.

  • Only ten bundles can be marked as cleared for sale at any time per developer account. If you have ten bundles marked cleared for sale, you can create additional bundles, but you can’t check Cleared for Sale for an additional bundle unless you first uncheck it from another bundle.

  • A single app can be in no more than three cleared-for-sale bundles at one time.

View an app bundle’s availability

While an app bundle can have the status Ready for Sale, it might not be available on the App Store. You can check its availability from the app bundle page.

  1. From My Apps, select your app bundle.

    If the app bundle is not available, a warning message appears at the top of the page. The message states the reasons that the app bundle is not available, such as incompatible pricing.

  2. Under Availability and Price, view the reason your app bundle might not be available in a specific territory.

    For example, this section might show that the number of territories is 0.

  3. To see the territory details, click the number of territories in the upper-right corner.

    The reason the app bundle isn’t available in a territory appears in the Reason column.

Remove an app bundle from sale

After an app bundle is approved, it can’t be deleted, but it can be removed from the App Store.

  1. From My Apps, select your app bundle.

  2. In the Availability and Price section, uncheck Cleared for Sale.

Use promo codes

Promo codes overview

Promo codes provide potential customers or reviewers with a free copy of your iOS, macOS, or tvOS app or in-app purchases or subscriptions within the app. Promo codes can be redeemed through any App Store territory where your app is available and are valid for four weeks from the day they’re generated. Each promo code generated for an app can be used one time to download the app.

You can distribute the promo codes by any means. If an app or in-app purchase is purchased using a promo code, the purchase will be indicated in your Sales and Trends reports.

Promo codes for apps

When a customer downloads an app using a promo code, the app behaves just as it would if it had been purchased. For example, the customer has the opportunity to update to new versions of the app. However, customers aren’t able to rate or review an app that was downloaded using a promo code. Promo codes for tvOS or multi-platform apps must be redeemed through an iOS device. After the code has been redeemed, the tvOS app will appear in the customer’s purchase history on the App Store for Apple TV.

Promo codes for in-app purchases

When customers redeem in-app purchase promo codes, the app will automatically download if the app is free and not currently installed on their device. If the app is paid, customers will need to download the app in order to redeem the in-app purchase. If a customer uses a promo code to subscribe to an auto-renewable subscription, the subscription will not automatically renew after the duration is complete. Promo codes can even be redeemed before your app is available on the App Store. You can provide up to 100 promo codes for each in-app purchase product, with a limit of 1,000 total codes for all in-app purchases for an app every six months (resetting on January 1 and July 1). These codes are for non-commercial use and expire 28 days after they were requested.

Manage promo codes

You can request up to 100 promo codes for every version of each platform of your app, or for your in-app purchases.

To request promo codes for an app version, the version’s status must be Ready for Sale, Pre-Order Ready for Sale, or Pending Developer Release for iOS and macOS apps, or Ready for Sale or Pre-Order Ready for Sale for tvOS apps. For in-app purchases, the in-app purchase state must be Approved or it won't appear as an option.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Request promo codes

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. Click the Features tab.

  3. In the sidebar under General, click Promo Codes. The Promo Code page opens with Generate selected.

  4. Under App Promo Codes, enter the number of version promo codes and under In-App Purchase Promo Codes, enter the number of in-app purchase promo codes you want to generate.

  5. In the upper-right corner, click Generate Code.

  6. Read and agree to the contract terms for Apple to distribute free versions of your app or in-app purchase, and click Generate Code.

  7. Copy the codes in the dialog, or to download a .txt file containing the codes, click text file.

  8. Click Done.

View history of promo codes

  • On the Promo Code page for your app, click History.

    The history table shows the date each set of codes was generated in App Store Connect. Use this date to determine the expiration date of your codes.

Manage iCloud display sets

To use an iCloud display set, you need to configure the display set in App Store Connect, identify the apps that use it, and reference the display set in each app’s Information property list (Info.plist) in the Xcode project.

For each iCloud display set, you’ll need to provide the following:

Property

Description

Reference Name

An internal name. It must be at least two characters and can be up to 255 bytes. It’s displayed in App Store Connect only.

Display Set ID

A unique identifier used to associate your app with the display set. Use the same ID in your app’s Information property file, NSUbiquitousContainerName key. This string must be a uniform type identifier (UTI) and can contain only alphanumeric characters, hyphens, and periods. The string should also be in reverse-DNS format and can’t end in .test.

Display Set Name

The label that users see when they configure iCloud settings for your apps. Localize this label for each of the languages your apps support.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Create an iCloud display set

  1. Log into App Store Connect. Select My Apps.

  2. From the Ellipsis pop-up menu next to Apps, choose Manage iCloud Display Sets.

    Any existing display sets are listed in the Manage Your iCloud Display Sets dialog that appears.

  3. In the upper-left corner, click Create New.

  4. Enter a reference name and display set ID.

  5. Click Add Language, then in the Add Language dialog, choose a primary language for your apps from the Language menu.

  6. In the Display Name field, enter the display set label that users see when they configure iCloud settings for your apps.

    The display name must be at least two characters and can be up to 75 bytes.

  7. Click Save in the dialog.

  8. To add more languages that your apps support, repeat steps 5 through 7.

  9. Click Save in the bottom-right corner of the Create New iCloud Display Set page.

Edit an iCloud display set

  1. Log into App Store Connect. Select My Apps.

  2. From the Ellipsis menu next to Apps, choose Manage iCloud Display Sets.

    The Manage Your iCloud Display Sets page appears listing your display sets.

  3. Click the row for the display set you want to edit.

  4. Do any of the following:

    • Change the reference name: Click Edit next to the name and enter a new name.

    • Add a language: Click Add Language. Follow the same steps in Create an iCloud display set to add more languages.

    • Delete a language: In the row for the language, click Delete.

    • Edit a language: In the language table, click the display name of the language.

    Below the detail area, you can view the attached apps but you can’t edit them (attached apps are configured in the Xcode project).

  5. Click Done.

Delete an iCloud display set

You can delete only iCloud display sets that have no attached apps.

  1. Log into App Store Connect. Select My Apps.

  2. From the Ellipsis pop-up menu next to Apps, choose Manage iCloud Display Sets.

  3. In the row for the display set, click Delete.

Upload a geographic coverage file for a routing app (iOS, watchOS)

If you submit a routing app to App Review, Apple doesn’t start the approval process until you upload a geographic coverage file. You can upload the geographic coverage file when you first create the app record or later after you upload a build.

For the complete steps to configure a routing app, an app that provides point-to-point directions for other apps, go to Configure a routing app (iOS, watchOS) in Xcode Help.

Note: To create a geographic coverage file, read “Specifying the Geographic Coverage File Contents” in Location and Maps Programming Guide.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar, click the version of your app that you want to edit.

  3. Scroll to the General App Information section.

  4. Click the Choose File button under Routing App Coverage File.

Offer in-app purchases

Workflow for configuring in-app purchases

An in-app purchase allows customers to buy content, features, or services from within your app by accessing the App Store and securely processing payments from the user. To use in-app purchases and the StoreKit framework, you must have the latest Apple Developer Program License Agreement and Paid Applications agreement.

Each developer account can create up to 10,000 in-app purchase products across all the apps in the account. You can use the same in-app purchases for all supported platforms (iOS, macOS, tvOS) of your app if they are part of the same app record in App Store Connect. There are four in-app purchase types: consumables, non-consumables, auto-renewable subscriptions, and non-renewing subscriptions.

Every product must be added to the app they are associated with in App Store Connect.

For more information, see In-App Purchase.

  1. Sign a Paid Applications Agreement

    To offer in-app purchases, you must sign a Paid Applications agreement in App Store Connect. For details on how to do this, read Agreements, Tax, and Banking Overview.

  2. Configure in-app purchases in App Store Connect

    Next, configure your in-app purchase products in App Store Connect for your app. Every in-app purchase product must be associated with a specific app. An in-app purchase product associated with one app is not available for use by other apps. If you've created a single app record in App Store Connect for your iOS and tvOS binaries, in-app purchases can be shared across these app binaries. If you offer macOS apps, which are created separately from iOS and tvOS apps in App Store Connect, in-app purchases products can't be shared across these platforms.

    You'll also have the option to add metadata such as a display name and description, and choose your in-app purchase pricing. As you develop your app, you can add and remove in-app purchase products and refine or reconfigure your existing ones. See Add an in-app purchase to use App Store Connect to add your in-app purchase, or App Metadata Specifications to use XML.

  3. Enable in-app purchase in Xcode

    Enable your app for in-app purchase capability in Xcode, as described in Add a Capability in the Xcode Help. Make sure that the bundle identifier and product identifiers for your app in Xcode match the identifiers for your app in your developer account and for the in-app purchases you configured in App Store Connect.

    Note: For a watchOS app with an iOS app, the capability only needs to be added to the iOS app.

  4. Design and create your in-app purchase

    Read the In-App Purchase Programming Guide for detailed information about implementing in-app purchase for your apps.

  5. Test in-app purchases

    Apple provides a testing environment, called Sandbox, which allows you to test your in-app purchases without incurring charges. The sandbox environment uses special test user accounts rather than your regular App Store Connect accounts to test in-app purchases. See Create a Sandbox Tester Account.

    Then, test each part of your code to verify that you’ve implemented it correctly by using your app to make in-app purchases. For details on testing your in-app purchases, see Suggested Testing Steps.

    You can further test your app and its in-app purchases using TestFlight Beta Testing.

  6. Publish your app and in-app purchase on the App Store

    When you are done testing your in-app purchases, you'll be able to submit for review. Check its in-app purchase status to make sure you aren't missing information and ensure that you've selected your in-app purchase pricing. Products are reviewed when you submit your app as part of the app review process.

Configure in-app purchases

Create an in-app purchase

To offer in-app purchases inside your app, you must add in-app purchase information to your app in App Store Connect.

To create auto-renewable subscription in-app purchases, see Create an auto-renewable subscription.

Required role: You must have the Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing role to add and edit in-app purchases. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. To add an in-app purchase, go to In-App Purchases and click the Add button (+).

    App Details Menu
  4. Select Consumable, Non-Consumable, or Non-Renewing Subscriptions and click Create. For auto-renewable subscriptions, see Create an auto-renewable subscription.

  5. Add the reference name, product ID, and a localized display name.

  6. Click Save, or Submit for Review.

    You can enter all your metadata when you create your in-app purchases, or enter your in-app purchase information later.

View and edit in-app purchase information

All in-app purchase metadata can be edited, except the Product ID and in-app purchase type. If your in-app purchase has never been submitted to Apple for review, you can make changes to your metadata. If your in-app purchase has already been submitted, some changes require approval by App Review.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Add and remove localizations

You can add and remove localizations at any time, and information in additional languages are reviewed individually. After an in-app purchase is submitted, changes to localized text or new language support have their own status separate from the overall status of the in-app purchase product.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.

    In-App Localizations
  4. Next to Localizations, click the Add button (+).

  5. To delete a locale, hover over the language listed under Localizations, then click the delete button.

  6. Click Save.

Add or remove a promotional image (iOS)

Add a promotional image to make your in-app purchase available to promote on the App Store for devices running iOS 11 or later. You can submit up to 20 in-app purchases with a promotional image for review at a time.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the in-app purchase you want to modify.

  4. Scroll down to the App Store Promotion (Optional) section.

  5. To add an image, click Choose File and upload your promotional image. To delete your image, hover over it and click the delete icon.

  6. Click Save.

Add or remove promotional image.

When you're ready, submit your in-app purchase for review. Your promotional image must be approved by App Review to appear on your App Store product page.

Add App Review information

Add Review Notes and an image to help Apple review your in-app purchase. This information is for Apple’s review only and is not displayed on the App Store. You can change this information before the product is submitted, or if your in-app purchase is rejected.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.

  4. Scroll down to the Review Information section.

    In-App App Review
  5. Click Choose File to upload your image.

  6. Add information under Review Notes, then click Save

Host non-consumables with Apple

You can have Apple host non-consumable in-app purchase products when you first create the products in App Store Connect, or convert content that you are currently hosting on your own servers to be hosted by Apple.

Apple provides a reliable and familiar experience for users and handles distributing products to their devices and restoring products. When you host content with Apple, Apple stores your app’s content using the same infrastructure that supports other large-scale operations. Additionally, Apple automatically downloads Apple-hosted content in the background even if your app isn’t running.

To host content with Apple, see upload in-app purchase content in Xcode Help.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.

  4. Scroll down to the Content Hosting section.

  5. Select Turn on Content Hosting or Turn off Content Hosting, then click Save.

    In-App Content Hosting

Test in-app purchases

You can test your app and in-app purchases without creating financial transactions by using sandbox, a test environment that uses the infrastructure of the App Store but doesn’t process actual payments. Instead, it returns transactions as if payments were processed successfully. Sandbox testers can be added in App Store Connect, as described in Create a sandbox tester account.

Follow the steps outlined in Testing In-App Purchase Transactions to understand what to test and how to use your device in a testing environment.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Developer. See Role permissions.

Testing auto-renewable subscriptions

Duration times are shortened when testing your auto-renewable subscriptions in sandbox and will auto-renew five times before unsubscribing the subscriber.

Actual Duration

Test Duration

1 week

3 minutes

1 month

5 minutes

2 months

10 minutes

3 months

15 minutes

6 months

30 minutes

1 year

1 hour

Testing interrupted purchases

You can test interrupted purchase scenarios on a device running iOS 14 or later by enabling interrupted purchases in App Store Connect for a specific tester Sandbox Apple ID. If this option is selected, on-device purchase attempts by that Sandbox Apple ID will be interrupted in the sandbox environment and continue to be interrupted until the option is deselected or the tester agrees to terms and conditions on their iOS device. This allows you to test your app’s handling of an interruption to ensure a seamless customer experience.

In general, an interrupted purchase is experienced anytime a customer needs to address an issue with their Apple ID. Some example scenarios include:

  • The user needs to agree to updated terms and conditions.

  • The user needs to update an expired payment method.

When interrupted purchase is enabled for a sandbox tester, all purchases will be interrupted for that Sandbox Apple ID, preventing the transaction from completing until resolved. In sandbox, the tester will need to agree to terms and conditions in order to complete the purchase. Purchases will continue to be interrupted on the Sandbox Apple ID until you disable the option in App Store Connect or the tester agrees to terms and conditions on their iOS device.

To enable interrupted purchase:

  1. From Users and Access, click Testers under Sandbox in the sidebar.

  2. On the right, you can view your Sandbox Apple IDs.

  3. Click on the Sandbox Apple ID you wish to enable interrupted purchases for. If it is already enabled, you will see a checkmark under the Interrupted Purchases column.

  4. In the dialog that appears, select Interrupt Purchases for This Tester.

    Sandbox screenshot
  5. Click Save.

    To disable interrupted purchases, deselect Interrupt Purchases for This Tester.

For more information on testing in-app purchase scenarios, see Testing In-App Purchase Transactions.

Set in-app purchase pricing

You can change the pricing for an in-app purchase product at any time.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

To add or edit product pricing:

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.

  4. Scroll down to the Pricing section.

  5. Choose your price. Click Other Currencies to view the equivalent price tiers across territories. You can plan a price change with an end date by clicking Plan a Price Change and selecting a start and end date.

Set availability for in-app purchases

All in-app purchase products are available worldwide — you can’t exclude specific countries or regions for availability. This ensures a seamless customer experience for users that have moved between countries or regions. For example, if a customer purchases an app in one country and then moves to another country, the customer can still access in-app purchase products within the app even if the app has never been available in the new country. If you need to restrict product access for a specific reason, you develop a solution from inside the app.

To make your in-app purchase available for purchase inside your app, you must clear it for sale.

Required role:  Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Set availability for in-app purchase

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.

  4. Under Availability, select Cleared for Sale to make your in-app purchase available for sale. To remove your in-app purchase from sale, deselect Cleared for Sale.

    Make in-app purchase available
  5. Click Save.

Keep in mind that even if you clear your in-app purchase for sale, it may not be available for purchase. Monitor the in-app purchase status to understand if action is needed from you, such as completing missing metadata, or if your in-app purchase has been approved by App Review.

Submit an in-app purchase

After you create an in-app purchase or auto-renewable subscription product in App Store Connect, you submit it to Apple for review. If you are submitting your first in-app purchase, you must submit it with a new version of your app.

After an app is available on the store with existing in-app purchases, you can submit additional in-app purchase for that app at any time.

If you are adding a new in-app purchase type to your app (for example, you usually offer consumables, but want to start offering auto-renewable subscriptions), you must do so with app version update.

To submit an in-app purchase for review, it must have the Ready to Submit in-app purchase status. If not, complete any missing information.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Submit an in-app purchase with your app

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar, under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. On the right, scroll down to the In-App Purchases section, then click the Add button (+) next to In-App Purchases.

    Click + to select In-App Purchases for this app version.
  4. In the Add In-App Purchases dialog, select the in-app purchases you want to submit.

    Add in-app purchase to version.
  5. Click done, then Save

When you are ready, submit your app for review.

Submit an in-app purchase for a live app

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the in-app purchase you want to submit.

  4. From the top right corner, click Submit for Review.

    Submitting app for review

Add an in-app purchase to promote (iOS)

You can promote in-app purchases and auto-renewable subscriptions on your App Store product page if you’ve added a promotional image and your app is an iOS app. In the App Store Promotions section, you can add and re-order your promoted in-app purchases. You can have an unlimited number of in-app purchases in this list, but can promote up to 20 at a time to display on your App Store product page in all territories for devices running iOS 11 or later. See Promoting Your In-App Purchases for more information.

To display on your App Store product page, your app will need to support the delegate method in SKPaymentTransactionObserver, and all in-app purchases and metadata must be approved by App Review.

Note that promoting in-app purchases is not currently available on the App Store for iMessage.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Add or remove in-app purchases for promotion

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click App Store Promotions.

  3. Navigate to the in-app purchases you want to promote, then select the checkbox next to the reference name.

  4. Click Save.

Add or remove in-app purchase for promotion.

You can add or remove in-app purchases for promotion at any time. Keep in mind that if an app is not ready for sale or the in-app purchase is pending approval, it may not be available on your App Store product page even when it is available for App Store Promotion. Allow up to 24 hours for changes to reflect on your App Store product page.

Change the order of your promoted in-app purchases

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click App Store Promotions.

  3. Navigate to the in-app purchase you want to modify, then use the reorder control on the right-hand side to drag your in-app purchase to increase or decrease it's ranking for your App Store Product page.

  4. Click Save.

Change order of promoted in-app purchases.

Allow up to 24 hours for changes to reflect on your App Store product page.

Promote in-app purchases to relevant customers only

If your app supports the SKProductStorePromotionController API, you can surface content that’s more relevant to some customers browsing your promoted in-app purchases by changing the visibility and order in which products appear for a device. You must configure this setting on your in-app purchase page in App Store Connect in addition to supporting the API. By default, your promoted in-app purchase will show to all devices, even those who don't have the app installed.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the in-app purchase you want to modify.

  4. Scroll down to the App Store Promotion (Optional) section.

  5. Configure the “Show to all App Store users, even those who don't have the app installed” checkbox setting. Note that a customer needs to have opened your app on their device at least once to see your order and visibility settings inside your app.

    • If you want to display your promoted in-app purchase to all user devices, but hide for only specific conditions, the checkbox “Show to all App Store users, even those who don't have the app installed” should be selected.

      Example: You can display subscription options to all devices for promotion on your App Store product page, but hide a specific option for existing subscribers.

    • If you want to prevent your promoted in-app purchase from displaying to all user devices, except those who meet specific conditions, the checkbox “Show to all App Store users, even those who don't have the app installed” should be deselected. If you deselect the checkbox, but haven't implemented the API, your in-app purchase will not be visible on the App Store.

      Example: If the in-app purchase being promoted is Level 2 in a game, you may hide Level 2 to all devices by default. As the player progresses, use the SKProductStorePromotionController API to make Level 2 available once the player has completed Level 1.

  6. Click Save.

Promote to relevant customers.

Delete an in-app purchase

You can delete in-app purchase products after they’re created, but not if they’re In Review. To delete a product after it is available for sale, you must first remove it from sale. See Set availability for in-app purchases.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

To delete an in-app purchase:

  1. If needed, remove the in-app purchase product from sale.

  2. From My Apps, select your app.

  3. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

    Delete in-app purchase
  4. Navigate to the in-app purchase you want to delete.

  5. Place your cursor to the right of the in-app purchase status. A red delete icon appears.

  6. Click the Delete button as highlighted in the screenshot below, and then confirm the deletion.

Enter a URL for App Store server notifications

App Store Server Notifications provide information about key events related to your in-app purchases, such as changes to a subscription's status or the refund of an in-app purchase. In order to receive these notifications from the App Store, you must provide a URL in App Store Connect that links to your server.

If you haven't yet configured your server to receive App Store Server Notifications, see Enabling Server-to-Server Notifications.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under General, click App Information.

  3. Scroll down to General Information, then go to URL for App Store Server Notifications.

  4. Enter the URL that you've determined for App Store Server Notifications.

    Subscription status URL
  5. Click Save.

    Refer to Enabling Server-to-Server Notifications for documentation on the notifications and their meanings.

Configure auto-renewable subscriptions

Overview of auto-renewable subscription group setup

Setting up auto-renewable subscriptions differs from setting up other in-app purchase types. Each auto-renewable subscription product will need to be created as part of a subscription group and assigned a level. How you set up your subscription group or groups will determine how customers can subscribe to your content or services, how they move between subscriptions, when they are billed, and your proceeds rate. For guidance on the subscription business model, see Offering Subscriptions.

Depending on how many subscription products you offer, their level of service, and their duration, you can either place each product into a single subscription group or across multiple subscription groups. Once you've determined the appropriate setup for your business with the guidance below, see Create an auto-renewable subscription to understand how to create subscription products, groups, and service levels.

Required role:  Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Single subscription product set up

If you only offer one subscription product in your app, such as a single streaming plan, you will only need to create one subscription group. Your subscription will be assigned to the group you create and will default to a single level. The sample below shows what your setup may look like. The example app, Mountain Climber, offers a single 1 week subscription plan for customers to access its content.

Level

Group: Mountain Climber Subscription

Duration

Level 1

Mountain Climber Subscription

1 Week

Multiple subscription product setup in a single group

If you offer more than one subscription product in your app, consider creating a single subscription group, and assigning all of your subscription products to that group if:

  • Your business model intends for customers to be subscribed to only one subscription at a time, with a single recurring billing cycle.

  • Your business model offers different service levels (such as bronze, silver, or gold) and intends for customers to be able to move between subscription levels seamlessly.

  • Your subscription products give customers access to similar content or services, but at varying durations (such as weekly or monthly).

Identical services at different durations

The sample setup below, Sunset Seeker, is an app that offers the same service across its subscription products, but with different durations so that customers can choose how frequently they want to be billed. All three subscription products have been assigned to a single subscription group, “Sunset Seeker Subscription.” Because the service is the same for each subscription product, each one is also is set at the same level, level 1 (regardless of duration).

Level

Group: Sunset Seeker Subscription

Duration

Level 1

Yearly Subscription

1 Year

Level 1

Monthly Subscription

1 Month

Level 1

Weekly Subscription

1 Week

Based on the sample setup above, the following are true:

  • A customer can only be subscribed to one of these subscription products at a time.

  • If a customer is currently subscribed to “Yearly Subscription” and wants to change to a monthly duration, they can crossgrade from “Yearly Subscription” to “Monthly Subscription.” The change will take effect on their next renewal date.

  • Moving between subscription products in the same subscription group does not affect the 1 year of paid service a customer must accumulate for you to receive an 85% proceeds rate.

Similar offerings with different service levels

The sample setup below, Forest Explorer, is an app that offers three subscription products with access to different service levels. All three subscription products have been assigned to a single subscription group, “Forest Explorer Subscriptions.” The “Premium” offering is set at the highest level, 1, because it offers the most content, while the “Basic” offering is set a the lowest level, 3, because it offers the least amount of content.

Level

Group: Forest Explorer Subscriptions

Duration

Level 1

Premium

1 Month

Level 2

Standard

1 Month

Level 3

Basic

1 Month

Based on the sample setup above, the following are true:

  • A customer can only be subscribed to one of these subscription products at a time.

  • If a customer is subscribed to “Standard,” they can upgrade to “Premium” because it's set at a higher level. When this happens, the customer’s prorated amount from “Standard” is refunded and they are charged the price for “Premium.” This goes into effect immediately and the customer’s renewal date is changed to the date of the upgrade.

  • If a customer is subscribed to “Standard,” they can downgrade to “Basic.” The customer will be able to complete their existing subscription to “Standard” for the remaining time of their subscription, and the downgrade will go into effect on their next renewal date, which is when they will be charged the new price.

  • Moving between subscription products in the same subscription group does not affect the 1 year of paid service a customer must accumulate for you to receive an 85% proceeds rate.

Subscription product setup across multiple groups

If you offer more than one subscription product in your app and your business model intends for customers to be able to subscribe to more than one subscription product at the same time within the same app, and be billed separately, consider creating more than one subscription group containing different subscription products.

The sample setup below, Ocean Journal, is an app that offers several subscription products across two services — one for surfing and one for snorkeling. Two subscription groups have been created: “Ocean Journal for Surfers” and “Ocean Journal for Hawaiian Islands Snorkeling.”

The sample setup also shows how each subscription within a group was assigned a level. The subscriptions that offer the highest level of service or content, “All Oceans Access” and “All Hawaiian Island Snorkeling Access” were assigned the highest level, 1, followed by subscriptions that offer less content. The subscription that offers the least amount of content is assigned the lowest level, 3. More than one subscription can be assigned the same level if the content-s- or services are the same. In the example below, “Indian Ocean - Monthly” and “Indian Ocean - Weekly” offer the same service, so both are assigned at the same level, 3. The duration is not relevant in determining the level assigned.

Level

Group: Ocean Journal for Surfers

Duration

Level 1

All Oceans Access - Monthly

1 Month

Level 1

All Oceans Access - Weekly

1 Week

Level 2

Indian + Pacific Oceans - Monthly

1 Month

Level 2

Indian + Pacific Oceans - Weekly

1 Week

Level 3

Indian Ocean - Monthly

1 Month

Level 3

Indian Ocean - Weekly

1 Week

Level

Group: Ocean Journal for Hawaiian Islands Snorkeling

Duration

Level 1

All Hawaiian Island Snorkeling Access - Monthly

1 Month

Level 1

All Hawaiian Island Snorkeling Access - Weekly

1 Week

Level 2

Maui + Oahu Snorkeling - Monthly

1 Month

Level 2

Maui + Oahu Snorkeling - Weekly

1 Week

Level 3

Maui Snorkeling - Monthly

1 Month

Level 3

Maui Snorkeling - Weekly

1 Week

Based on the sample setup above, the following are true:

  • A customer can be subscribed to both the “All Oceans Access” subscription within the “Ocean Journal for Surfers” group and the “All Hawaii Islands Snorkeling Access” subscription within the “Ocean Journal for Hawaiian Islands Snorkeling” group at the same time and be billed separately because these subscriptions belong to different subscription groups.

  • A customer cannot be subscribed to both “Maui Snorkeling” and “Maui + Oahu Snorkeling” subscriptions at the same time because they belong to the same subscription group.

  • If a customer is subscribed to “Indian + Pacific Oceans”, they can upgrade to “All Oceans Access” because they belong to the same subscription group. When this happens, the customer’s prorated amount from “Indian + Pacific Oceans” is refunded and they are charged the price for “All Oceans Access”. This goes into effect immediately and changes the customer’s renewal date to the date of the upgrade.

  • If a customer is subscribed to “Indian + Pacific Oceans”, they can downgrade to “Indian Oceans” because they belong to the same subscription group. The customer will be able to complete their existing subscription to “Indian + Pacific Oceans” for the remaining time of their subscription, but the downgrade will go into effect on their next renewal date, which is when they will be charged the new price.

  • If a customer is subscribed to “Maui Snorkeling - Weekly”, but prefer to be charged on a monthly basis, they can crossgrade to “Maui Snorkeling - Monthly” because they belong to the same subscription group. The crossgrade will go into effect at the customers next renewal date.

  • Moving between subscription products in the same subscription group does not affect the 1 year of paid service a customer must accumulate for you to receive an 85% proceeds rate.

How does my subscription setup affect my proceeds rate?

During a subscriber’s first year of paid service, your proceeds rate is 70%. After a subscriber accumulates one year of paid service to a subscription product within the same subscription group, your proceeds rate increases to 85%. Upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades within a group do not interrupt days of paid service. A move to a subscription in a different group resets the days of paid service. The ability to earn 85% started in June 2016 for subscription renewals occurring after that date.

What happens to my proceeds rate when a subscription expires?

When an auto-renewable subscription expires, the days of paid service stop accumulating towards the one year of paid service needed for an 85% proceeds rate. If the user resubscribes or the subscription is recovered within 60 days, the days of paid service will resume from the recovery date. If the user does not resubscribe or the subscription is not recovered within 60 days, the days of paid service reset and the proceeds rate will be 70%.

When a subscription expires due to a billing issue, Apple will attempt to renew the subscription and collect payment. If you have enabled Billing Grace Period for your app’s subscriptions in App Store Connect, there won’t be any interruption to the subscriber’s days of paid service or to your revenue if Apple is able to recover the subscription within the Billing Grace Period (either 6 or 16 days depending on the subscription duration). Learn more about Billing Grace Period for auto-renewable subscriptions.

Create an auto-renewable subscription

To offer auto-renewable subscriptions within your app, you must first create auto-renewable subscription products in App Store Connect. When you create your first subscription product, the App Store Connect flow will guide you to create your first subscription group. When you create additional subscription products, you'll be able to add these products to the subscriptions groups you've already created, or create a new group. Before creating subscriptions, ensure that you understand the right subscription setup for your business model. See Overview of auto-renewable subscription group setup.

To learn more about the subscription business model for your app, read Offering Subscriptions.

Required role:  Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Create a subscription product

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Scroll to the In-App Purchases section and click the Add button (+).

    App Details Menu
  4. Select auto-renewable subscription, then click create.

    Note: If you'd like your subscription to be accessible from more than one app, create an equivalent subscription product for each app. For more information, see Offering Subscription Products Across Multiple Apps.

  5. Add your in-app purchase reference name and product ID, then click Next.

    Create Auto-Renewable Subscription
  6. If this is the first auto-renewable subscription product you are creating, you'll need to also create a subscription group (you'll be able to add details to it later), by selecting Choose New Subscription Group. If you've already created subscription products and groups before, add your subscription product to an existing group or create a new subscription group. Then click Create.

    Important: How you set up your subscription group or groups will determine how customers can subscribe to your content or services, how they move between subscriptions, when they are billed, and your proceeds. See [<Overview of setting up auto-renewable subscriptions>] and ensure that you understand the right subscription setup for your business model. Keep in mind that a subscription cannot belong to more than one group and cannot switch groups after it’s been created.

    Create Subscription Group

    The Subscription Group page will open.

  7. Once you've created your subscription product, you'll be taken to its information page to add more details. Under Subscription Duration, choose a duration from the pop-up menu.

  8. Under Subscription Prices, set a price for your auto-renewable subscription.

  9. Under Localizations, click on the Add button (+) to add a language for your localized display name.

  10. Enter your localized information.

    Understanding Subscription Group Display Name
  11. Under App Store Promotion, optionally add an promotional image. Learn more about Promoting In-App Purchases.

  12. Under Review Information, provide any additional information that may help the App Review team review your in-app purchase.

  13. Click Save.

Add subscription group information and levels

After you've created a subscription product, you can access the subscription group page where you can add group information and determine the subscription levels for your subscription products, which will determine the upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades available to customers within a subscription group.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar, under In-App Purchases, click Subscription Groups.

  3. Click the Subscription Group you wish to edit.

  4. To set subscription levels, click the reordering control on the right side of a subscription row and drag it to a new position to change its level.

    Note: You are not required to differentiate your subscriptions into levels. You can choose to offer a single auto-renewable subscription product, or you can choose to offer multiple subscription products and assign them all to the same level within the group. See Overview of auto-renewable subscription group setup and ensure that you understand the right level setup for your business model.

    Reordering Control on right side of subscription row.
  5. Under Localizations, click on the Add button (+) to add a language for your localized subscription group name.

  6. Enter your localized Subscription Group Display Name.

  7. Click Save.

Can I create free subscriptions?

No, you won't be able to create free subscriptions. You may still offer free trials for paid subscriptions.

What information do users see when they manage their subscriptions in account settings on the App Store?

Users see the below information when they manage their subscriptions in account settings:

manage subscription information screenshot on iPhone

Manage pricing for auto-renewable subscriptions

Managing pricing for your auto-renewable subscriptions differs from managing pricing for your other in-app purchase types.

Auto-renewable subscriptions can be priced by territory unlike the other product types, which can only be sold at a single, equivalent price worldwide. You have access to 200 price points in each currency, and you can set up introductory and promotional offers.

After you have set a starting price for your auto-renewable subscription, you can schedule one future price change at a time, per territory. If you schedule a second price change when you already have a change scheduled, the planned price change will be overwritten by the most recent change.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Set a starting price for your auto-renewable subscription

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on an auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section.

  4. Click on the Add button (+), then choose a currency and a price (the currency will default to the preferred currency that was set), then click Next.

    Subscription Prices section
  5. Apple automatically calculates the prices for all territories based on your chosen price point, but you have the option to set a different price for specific territories. Select territory prices here, then click Create.

    Territory Prices section

Decrease the price of an auto-renewable subscription

If you decrease the price of your auto-renewable subscription, existing subscriptions will automatically renew at the lower price. You don’t have the option to preserve the higher price for existing subscribers.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on an auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click the Add button (+).

  4. Click Plan Subscription Price Change, then select the territories where you want to edit pricing.

    Plan a Price Change
  5. Choose a start date, a currency, and a price, then click Next.

    Start Date and Price
  6. Apple automatically calculates the prices for all territories based on your chosen price point, but you have the option to set a different price for specific territories. Select territory prices here, then click Next.

    Territory Prices
  7. Confirm that you want to decrease your auto-renewable subscription price in the dialog.

    You can schedule one future price change at a time, per territory. If you try to make additional changes when you already have a change scheduled, the planned price change will be overwritten by the most recent change.

After a price decrease goes into effect, you won’t be able to undo it.

Increase the price of an auto-renewable subscription

If you choose to increase the price of your auto-renewable subscription, you have the option to preserve prices for existing subscribers.

If you increase the price of a subscription without preserving prices, all existing subscribers must consent to the new price before their next renewal date. If they do not consent to the new price or take no action, their subscription expires at the end of their current billing cycle.

After your price increase goes into effect, Apple will automatically inform existing subscribers through email and push notifications, and attempt to obtain consent to the higher price. The timing of these notifications depends on the length of the subscription, and there is a minimum required notice. If a price increase occurs within the minimum required notice period (10 days for monthly and yearly subscriptions, and 7 days for weekly subscriptions), subscribers will renew at their existing price for one more billing period, and will be notified before the end of their next billing period.

Subscription duration

First email notification

Minimum required notice

2 month, 3 month, 6 month, and yearly subscriptions

60 days prior to renewal date

10 days prior to renewal date

Monthly subscriptions

29 days prior to renewal date

10 days prior to renewal date

Weekly subscriptions

7 days prior to renewal date

7 days prior to renewal date

After the first email notification, Apple will continue to notify subscribers of a price increase and attempt to obtain consent until their subscription expires. On iOS 13.4 or later, Apple will also periodically attempt to obtain consent via messaging within your app. For information on using StoreKit to manage these notifications, see handling subscriptions billing.

Subscribers paying introductory or promotional prices, including free trials and free offers, will renew to the price that was displayed when they bought your subscription for one additional billing period, and will need to consent prior to their next renewal date.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar below In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on an auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click the Add button (+).

  4. Click Plan Subscription Price Change, then select the territories where you want to edit pricing.

  5. Choose a start date, currency, and a price, then click Next.

  6. Apple automatically calculates the prices for all territories based on your chosen price point, but you have the option to set a different price for specific territories. Select territory prices here, then click Next.

  7. Choose an option for your existing subscribers, you may:

    • A: Keep the current price for existing subscribers. Anyone who subscribed before the start date of this price change won’t be affected.

    • B: Apply the price change to existing subscribers. Existing subscribers will need to consent on their next billing cycle in order to renew at the higher price. Subscribers who do not consent or take no action will automatically expire.

After a price change goes into effect, you won’t be able to undo it. You can plan a new price change to lower it, but previous subscribers that chose not to renew your subscription will need to resubscribe.

Increase pricing for subscribers with preserved prices

If you initially decide to preserve prices for existing subscribers during a price increase, you have the option to raise their prices later, to bring all your customers in a territory to the same price point.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on an auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section.

  4. Click on View all Subscription Pricing and go to the price change where you want to remove the preserved price. In the example below, subscribers in Albania have preserved pricing. You can see that the starting price was $0.99 and was increased to $2.99 for new subscribers on August 30, 2016 in Albania only. In this example, the goal is to bring all customers in Albania up to $2.99. Click on Starting Price.

    Increasing Prices
  5. Click Show Price Change Options.

    Price Change Options
  6. Choose the new price option, then click Next.

    Price Change Options (Starting Price)
  7. Confirm that you want to increase the price for the selected territories, then click Done and save your changes.

In this example, you can see that Albania now only has one price listed, which is the current price of $2.99.

Plan a Price Change

View your planned price changes

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on an auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.

  4. View your planned price changes.

    If you click on the date, the price that you set or have planned appears below. Likewise, if you’ve previously kept existing subscribers at the starting price they paid for your subscription, you'll see the date of the starting price setting and the price paid by those customers.

    View planned price changes

How will changes to foreign exchange rates and tax adjustments affect auto-renewable subscription pricing?

Apple will not make price adjustments on your auto-renewable subscription products. Retail price changes initiated by Apple due to tax changes and significant foreign exchange rate movements will exclude auto-renewable subscriptions. For any value-added tax (VAT) rate changes, your proceeds and Apple’s commission will be calculated after the deduction of VAT, which means that your proceeds will change. You can choose to pass any changes caused by taxation or foreign exchange onto your subscribers by adjusting the price for your subscription. Keep in mind that all price increases require customer consent.

Set an introductory offer for an auto-renewable subscription

You can set up introductory offers for your apps that contain auto-renewable subscriptions in App Store Connect. An introductory offer is a limited-time discounted price or free trial for the initial period of a subscription.

When you set up an introductory offer in App Store Connect, it will automatically appear on your app’s product page on the App Store for users that are eligible. You can also display introductory offers within your app. When displaying offers in your app, ensure you are only showing offers to customers who can redeem them by determining eligibility with receipt validation. To learn more, visit Implementing Introductory Offers in Your App.

There are three types of introductory offers: free trial, pay up front, and pay as you go. You can choose the length of the introductory offer based on the standard subscription duration. The below table shows possible introductory offer durations.

Standard Subscription Duration

Pay As You Go

Pay Up Front

Free Trial

1 Week

1 to 12 Weeks

1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

1 Month

1 to 12 Months

1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

2 Months

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 Months

1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

3 Months

3, 6, 9, or 12 Months

1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

6 Months

6 or 12 Months

1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

1 Year

1 Year

1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

You can create an introductory offer for each subscription product in App Store Connect, but please note that customers are only eligible to redeem one introductory offer per subscription group.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Create an introductory offer

Introductory offers can be set up and managed for each subscription in App Store Connect.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on an auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click on the Add button (+).

  4. Select Create Introductory Offers.

    Set Up Introductory Price
  5. Select the territories where you want to offer a discounted price, and click Next. You can have one current and one future introductory offer per territory.

    Territories for Introductory Price
  6. Choose a start and an end date. You may select No End Date if you want the introductory offer to be available indefinitely. Then, click Next. If you create new offers that have overlapping dates, the latest action will overwrite existing introductory offers.

  7. Choose either Pay as you go, Pay up front, or Free, then choose the appropriate duration, currency, and price. Click Next.

  8. Apple automatically calculates the prices for all territories based on your chosen price point, but you have the option to set a different price for specific territories. Select territory prices here, then click Done.

    Introductory Prices for Territories

Edit an introductory offer

Once you create an introductory price or free trial, only the End Date of the in effect introductory offer can be edited once it's available to customers. For future scheduled introductory offers, the start and end date can be edited. To edit the duration or price, you must create a new introductory offer.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on an auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.

  4. Navigate to the Introductory Offers tab, where you'll find all your offers listed by Date and Territory.

  5. Click on the Date or Territory you want to edit, select a new Start/End Date, then click Update.

    Edit Introductory Price End Date

Delete an introductory offer

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the auto-renewable subscription you wish to delete, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.

  4. Navigate to the Introductory Offers tab, where you'll find all your offers listed by Date and Territory.

  5. Click on the Date or Territory you want to delete.

    Introductory Prices
  6. Confirm your changes in the dialogue.

    Confirm introductory price delete

What is the difference between introductory offer limits in App Store Connect and customer eligibility limits around introductory offers?

App Store Connect allows you to set an introductory offer for each subscription product in App Store Connect. You can have multiple offers in each subscription group. New and returning customers are only eligible to use one introductory offer per subscription group. For example, if a customer uses a free trial and then upgrades to a subscription product in the same group that also has a free trial, they are not eligible to use the second offer.

Set up promotional offers for auto-renewable subscriptions

Apps with auto-renewable subscriptions can provide a discounted price for a specific duration for existing and previously subscribed customers on iOS, macOS, and tvOS. You can use these offers to help win back subscribers who have canceled their subscriptions or promote an upgrade to a higher-ranked subscription at a special price. Customers can accept the offer even if they've already completed an introductory offer.

To get started, Generate keys for auto-renewable subscriptions, create a promotional offer on your app's in-app purchase page for each product, and choose a duration and offer type (pay as you go, pay up front, free). You can have up to 10 active offers per subscription.

Once you've created offers in App Store Connect, use Xcode 10.2 to implement the StoreKit APIs to allow these offers to be accepted by the customer. Customers running iOS 12.2, macOS 10.14.4, and tvOS 12.2 can accept these offers.

For business guidance, see Auto-renewable Subscriptions.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer or Marketing. See Role permissions.

Set up a promotional offer

Subscription offers can be set up and managed for each subscription in-app purchase product in App Store Connect.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on an auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click on the Add button (+).

  4. Select Create Promotional Offer.

    Select Create Promotional offer screenshot
  5. Enter an internal reference name and an offer code.

    Enter offer code and reference name pop up screenshot
  6. Choose either Pay as you go, Pay up front, or Free, then choose the appropriate duration, currency, and price. Click Next.

    Type of promotional offer pop up screenshot
  7. Apple automatically calculates the prices for all territories based on your chosen price point, but you have the option to set a different price for specific territories. Select territory prices here, then click Done.

Edit a promotional offer

Once you create a promotional offer, only the price can be edited. To edit the duration, type, or offer code, you must create a new offer.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on an auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.

  4. Navigate to the Promotional Offers tab, where you'll find all your promotional prices listed.

  5. Click on the offer you'd like to edit.

  6. Choose a new price from the drop-down, and click recalculate to view the updated price in each territory.

    Promotional prices pop up screenshot
  7. Click Save.

Delete a promotional offer

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on an auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.

  4. Click on the offer you'd like to delete, then click Delete Offer.

    Promotional prices pop up screenshot
  5. Confirm your changes in the dialogue.

Enable Billing Grace Period for auto-renewable subscriptions

Billing Grace Period allows you to let subscribers whose auto-renewal failed due to a payment issue continue accessing your app’s paid content for a period of time while Apple continues to attempt to collect payment. There won’t be any interruption to the subscriber’s days of paid service or to your revenue if Apple is able to recover the subscription within the grace period of your subscription product. Without enabling Billing Grace Period, the subscriber’s days of paid service are paused until Apple is able to collect payment.

The length of the grace period depends on the subscription duration.

Subscription Duration

Billing Grace Period Duration

1 week

6 days

1 month

16 days

2 months

16 days

3 months

16 days

6 months

16 days

1 year

16 days

To get started, turn on Billing Grace Period for your app’s subscriptions in App Store Connect. Please note that even after you have turned on Billing Grace Period in App Store Connect, you’ll still need to use receipt validation to ensure you are providing service to customers within the grace period.

Required role: Admin or App Manager. See Role permissions.

Turn on billing grace period

You can turn on Billing Grace Period for each app in App Store Connect, but not for individual subscription products within an app.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

    Turn on Billing Grace Period
  3. In the Billing Grace Period section, click Turn On.

    You’ll still need to use receipt validation to ensure you are providing service to customers within the grace period.

  4. In the pop-up window, click Confirm.

Turn off billing grace period

You can turn off Billing Grace Period for each app in App Store Connect.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

    Turn off Billing Grace Period
  3. In the Billing Grace Period section, click Turn Off.

    Future subscribers whose renewal fails due to a billing issue will not accumulate days of paid service until Apple is able to collect payment and renew the subscription. Subscribers already in Billing Grace Period will not be affected.

  4. Click Confirm.

Generate a receipt validation code

To increase the security of the transaction between your app and Apple’s servers when validating an auto-renewable subscription, you can include a string of 32 randomly generated alphanumeric characters, known as a shared secret, in the receipt.

A shared secret is generated in App Store Connect. You may generate a primary shared secret, which is single code for all of your apps, or an app-specific shared secret for individual apps. You may also use a primary shared secret for some of your apps, and an app-specific shared secret for others.

For information about incorporating the shared secret into your app’s receipt handling, see the Receipt Validation Programming Guide.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. See Role permissions.

View or generate a shared secret for all your apps (primary shared secret)

To view or generate a shared secret:

  1. From Users and Access, click Shared Secret.

  2. Click Generate.

  3. Copy the code and use it for your transactions receipt for all of your apps with auto-renewable subscriptions.

When you generate a new shared secret, all apps in your organization that use a shared secret should use the new value to verify auto-renewable subscriptions.

View or generate a shared secret for an individual app (app-specific shared secret)

You can access the app-specific shared secret from inside the In-App Purchases page for an app. You may want to use an app-specific shared secret if you want to keep this code private for this app, or if you are planning to transfer this app to another developer account.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click App-Specific Shared Secret to view the shared secret for the app.

    In-app purchase app-specific shared secret
  4. To generate a shared secret, click Generate App-Specific Shared Secret or Regenerate from the dialog.

  5. Copy the code and use it for your transactions receipt for this app.

When you regenerate an app-specific shared secret, use the new value to verify your auto-renewable subscriptions for this app.

Set availability for an auto-renewable subscription

All in-app purchase products, including subscriptions, are available worldwide — you can’t exclude specific territories for availability. If you need to restrict product access for a specific reason, you develop a solution from inside the app.

Set availability for a subscription

Required role:Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. See Role permissions.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the subscription.

  4. Under Availability, select Cleared for Sale to make your subscription available for sale.

  5. Click Save.

Keep in mind that even if you clear your subscription for sale, it may not be available for purchase. Monitor the in-app purchase status to understand if action is needed from you.

Remove an auto-renewable subscription from sale

Required Role:Account Holder. See Role permissions.

If you wish to discontinue an auto-renewable subscription, consider your customer impact.

Your customers expect your content to be available throughout their subscription and you’re also required by your agreement to provide the full amount of content to eligible subscribers through the duration of the paid subscription period. Before you discontinue an auto-renewable subscription, remove it from sale to prevent new customers from subscribing or existing customers from renewing. We recommend timing the removal of your auto-renewable subscription to be equivalent to your subscription duration.

For example, with a one-month subscription you should remove your subscription from sale thirty days prior to the date your last content will be issued or available. This allows customers to receive the full duration of content before you stop providing it and they will no longer renew or be charged on their subscription renewal date. This should apply accordingly for the different subscription durations: 7 days prior for a 1 week subscription and 6 months prior for a 6-month subscription, and so forth. When you remove an auto-renewable subscription from sale, your customers will be notified about the discontinued subscription.

To remove your subscription from sale:

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar under In-App Purchases, click Manage.

  3. Click on the subscription.

  4. Under Availability, deselect Cleared for Sale to remove your subscription from sale. Confirm in the dialogue by clicking Removing from Sale.

  5. Click Save.

Apps in the Magazines and Newspaper category need at least one active auto-renewable subscription to be listed on the App Store. If your app is in the Magazines and Newspapers category and you wish to discontinue the only auto-renewable subscription in your app, you must switch to a different category and submit a new binary to App Store Connect. After that, you'll be able to remove the auto-renewable subscription from your app.

  • If you are unable to remove your subscription with the appropriate amount of lead time to provide the full amount of content through the duration of a customer’s subscription period, you should contact us.

  • If your app does not function without the discontinued auto-renewable subscription, remove your app from the App Store.

Configure Game Center

Game Center overview

Game Center is an Apple service that provides social gaming functionality to games. Game Center allows users to track their scores on a leaderboard, view achievement progress, invite friends to play a game, and start a multiplayer game with friends or through auto-match.

Adding support for certain Game Center features, like leaderboards and achievements, requires you to provide additional assets and metadata. Some examples include achievement images and descriptions, as well as leaderboard artwork. You provide and manage all of these within your App Store Connect account.

After you’ve implemented Game Center features into your game, you’re ready to enter metadata in App Store Connect. When developing a game, you may wish to develop, design, configure, and test Game Center components as you develop the app, rather than implement each step completely before proceeding to the next.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. See Role permissions.

  1. Enable Game Center in Xcode

    In Xcode, create your project, enter an app name and bundle ID, then enable Game Center which adds the GameKit framework to your project. For more information, see Adding Capabilities to Your App.

  2. Configure Game Center Components

    In App Store Connect, add an app to your account that matches the bundle ID in Xcode, then configure Game Center components such as leaderboards, achievements, challenges, groups, and multiplayer compatibility.

  3. Incorporate Game Center into Your Game

    In Xcode, incorporate Game Center by adding code to your app and configuring the components used by the service. While these components are configured separately from your app bundle, they should be intimately tied to the code in your game to ensure Game Center’s specific design and development requirements are met. For development and design information, see GameKit and Human Interface Guidelines.

  4. Test Your Game

    Test your Game Center components to ensure they work individually and together. Apple allows all prerelease development to occur in exactly the same server environment as released games. This brings advantages like allowing testers to play with the full player base, not just other testers.

  5. Distribute Your Game

    Add Game Center components to an app version. This step ensures that your Game Center components are included in the desired platform version of your App Store submission. Complete this step before submitting your app for review.

Configure Game Center components

Configure leaderboards

Leaderboards allow players to compare their scores against other players in the same game. When you configure leaderboards in App Store Connect, you specify details such as the scores to collect and how to order them. For each language you want a leaderboard to display in, you specify the leaderboard name, score format, and score unit. You can also include a localized image to illustrate the score in the leaderboard.

There are two types of leaderboards that can be created:

  • Classic leaderboards: A leaderboard where score data will never reset unless the leaderboard is deleted.

  • Recurring leaderboards: A leaderboard where score data will continually be reset based on set preferences.

You can create up to 500 leaderboards per app.

For development information, see Leaderboards in GameKit.

Create a classic leaderboard

  1. From My Apps, select the app you wish to enable for Game Center.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. Click the add button (+) in the Leaderboards section.

  4. Select Choose next to Classic Leaderboard.

  5. Input your leaderboard metadata. For more information, see Leaderboard properties.

    • Leaderboard Reference Name

    • Leaderboard ID

    • Score Format

    • Score Submission Type

    • Sort Order

    • Score Range (Optional)

  6. Under Leaderboard Localization, add one or more languages by clicking Add Language.

  7. Enter the required information:

    • In the dialog that appears, choose a language from the Language menu.

    • In the Name field, enter a localized reference name for the leaderboard. For example, if you choose Finnish from the Language menu, enter the Finnish name for the leaderboard in the Name field.

    • Choose a localized score format from the Score Format menu, then enter the singular and plural version of your score format suffix. If Score Format Suffix Plural doesn’t appear, it’s not needed for the selected language. Additionally, if you want a space to appear between the score and the suffix, you can enter a space followed by the suffix text.

    • Optionally, you can click Choose File to add a localized image for your leaderboard.

    • Click Save. To add additional language support for your leaderboards, repeat the above steps for each language.

    Add leaderboard language classic
  8. Click Save.

Create a recurring leaderboard

Recurring leaderboards add flexibility to your leaderboard configuration by allowing you to reset your leaderboards’ scores. The ability to reset your leaderboards creates a more competitive gaming experience, as it allows players to set a new top score for each leaderboard recurrence.

Leaderboards have a minimum recurrence of five minutes, a maximum recurrence of 30 days, and are not allowed to overlap.

  1. From My Apps , select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. Click the add button (+) in the Leaderboards section.

  4. Select Choose next to Recurring Leaderboard.

  5. Input your leaderboard metadata. For more information, see Leaderboard properties.

    • Leaderboard Reference Name

    • Leaderboard ID

    • Score Format

    • Score Submission Type

    • Sort Order

    • Score Range (Optional)

    • Start Date and Time: The date and time when scores will begin posting to this leaderboard.

    • Duration: The length of time scores on this leaderboard will be posted.

    • Restarts Every: The frequency at which this leaderboard will be created.

    Recurring leaderboard screenshot
  6. Under Leaderboard Localization, add one or more languages by clicking Add Language.

  7. Enter the required information:

    • In the dialog that appears, choose a language from the Language menu.

    • In the Name field, enter a localized display name for the leaderboard. For example, if you choose Finnish from the Language menu, enter the Finnish name for the leaderboard in the Name field.

    • Choose a localized score format from the Score Format menu, then enter the singular and plural version of your score format suffix. If Score Format Suffix Plural doesn’t appear, it’s not needed for the selected language. Additionally, if you want a space to appear between the score and the suffix, you can enter a space followed by the suffix text.

    • Optionally, you can click Choose File to add a localized image for your leaderboard.

    • Click Save. To add additional language support for your leaderboards, repeat the above steps for each language.

  8. Click Save.

Delete a leaderboard

The status of a leaderboard is displayed in the Status column of the Leaderboards table. The possible status values are described in Leaderboard Statuses. A Delete button appears in this column when a leaderboard is eligible for deletion. After a leaderboard is available in Game Center, it can’t be deleted.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. From the Leaderboard section, hover over the leaderboard you want to delete, then click the delete button.

    Delete a leaderboard screenshot
  4. Confirm the deletion, then click Save.

Configure leaderboard sets

Leaderboard sets organize several leaderboards into a single unit. For example, in a game that includes many levels, you could define a leaderboard set to organize the leaderboards for each level. A single app can have 100 leaderboard sets, and a set can have a maximum of 100 leaderboards.

You must have at least one leaderboard for your app before you can create a leaderboard set. After you add leaderboard sets to your app, all future leaderboards that you configure for the app must be included in a leaderboard set.

The process to start using leaderboard sets to organize your app’s leaderboards includes these steps:

  • Create the first leaderboard set.

  • Create additional leaderboard sets.

  • Add new leaderboards directly into leaderboard sets.

When you create the first leaderboard set, App Store Connect ensures that all existing leaderboards for the app are included in at least one leaderboard set.

Click View Leaderboards in Leaderboard Sets to see how your leaderboard sets are organized. The page that appears lists leaderboards by Reference Name and Leaderboard ID, and also includes checkmarks to specify which sets your leaderboards belong to.

Merge leaderboards into sets

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. In the Leaderboards section from the More menu, select Move All Leaderboards into Leaderboard Sets.

    Merge leaderboards into sets screenshot
  4. Enter the leaderboard set reference name and leaderboard set ID, then click Continue.

  5. Click Add to Leaderboard Set to select which leaderboards you would like to include in the set.

  6. Under Leaderboard Set Localization, add one or more languages, then click Save.

You can add new leaderboard sets to your app to further customize how your leaderboards are displayed. Each set provides you with the ability to specify how a leaderboard is displayed within the set. You can put the same leaderboard into more than one set and configure a different display name for the leaderboard within each set.

Add a new leaderboard set

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. In the Leaderboard Sets section, click the add button (+).

  4. Enter the leaderboard set reference name and leaderboard set ID, then click Continue.

  5. Under Leaderboards in This Set, click Add to Leaderboard Set. You must add at least one leaderboard to the set.

  6. Select a leaderboard, add a Display name in desired languages, then click Save.

    To add additional leaderboards to the set, repeat steps 5 and 6.

    Add a new leaderboard set
  7. Click Add Language under Leaderboard Set Localization to add one or more languages to your leaderboard set. You must add at least one language.

  8. Enter the required information:

    • In the dialog that appears, choose a language from the Language menu.

    • In the Display Name field, enter a localized display name for this leaderboard set as you would like it to appear in Game Center.

    • Optionally, you can click Choose File to add a localized image for your leaderboard.

    • Click Save. To add additional language support for your leaderboards, repeat the above steps for each language.

  9. Click Save.

Add a new leaderboard to a set

  1. From My Apps , select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. In the Leaderboard section, click the add button (+).

  4. Choose which leaderboard type you would like to add to your set, then complete the leaderboard configuration using the steps in Configure leaderboards.

  5. Under Leaderboard Sets, click Add to a Leaderboard Set.

    Note: To complete your leaderboard creation, it must be added to an existing leaderboard set.

  6. Choose the leaderboard set to contain your leaderboard, add one or more languages, and click Save.

    Add new leaderboard to a set
  7. Add a language in the Leaderboard Localization section by clicking Add Language.

  8. Enter the required information:

    • In the dialog that appears, choose a language from the Language menu.

    • In the Name field, enter a localized reference name for the leaderboard.

    • Choose a localized score format from the Score Format menu, then enter the singular and plural version of your score format suffix. If Score Format Suffix Plural doesn’t appear, it’s not needed for the selected language. Additionally, if you want a space to appear between the score and the suffix, you can enter a space followed by the suffix text.

    • Optionally, you can click Choose File to add a localized image for your leaderboard.

    • Click Save. To add additional language support for your leaderboards, repeat the steps above for each language.

  9. Click Save.

Delete leaderboard sets

Before deleting a leaderboard set, you must ensure that all leaderboards within the set have been added to another set. Only after the leaderboards have been added to a new set can you delete an existing set.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. From the Leaderboard Sets section, hover over the leaderboard you want to delete, then click the Delete button as highlighted in the screenshot below:

    Delete leaderboard set
  4. Click Save.

If your app contains 100 or fewer leaderboards, you can click Remove All Leaderboards from Leaderboard Sets and all of your current leaderboard sets are deleted. To locate this option, navigate to the Leaderboards section and select the More menu.

Remove all leaderboards from sets

Note: This option doesn’t appear for apps with more than 100 leaderboards. You must remove any excess leaderboards before you can use the Remove All Leaderboards from Leaderboard Sets button.

Configure achievements

An achievement is a distinction that a player earns for reaching a milestone or performing an action defined by you and programmed into your app. When you configure achievements in App Store Connect, you specify details about the achievement, such as the points earned, whether the achievement is hidden from players before they reach the goal, and whether players can earn the achievement more than once. For each language or region you want the achievement to display in, you specify the achievement Title, Pre-earned Description, and Earned Description to keep users engaged during gameplay. You also specify an image to represent the achievement. You can create up to 100 achievements per app.

For development information, see Achievements in GameKit.

Add an achievement

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. Click the add button (+) under the Achievements section.

  4. Input your achievement metadata. For more information, see Achievement properties.

    • Achievement Reference Name

    • Achievement ID

    • Point Value

    • Hidden: Select Yes if you want the achievement to be hidden until the user earns it; otherwise, select No.

    • Achievable More Than Once: Select Yes if the user can earn the achievement multiple times; otherwise, select No.

  5. Add one or more language in the Achievement Localization section by clicking Add Language.

  6. Enter your Achievement language properties:

    • In the dialog that appears, choose a language from the Language menu.

    • Title: Enter a localized name for the achievement.

    • Pre-earned Description: Enter a localized description of the achievement.

    • Earned Description: Enter a localized description of the achievement.

    • Add a localized image by selecting Choose File.

    • Click Save. To add additional language support for your achievements, repeat the above steps for each language.

    Add achievement
  7. Click Save.

Delete an achievement

The status of an achievement is displayed in the far-right column of the Achievements table. The possible status values are described in Achievement Statuses. A Delete button appears in this column when an achievement is eligible for deletion. After an achievement is available to players for any version of your app, it can’t be deleted and the point value can’t be changed.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. From the Achievements section, hover over the achievement you want to delete, then click the delete button.

    Delete an achievement
  4. Click Save.

Arrange leaderboards and achievements

Leaderboards and achievements are presented to players in the order they appear in App Store Connect. You can change the order of the leaderboards and achievements on the app’s Game Center page.

Arrange leaderboards

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. To arrange your leaderboards, click the reordering control on the left side of the Leaderboards row and drag it to a new position.

    Arrange leaderboards
  4. Click Save.

Set a default leaderboard

A default leaderboard is the first leaderboard presented to a user when using a Game Center-enabled app. The first leaderboard created for an app is automatically set as the default leaderboard; however, you can set any classic, recurring, or combined leaderboard as the default.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. Locate the Default column in the Leaderboards section, then hover over the leaderboard you would like to set as default.

  4. Click Make Default.

    Make default leaderboard
  5. Click Save.

Arrange achievements

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. In the Achievements section, find the achievement you want to reorder.

  4. To arrange your achievements, click the reordering control on the left side of the Achievements row and drag it to a new position.

    Arrange achievements
  5. Click Save.

Enable challenges

Achievements and leaderboards allow players to measure and track their individual game progress; however, some players find it more satisfying to beat a friend’s score and test their progress against each other. Game Center embraces this idea in the form of challenges. Using challenges, players in Game Center can challenge each other to beat earned scores or achievements. Game Center supports two kinds of challenges:

  • A score challenge is issued based on a leaderboard score previously earned by the challenger. The challenge is completed when the challenged player earns a better score. When the challenged player beats a score challenge, Game Center automatically issues a new score challenge to the original challenger. Score challenges continue to pass back and forth between the two players as they work to beat each other’s scores.

  • An achievement challenge is issued from an achievement that the challenger has already completed. The challenge is completed when the challenged player completes the achievement.

For development information, see Challenges in GameKit.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. In the Challenges section, click the checkbox to “Allow challenges in this game.”

    Enable challenges
  4. Click Save.

See alsoGameKit

Create Game Center groups

Game Center groups overview

In the context of Game Center, a group is two or more apps that share leaderboards and achievements. The purpose of adding an app to a Game Center group is to share data, specifically to share leaderboards and achievements. When you add an app with existing Game Center assets to a group, you decide which of the app’s leaderboards and achievements are retained as part of the group. App Store Connect guides you through this process by presenting only compatible assets and options at each step.

You can define leaderboards and achievements for a group in two ways:

  • Define leaderboards and achievements for an individual app; then, when you move the app to a group, you specify how the app leaderboards and achievements are merged with the group leaderboards and achievements.

  • Add an app to a group that already has leaderboards and achievements defined. The app uses the existing group leaderboards and achievements. Like apps, groups can organize leaderboards into sets. If a group uses leaderboard sets, apps you add to the group either already use leaderboard sets or can’t have any leaderboards defined.

While an app can only belong to one group, there’s no restriction on the type of apps that can belong to a group. For example, you can create a group containing iOS and macOS apps that share the same leaderboards and achievements. There’s no limit to the number of groups per account or to the number of apps that can belong to a group.

When you’re ready to release a version of an app that’s part of a group, you determine which of the group leaderboards and achievements go live with the app. In addition, you set the app’s multiplayer compatibility options to include the other apps from the group. See Distribute a Game Center app.

Create a group

A group can’t exist without containing at least one app, so you create a group by selecting an app and starting the group from the app.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. In the Move to Group section, select Move to Group.

  4. Enter your group reference name and click Create Group in the Move to a New Group section.

    • If your app does not have existing leaderboards or achievements, this is the final step for creating your Game Center group.

    • If your app has existing leaderboards and achievements, their IDs are listed with a “grp.” prefix. You can keep the ID the same, or create a new ID in the New ID field.

    Create a Group
  5. Click Continue.

  6. Select the “All changes are accurate” checkbox to confirm your changes, then click Save.

Add an app to a group

After you create a group, you can add other apps to the group. The purpose of adding an app is to share leaderboard and achievement data. When you add an app with existing Game Center assets to a group, you decide which of the app’s leaderboards and achievements are retained as part of the group.

If an app has existing leaderboards and achievements, you must decide whether to add or merge the app’s components with those in the group. Added leaderboards and achievements are defined in the group as they were in the app prior to being grouped. Merging your leaderboards and achievements will replace the version in the app with the one you choose from the group. App Store Connect simplifies this process by presenting only compatible assets and available options at each step. The options that App Store Connect presents to you are dependent on your app and group data. You won’t see options for types of assets (for example, leaderboard sets) that the app doesn’t have.

Important: If the group uses leaderboard sets, the app you add to the group must use leaderboard sets. See Configure leaderboard sets. Additionally, apps can only belong to one Game Center group. If you wish to add your app to a new group, it must be removed from any existing groups.

Guidelines for Moving Leaderboards

The choices available when merging leaderboards depend on the type of leaderboard, its property values, and your previous selections. The guidelines for merging leaderboards are:

  • Leaderboards can only merge with a compatible leaderboard. Leaderboards are compatible if the values of the score format type and sort order properties are the same.

  • Leaderboards must be moved in the order App Store Connect presents them.

  • A combined leaderboard can only merge with a combined leaderboard. If a compatible combined leaderboard isn’t available, it must be added to the group instead of merged.

  • An attached leaderboard can merge with an attached leaderboard only if their combined (parent) leaderboards are also being merged with each other.

  • An attached leaderboard can merge with a classic leaderboard. The classic leaderboard is attached to the corresponding group combined leaderboard.

  • A classic leaderboard can merge with a classic leaderboard.

  • A classic leaderboard can merge with an attached leaderboard.

After merging two leaderboards, all of the group’s leaderboard property values remain the same with the exception of these properties:

  • Score Range: If the app’s score range is larger than the group’s score range, the group’s score range expands to include the app’s score range. For example, if the range of the app’s leaderboard is 1–500 and the range of the group’s leaderboard is 1–250, the range of the group’s leaderboard is set to 1–500.

  • Languages: When merging a leaderboard that has more languages than a group, the additional leaderboard languages will be automatically applied to the merged leaderboard. For example, if a grouped leaderboard supports English and the leaderboard being merged supports English and French, the French language will be copied over to the merged leaderboard.

Guidelines for Moving Achievements

There are no restrictions for adding achievements to a group; however, the following remain true:

  • The maximum number of points for each achievement is 100.

  • The total maximum number of points for a single app's achievements is 1000.

  • There are no restrictions on the total points for all group achievements.

After the merge, all of the group’s achievement property values remain the same with the exception of the languages, which follow this rule:

  • When merging an achievement that has more languages than a group, the additional achievement languages will be automatically applied to the merged achievement. For example, if a grouped achievement supports English and the achievement being merged supports English and French, the French language will be copied over to the merged achievement.

Add an app to a group

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. In the Move to Group section, select Move to Group.

  4. Under Move to an Existing Group, select the Game Center group that you’d like to merge with your app.

  5. Review the IDs for your leaderboards and achievements that are being moved to the group. You must choose to add or merge your existing leaderboards and achievements.

    Note: Your existing leaderboard and achievement IDs are listed with a “grp.” prefix. Leaderboards and achievements that are not merged can keep same ID or be assigned a new one; however, the “grp.” prefix must be included when merging to a group.

    • Add an app’s leaderboard to the leaderboards already defined for the group. The leaderboard appears in the group just as it did for the app.

    • Merge an app’s leaderboard with an existing leaderboard in the group. If the app’s leaderboard ranks the same information as one of the group leaderboards, you can choose to use the group’s leaderboard for the app.

    Add app to group
  6. Click Continue.

  7. Select the “All changes are accurate” checkbox to confirm your changes, then click Save.

Edit a group

After you create and add apps to a group, you can edit the group’s properties from the Game Center groups page. You follow the same steps to create and manage group leaderboards, leaderboard sets, combined leaderboards, and achievements as you would for a non-grouped app.

  1. From My Apps, navigate to the ellipsis menu (...) at the top left of the page.

  2. Click Game Center Groups.

  3. After the Game Center Groups page opens, select the group you want to edit in the Manage Existing Groups section.

For more information, see Group properties.

Remove an app from a group

An app can only be removed from a group when a previous version of the app hasn’t been published to the App Store with a group leaderboard or achievement attached.

Convert an app from a group to single game

  1. From My Apps, navigate to the ellipsis menu (...) at the top left of the page.

  2. Click Game Center Groups.

  3. In the “Apps in this Group” section, find the app you want to convert from a group game to a single game.

    • If the app is the only app listed in the group, click Delete Group in the upper-left corner.

      Delete Group
    • If your app is one of multiple apps listed under “Apps in this Group,” navigate to the right-hand side of the row associated with the app you want to remove from the group, then click Delete. Be sure to remove any multiplayer compatibility settings defined for the app version.

      Remove app from group

Test a Game Center app

Test a Game Center app overview

Apple allows all prerelease development and testing to occur in exactly the same server environment as released games. This allows you to test how your app interacts with Game Center and brings several advantages including:

  • Simplifying the testing of version updates by allowing testers to play with the full player base, not just other testers

  • Removing implementation differences between the sandbox and production environments

By design, the achievements and high scores of a particular Game Center user are visible to that user's friends. This includes achievement and leaderboard scores that have not been formally released as part of a particular game version. Similarly, any game a Game Center player has played is visible to all of that player’s friends, even if that game has not yet been released.

If this data needs to be kept private as part of your release strategy, consider creating separate accounts for prerelease testing and carefully manage which Game Center users are allowed to become friends with those accounts.

Testing a Game Center-enabled app involves the following steps:

1. Configure Game Center.

2. Add leaderboards or achievements to the app version that you’d like to test. For information on adding leaderboards and achievements, see Enable your app version for Game Center.

3. Identify additional apps that you want to play with the app you’re testing, as described in Add multiplayer compatibility.

4. Test your Game Center components to ensure they work individually and together. For testing information, see Beta Testing Made Simple with TestFlight.

5. Once you’ve finished testing, Remove leaderboard test data.

Remove leaderboard test data

After testing your leaderboards, you should remove the leaderboard test data before submitting the app for review.

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the toolbar, click Features. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.

  3. Click the More menu to the right of the Leaderboards section.

  4. Click Delete Test Data.

    Delete test data

Distribute a Game Center app

Enable your app version for Game Center

Once you’ve configured your Game Center components, enable Game Center in your app version before you submit your app for review. In the app’s Game Center section on the platform version page, you can enable Game Center functionality and select the components you want to apply to your app version:

  • Leaderboards to support in this app version

  • Achievements to support in this app version

  • Multiplayer compatibility: Select which apps and versions that you want your app to be compatible with

  1. From My Apps, select your app.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select, then go to the Game Center section of the app.

  3. In the Game Center section, select the checkbox.

    Enable app version
  4. Once Game Center is enabled, you can add leaderboards, achievements, and multiplayer compatibility to the app version.

Add a leaderboard to your app version

Leaderboards can be added to your app version once configured. For information, see Configure leaderboards.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under your desired platform, then navigate to the Game Center section.

  3. Click Select Leaderboards in the Leaderboards section, then choose the leaderboard(s) that you want to include in your app version.

    Add leaderboards to app version
  4. Click Done.

Add leaderboard sets to a version

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under your desired platform, then navigate to the Game Center section.

  3. Click Select Leaderboard Sets in the Leaderboard Sets section.

  4. Choose the leaderboard set(s) that you want to include by clicking the add button (+).

  5. Under New leaderboards, select the leaderboards that you want to include in your app version.

    Add leaderboard sets
  6. Click Done.

Add achievements to a version

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under your desired platform, then navigate to the Game Center section.

  3. Click Select Achievements in the Achievements section.

  4. Choose the achievement(s) that you want to include in your app version.

    Add achievements to a version
  5. Click Done.

Add multiplayer compatibility

The Multiplayer Compatibility section of App Store Connect allows you to describe which versions of your Game Center-enabled apps can see each other during the matchmaking process. You can define the earliest multiplayer-compatible app version for iOS, macOS, and tvOS, and can even match games with different bundle identifiers against each other.

For more information about matchmaking, see the Player Invitations section of GameKit.

Select the earliest compatible version of an app

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version below your desired platform, then navigate to the Game Center section.

  3. Click the add button (+) to the right of Multiplayer Compatibility.

  4. In the dialog that appears, select the app(s) that you want your app to be compatible with.

    Enable multiplayer
  5. Select the earliest compatible version of your app from the menu. Only Game Center-enabled app versions will be available to select.

  6. To add more compatible apps and versions, repeat the above steps for each app.

    Note: Before you can test multiplayer compatibility for your app, you'll need to complete the steps above.

See alsoGameKit

Disable Game Center in your app

Once an app version is approved with Game Center enabled, it can no longer be disabled within the version. Instead, you must change your Game Center configuration when submitting an updated app version to the App Store.

  1. From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.

  2. In the sidebar, click the app version under your desired platform, then navigate to the Game Center section.

  3. Deselect the Game Center checkbox to disable Game Center for the version.

Reference

Upload tools

After you create an app record in App Store Connect, you can upload a build using Xcode, Transporter for macOS, or altool. If you use the App Store Connect API, you may wish to upload your binary using the Transporter command-line tool and JSON Web Tokens authentication. You can use the same JWTs you use for the API to upload your binary.

Upload your app binary files with Xcode

Xcode is Apple’s integrated development environment (IDE). You use Xcode to build apps for Apple products, including iPad, iPhone, Apple Watch, Apple TV, and Mac. Xcode provides tools to manage your entire development workflow — from creating your app to testing, optimizing, and submitting it to the App Store.

To learn how to upload your app binary using Xcode, go to Upload an app to App Store Connect, or in Xcode, choose Help > Xcode Help and search for “Upload an app.”

Download Xcode on the Mac App Store.

Supported Xcode Versions

App Store Connect supports the following versions of Xcode to upload your app for distribution on the App Store or to testers using TestFlight.

Target type

Built using Xcode

Uploaded using Xcode

iOS app

iOS app extension

Xcode 10.1 and later

Xcode 6 and later

macOS app

Xcode 6 and later

Xcode 6 and later

tvOS app

Xcode 7.1 and later

Xcode 7.1 and later

Upload for all target types is supported for Transporter for macOS and altool.

Upload your app binary files with altool

You can use xcrun (included with Xcode) to invoke altool, a command-line tool that lets you notarize, validate, and upload your app binary files to the App Store. Specify one of the following in Terminal at the command-line:

$ xcrun altool --validate-app -f file -t platform -u username [-p password] [--output-format xml]$ xcrun altool --upload-app -f file -t platform -u username [-p password] [—output-format xml]

Note: If you use an automated build system, you can integrate the notarization process into your existing build scripts. The altool and stapler command-line tools (included within Xcode) allow you to upload your software to the Apple notary service, and to staple the resulting ticket to your executable. altool is located at /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/usr/bin/altool.

See the Using altool guide for more information.

Upload your app binary files with the Transporter app

The Transporter app for macOS is a simple and easy way to upload an app to App Store Connect for distribution on the App Store. In addition to uploading your build, you can view delivery progress (including warnings, errors, and delivery logs), as well as a history of past deliveries.

You can download the Transporter app on the Mac App Store.

See the Transporter for macOS Help for more information.

My Apps

App information

App information refers to the set of properties of an app that are shared across the platforms added to an app. You set some of these properties when you add the app to your account, and later, you edit app information as required or depending on the app status.

For marketing guidelines on specifying this information, read Making the most of your product page on the App Store.

Property

Description

Name

The localized name of your app as it appears on the App Store. The name must be at least two characters and no more than 30 characters. It can be edited until you submit the app to App Review. Later, you can change the name when you create a new version or the status of the app version permits editing this property.

Subtitle

A summary of your app that will appear under your app’s name on the App Store. This can’t be longer than 30 characters.

Privacy Policy URL

A URL that links to your company’s privacy policy. This is required for all apps.

Bundle ID

A unique identifier for your app that is used throughout the system. (A build is uniquely identified by the combination of the bundle ID, version number, and build string.) You can’t change this property after you upload a build.

Important: The Bundle ID property must match the bundle ID you set in the Xcode project.

SKU

A unique ID you give to your app for internal tracking that is not visible to customers. The SKU can contain letters, numbers, hyphens, periods, and underscores but not start with a hyphen, period, or underscore. You can’t change the SKU after you add the app to your account.

Apple ID

A unique identifier automatically generated for your app when you add the app to your account. You can view this property in the App Information section in App Store Connect. This identifier is also used in the URL for the App Store on desktop computers. You can’t edit this property.

Note: This identifier is not the same as your Apple ID that you use to sign in to App Store Connect and your developer account.

Content Rights

Apps that contain, show, or access third-party content must have all the necessary rights to that content or be otherwise permitted to use it under the laws of each App Store country or region in which they're available. Learn more about the App Store guidelines.

License Agreement

Apple provides a standard EULA (End-User License Agreement) that applies in all territories. You may provide a custom license agreement that supersedes the Apple EULA for one or more territories.

Primary language

The language that is the default for the metadata on the App Store when you don’t provide localized metadata for a given territory. You can change the primary language at any time.

Category (Primary and Secondary)

The categories that best describe your app.

For macOS apps, you also set the app category in Xcode. The primary category you set in App Store Connect should match the category you set in Xcode.

Apps that use NewsstandKit must set the app’s primary or secondary category to Magazines & Newspapers.

For more information, see Choosing a Category.

Subcategory

If you select Games as the Primary or Secondary Category, you can also select one or two subcategories to help more accurately define your game.

Availability in the Republic of Korea - Rating Classification Number

If your app meets one or more of the following characteristics, a Rating Classification Number from the Game Rating and Administration Committee is required in order to offer it on the App Store in the Republic of Korea to users 19 years of age or older:

  • Apps in the Casino subcategory with age rating 17+

  • Apps in the Games or Entertainment categories with a Frequent/Intense level of frequency in at least one of the following content descriptions:

    - Simulated Gambling

    - Sexual Content or Nudity

    - Alcohol, Tobacco, or Drug Use or Reference

    - Realistic Violence

Please note that this field will display if your app is in the Games or Entertainment category with a rating of 17+, but is only required if your app meets the above criteria.

Availability in China mainland

Chinese law requires games to secure an approval number from China's National Press and Publication Administration (NPPA). If you offer or plan to offer paid games or games with in-app purchases, provide your approval number and supporting documents to make sure your app will be available on the App Store in China mainland.

To help verify your approval number, upload your game’s ISBN Issuing Letter or Approval Reply, and a copy of your latest Business License. Additionally, you can include an authorization agreement from the matching operator.

Learn more about approval numbers from the NPPA.

URL for App Store Server Notifications

If your app offers in-app purchases, you can receive server notifications from the App Store about key events by setting up an optional URL that links to your server. For more information, see Enable App Store Server Notifications.

Platform version information

Platform version information refers to the set of properties of an app version that are specific to a platform added to an app.

For marketing guidelines on specifying this information, read App Store Product Page.

Property

Description

Language

The language you choose to localize your metadata. This property is editable depending on the app status.

Screenshots

Screenshots that show what your app looks like on a device. For details, go to Screenshot specifications.

This property is required and can be localized.

App Preview

An app preview is an optional short video demonstrating your app. You may add up to three app previews for each localization, per device size. For details, go to App preview specifications.

Promotional Text

Promotional text lets you inform your App Store visitors of any current app features without requiring an updated submission. This text will appear above your description on the App Store for customers with devices running iOS 11 or later. This property can’t be longer than 170 characters.

Description

A description of the app, detailing the features and functionality. Limited to 4000 characters. The description should be in plain text, with line breaks as needed. HTML format is not supported.

This property is required and can be localized.

Keywords

One or more keywords (each greater than two characters ) describing your app. Separate multiple keywords with commas. You can provide up to 100 bytes of content. Your app is searchable by app name and company name, so you don’t duplicate these values in the keyword list. Names of other apps or companies are not allowed.

This property is required and can be localized.

Support URL

The support website you plan to provide for users who have questions regarding the app. The support URL must lead to actual contact information so that users can reach you regarding app issues, general feedback, and feature enhancement requests. Specify the entire URL, including the protocol, as in http://support.example.com.

This property is required and can be localized.

Marketing URL

The website where users get more information about the app. Specify the entire URL, including the protocol.

This property can be localized.

Version Number

The version number that is provided for your app appears on the App Store.

Rating

The rating of your app for the purpose of parental controls on the App Store. Note that while the rating is set for each platform version individually, the final app rating will be determined by the highest rated platform version for the app and will be displayed in the App Information section. For possible values, go to App ratings.

This property is required.

Made for Kids

An indication that the app appears in the Kids category on the App Store; this property includes the age range set for the app. The app will only be listed as Made for Kids if all of the platform versions are enabled as Made for Kids.

After the app is approved as “Made for Kids,” all future versions of the app must also be “Made for Kids” and conform to Section 1.3 in the App Store Review Guidelines. The app can’t be removed from the “Kids” category once it’s available for sale on the App Store.

Copyright

The name of the person or entity that owns the exclusive rights to the app, preceded by the year the rights were obtained (for example, 2014 Example, Inc.). The copyright symbol is added automatically.

This property is required.

Routing App Coverage File

A routing app’s geographic coverage file (a file with a .geojson file extension) that specify the geographic regions supported by your app.

The file can have only one MultiPolygon element. MultiPolygon elements consist of at least one Polygon. Polygons contain at least four coordinate points. The start and end coordinate points for a polygon must be the same. For file specifications, read “Specifying the Geographic Coverage File Contents” in Location and Maps Programming Guide.

Version Release Settings

Determines how the app version will be released. The following settings are allowed:

  • Manual. When the app status changes to Pending Developer Release after approval and you must manually release the version.

  • Automatic. The app goes live automatically after it is approved by App Review.

  • Automatic, no earlier than. If the date has not passed when the app is approved, the app status changes to Pending Developer Release, but is automatically released at the date specified.

Advertising Identifier

Your app must comply with the Advertising Identifier (IDFA) usage in order to be approved by App Review. Therefore, before you submit your app for review, you’ll be asked whether your app uses IDFA.

If your app uses IDFA, select Yes; otherwise, select No.

What’s New in this Version

A description of the changes in this version of the app such as new features, UI improvements, or bug fixes. Limited to 4000 characters.

This property is not available for the first version of the app but required for all subsequent versions. This property can be localized.

Phased Release for Automatic Updates

When you release a version update of your app, you can choose to release your iOS app in stages. If you choose this option, your version update will be released over a 7-day period to a percentage of your users on iOS with automatic updates turned on. For details, go to Release a version update in phases.

Reset Summary Rating

You can reset your app’s summary rating when you release a new version. For details, go to Reset summary rating.

App ratings

The app rating is a required platform version information property that is used by the parental controls on the App Store. To set the app rating of a platform version, go to Set app ratings.

Possible values for the rating property are:

Rating

Definition

4+

Apps in this category contain no objectionable material.

9+

Apps in this category may contain instances of the following content that may not be suitable for children under the age of 9:

  • Infrequent or mild cartoon or fantasy violence

  • Infrequent or mild profanity or crude humor

  • Infrequent or mild mature, suggestive, or horror or fear themed

12+

Apps in this category may contain instances of the following content that may not be suitable for children under the age of 12:

  • Infrequent or mild medical or treatment-focused content

  • Infrequent or mild references to alcohol, tobacco, or drug use

  • Infrequent or mild sexual content or nudity

  • Frequent or intense profanity or crude humor

  • Frequent or intense horror or fear themed content

  • Frequent or intense cartoon or fantasy violence

  • Infrequent or mild occurrences of realistic violence

  • Infrequent or mild simulated gambling

17+

Apps in this category may contain instances of the following content that may not be suitable for children under the age of 17:

  • Unrestricted web access, such as with an embedded browser

  • Gambling or contests

  • Frequent or intense simulated gambling

  • Frequent or intense mature or suggestive content

  • Frequent or intense medical or treatment-focused content

  • Frequent or intense references to alcohol, tobacco, or drug use

  • Frequent or intense sexual content or nudity

  • Frequent or intense realistic violence

The equivalent Entertainment Software Rating Board (ESRB) and Pan European Game Information (PEGI) ratings are:

Apple rating

ESRB

PEGI

4+

EC

3+

Not applicable

E

7+

9+

E10+

None

12+

T

12+

17+

Mature

16+

No Rating

This content can’t be sold in Apple stores.

Adults Only

18+

Required, localizable, and editable properties

The table below shows which app and version properties that are required for App Store submission, can be localized for a given language or territory, and can be edited at any time without requiring a version update of your app.

App information

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Name

Subtitle

Privacy Policy URL

Bundle ID

SKU

Content Rights

1

License Agreement

2

Primary Language

Primary Category

Secondary Category

Availability in the Republic of Korea3

Availability in China mainland4

5

URL for App Store Server Notifications6

1 Can only be edited from no to yes.

2 Localized text may be included in the Custom License Agreement text box.

3 Required for developers who enroll as a company and distribute their app for download in South Korea.

4 Required for paid games or games with in-app purchases to be available on the App Store in China mainland.

5 Can be entered at any time, but will go for review with the next version submission.

6 This property is only visible for apps that offer in-app purchases.

Platform version information

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Screenshots

App Preview

Promotional Text

Description

Keywords

Support URL

Marketing URL

Version Number

Rating

Copyright

Routing App Coverage File

App Review Information

Version Release Settings

Advertising Identifier

What’s New in this Version

1

Phased Release for Automatic Updates

1

2

Reset summary rating

1

1 Required for version updates only.

2 Version release can be paused at any time within the seven day window, but once a version has been released to all users it cannot be changed.

Default app clip properties

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Header Image

Subtitle

Action

Advanced app clip properties

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Header Image

Default Display Title

Default Subtitle

Action

App pricing and availability information

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Availability

Price

Pricing Start Date

Pricing End Date

Make available for pre-order

Pre-Order Release Date

Distribution for Business and Education

Last-Compatible Version Setting

In-app purchase information

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Reference Name

Product ID

Availability

Price

Pricing Start Date

Pricing End Date

Content Hosing (non-consumables only)

Display Name

Description

App Store Promotional Image

App Review Screenshot

Review Notes

Auto-renewable subscription group information

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Subscription Levels

Subscription Group Reference Name

Subscription Group Display Name

App Name Display Options

Auto-renewable subscription information

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Reference Name

Product ID

Availability

Subscription Duration

Subscription Price

Subscription Price Start Date

Subscription Price End Date

Introductory Price

Introductory Price Start Date

1

Introductory Price End Date

1

Type of Introductory Price

1

Introductory Price Duration

1

Subscription Display Name

Description

App Store Promotional Image

App Review Screenshot

Review Notes

1 Required if the subscription offers introductory pricing

Game Center leaderboard properties

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Leaderboard Reference Name

Leaderboard ID

Score Format Type

Score Submission Type

Sort Order

Score Range

Start Date and Time1

Duration1

Resets Every1

1 This property is only available for recurring leaderboards.

Game Center leaderboard language properties

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Language

Name

Score Format

Score Format Suffix (Singular)

Score Format Suffix (Plural)

Image

Game Center achievement properties

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Achievement Reference Name

Achievement ID

Point Value

Hidden

Achievable More Than Once

Game Center achievement language properties

Property

Required

Localized

Editable

Language

Title

Pre-earned Description

Earned Description

Image

App bundle information

App bundle information refers to the set of properties required to create an app bundle. Some information is specific to the app bundle, some is derived from the first app you add to the app bundle (called the primary app), and other information is derived from all of the apps in the bundle.

Bundle specific information

This information is required for the primary language of the app bundle. Additional localizations are optional.

Property

Description

App bundle name

The name of the app bundle as it appears on the App Store.

App bundle description

The descriptions of the app bundle as it appears on the App Store.

Marketing URL

(Optional). This can be the same URL as you use for the individual apps or a different one.

Price

The level that determines both the customer price and your proceeds.

The price tiers are broken down to Compatible Price Tiers and Incompatible Price Tiers. Compatible Price Tiers represent the price tiers that have met the minimum and maximum bundle pricing rules listed in App Bundle Availability and Price. Selecting one of these tiers can ensure that your app bundle can be made available on the App Store as long as all other requirements have been met.

Note that future price changes and intervals that have been set for your app could affect the list of compatible price tiers.

SKU

A unique ID for your bundle. The bundle SKU must be different from that of the SKU of the individual apps. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens, periods, and underscore. The SKU cannot start with a hyphen, period, or underscore.

Cleared for Sale

Check Cleared for Sale to make your app bundle available on the App Store. There are no bundle-specific territory settings. An app bundle will be live on the App Store only where all the member apps are available.

For example, if some of the apps in the bundle are cleared for sale worldwide but some are live only in specific territories, the bundle will be available only in those territories. You will not be able to select the Cleared for Sale check box if you already have ten app bundles cleared for sale. If you wish to clear a new app bundle for sale, you must first remove the Cleared for Sale check box from a different live bundle.

Primary App Information

This information is derived from the first app you add to a bundle. You don’t need to provide this information separately for the app bundle.

Property

Description

Category

The app bundle category will be derived from the primary app’s category.

Primary language

The primary localization is the primary language of the first app in the bundle.

Upon the initial creation of your app bundle, the bundle’s primary language will default to that of the primary app in the bundle. If another app is rearranged into the first position in the list of apps, it will become the primary app, but the primary language won’t change.

Privacy policy

The privacy policy of your primary app will be used for the app bundle’s privacy policy.

License Agreement

If your primary app has a custom license agreement, it will be used for the app bundle’s privacy policy.

Copyright

The app bundle copyright information will be derived from the primary app’s category.

Trade Representative Contact Information

If your primary app has a trade representative contact information, it will be used for the app bundle’s privacy policy.

Bundle Set Information

This information is derived from the set of apps in the bundle. You don’t need to provide this information separately for the app bundle.

Property

Description

Icon

The bundle icon is generated from the icons for the first four apps in the bundle. You can create a custom icon for your bundle in place of the icon generated automatically. A transparent overlay will be added in the bottom-right corner of your icon to let users know that the icon represents a bundle.

Screenshots

App bundles can display a maximum of ten screenshots, with an equal number of screenshots represented for each app. For example, if your app bundle contains five apps and each app has five screenshots, only two screenshots from each app will be displayed for your app bundle.

The order of the screenshots is based on the order of the apps in the bundle. The screenshots can be rearranged only as the apps in the bundle are rearranged.

App previews

Apps that have an app preview will always display it in place of the first screenshot.

Ratings

The rating is determined by the highest rating among the apps in the bundle. For example: if the bundle consists of apps with 12+ rating and 9+ rating, the app bundle will have a rating of 12+.

Available localizations

Localizations will be derived from the common localizations across all of the apps.

Keywords

The app bundle gets every keyword from every app in the bundle. This is not displayed on the bundle page in App Store Connect.

Made for Kids

All the apps in the bundle have to be Made for Kids and have all the same age-band for the app bundle to be listed in the age-band categories on the App Store.

Availability, pricing, and territory rights

Availability, pricing, and territory rights properties determine where and when an app is available and at what price. You can set these properties when you add an app to your account, or you can edit the app information later.

Property

Description

Price

Determines both the customer price and your proceeds. Your proceeds are the price minus Apple’s commission and applicable taxes. If you choose a price other than free, you must have a Paid Applications agreement in place before you can sell the app. You can set a price for your app or schedule price changes.

Start Date

The date when a new price will take effect on the App Store.

End Date

The date that a price will no longer be in effect and will return to the previously set price.

Make available for pre-order

Select this option to publish your app as a pre-order. The Pre-Orders section is only visible if your app has never been published on the App Store.

Release Date

If you publish your app as a pre-order, this is the date when your app will end as a pre-order and become available for download on the App Store. This property is visible only when you select Make available for pre-order.

Distribution for Education and Business

You may choose to distribute your app outside of the App Store to specific users as a custom app, or to business or educational institutions through Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager, where your app can be offered at a discount.

Available at a reduced price for educational institutions

You can enable a 50% discount for educational institutions that purchase 20 or more copies of your iOS app or Mac app. For more information, see Building Apps for Education.

Available for education and business without a reduced price

Your app will be available for Apple Business Manager and Apple School Manager without a reduced price. For more information, see Distributing Custom Apps for Business or Building Apps for Education.

Available privately as a custom app (iOS only)

Select this option if you would like to distribute your app as a custom app. This option is only available if your app hasn’t been approved yet.

Availability

The territories where the app is available to purchase or download. By default, your app is available in all territories the App Store currently supports and is added to new App Store territories.

Last Compatible Version Settings

The versions of an app that are available for existing customers to download from iCloud. You need to exclude app versions from iCloud if the version includes legal or usability issues.

App statuses

The app status indicates immediately whether your app needs attention.

  • A red status indicator () means that you need to perform some action before an app can be available on the App Store.

  • A yellow status indicator () means that some process is ongoing, controlled either by you or by Apple.

  • A green status indicator () means that the app is Ready for Sale.

If an app status is indicated as editable below, you can edit all app metadata when the app has this status.

Status

Description

Editable

Prepare for Submission

You’ve created your app in App Store Connect but are still preparing information for it.

Waiting for Review

You’ve submitted a new app or updated a version. Apple has received your app but hasn’t started the review.

While you are waiting for review, you can:

In Review

Apple is reviewing your app. You can remove the build from review.

Pending Agreement

Your app has been reviewed and is ready for sale, but your agreements aren’t yet in effect.

Check the progress of your contracts in the Agreements, Tax, and Banking section.

Waiting for Export Compliance

Your CCATS file is in Apple’s export compliance review process.

Pending Developer Release

Your app version has been approved by Apple, but you still need to release it for sale.

Release the version to the store when you’re ready.

Processing for App Store

Your build is being processed and will be ready for sale within 24 hours.

Pending Apple Release

Apple is holding your app version until the corresponding Apple operating system version is released to the public.

If you think an app should be released on the existing operating system versions, review the deployment target set in your app build. If you rebuild your app with a different deployment target, reject the build for this version and submit the new version.

Pending App Transfer

An app transfer has been initiated, but not yet accepted by the recipient. The transferor and the recipient can each cancel the transfer. No changes can be made to the app except changes to Pricing.

Processing App Transfer

The recipient has accepted the app transfer. The transfer cannot be canceled and no changes can be made to the app until the transfer is complete.

Ready for Sale

Apple has approved the app version and made it available on the App Store.

When the app is in this state you can:

Pre-Order Ready for Sale

Apple has approved the app version and made it available for pre-order on the App Store.

When the app is in this state you can:

Rejected

Apple rejected the build. App Store Connect users with an Admin, App Manager, or Developer role are notified about what caused the rejection.

To resolve an issue, go to Resolve app rejection issues.

Metadata Rejected

Metadata items haven’t passed review.

To resolve the issue and continue the review, read the App Store communication, edit your app’s metadata, and then reply to the communication.

Removed from Sale

Your app has been removed from the App Store. If your app is at risk of being removed from the App Store, Apple may contact you to try to resolve the issues before removing your app.

Developer Rejected

You’ve removed the build from review, removing it from the review queue.

When you’re ready, resubmit your build or submit a new build.

Developer Removed from Sale

You’ve removed the app from the App Store. When you’re ready, you can restore the app to the App Store.

App build statuses

The build status tells you immediately whether your build needs attention. The status applies to the build only, not the entire app.

  • A red status indicator () means that you need to perform some action.

  • A yellow status indicator () means that some process is ongoing, controlled either by you or by Apple.

  • A green status indicator () means the build is being tested in TestFlight, or can be submitted for review..

You can view the builds you upload and their file sizes in the Activity area of your app. You can also view beta build status and metrics in the TestFlight area of your app.

Status

Description

Internal testing

External testing

Processing

Your build is still being processed. You will receive an email notification when your build is ready.

If you upload a build and it remains in the Processing state for more than 24 hours, there may be an issue. To resolve the issue, Contact Us.

Invalid Binary

Apple received your build, but it didn’t meet all the upload requirements. Resolve any issues in the build, and redeliver. See Uploading builds overview.

Not visible

in TestFlight

Not visible

in TestFlight

Missing Compliance

Your build is missing export compliance documentation. Action is needed. See Provide export compliance for beta builds.

Waiting for Export

Compliance Review

Documentation for export compliance has been submitted and is in review. No action is needed on your end.

In Compliance Review

Documentation for export compliance is in review. No action is needed on your end.

Ready to Submit

Your build can be distributed to internal testers, or can be submitted to Beta App Review for external testing or to App Review for release on the App Store.

Waiting for Review

Your build has been submitted to Beta App Review. It will need to be approved before you can begin external testing.

In Beta Review

Your build is currently being reviewed by Beta App Review. It will need to be approved before you can begin external testing.

Rejected

Your build was rejected by Beta App Review and can no longer be used in TestFlight. To begin testing, upload a new build.

Not visible

in TestFlight

Not visible

in TestFlight

Ready to Test

Your build can be tested by external and internal testers, but you haven’t added any testers yet. You may have opted to manually notify testers after your build is approved. You can also submit your app to App Review for release on the App Store.

Testing

Your build is being tested by at least one group or tester. Click on the build to see more details about who is testing your build. You can continue testing or submit your app to App Review for release on the App Store. Testers that have received an invite to test will still be able to test your build even after it goes live on the App Store.

See alsoApp statuses

App Store countries and regions

You can make your app available in the following App Store countries or regions:

ISO code

Country or Region

AFG

Afghanistan

AE

United Arab Emirates

AG

Antigua and Barbuda

AI

Anguilla

AL

Albania

AM

Armenia

AO

Angola

AR

Argentina

AT

Austria

AU

Australia

AZ

Azerbaijan

BB

Barbados

BE

Belgium

BIH

Bosnia and Herzegovina

BF

Burkina Faso

BG

Bulgaria

BH

Bahrain

BJ

Benin

BM

Bermuda

BN

Brunei

BO

Bolivia

BR

Brazil

BS

Bahamas

BT

Bhutan

BW

Botswana

BY

Belarus

BZ

Belize

CMR

Cameroon

CA

Canada

CG

Congo, Republic of the

CH

Switzerland

CIV

Cote d’Ivoire

CL

Chile

CN

China mainland

CO

Colombia

COD

Congo, Democratic Republic of the

CR

Costa Rica

CV

Cape Verde

CY

Cyprus

CZ

Czech Republic

DE

Germany

DK

Denmark

DM

Dominica

DO

Dominican Republic

DZ

Algeria

EC

Ecuador

EE

Estonia

EG

Egypt

ES

Spain

FI

Finland

FJ

Fiji

FM

Micronesia

FR

France

GAB

Gabon

GB

United Kingdom

GD

Grenada

GEO

Georgia

GH

Ghana

GM

Gambia

GR

Greece

GT

Guatemala

GW

Guinea-Bissau

GY

Guyana

HK

Hong Kong

HN

Honduras

HR

Croatia

HU

Hungary

ID

Indonesia

IE

Ireland

IL

Israel

IN

India

IRQ

Iraq

IS

Iceland

IT

Italy

JM

Jamaica

JO

Jordan

JP

Japan

KE

Kenya

KG

Kyrgyzstan

KH

Cambodia

KN

St. Kitts and Nevis

KR

Republic of Korea

KW

Kuwait

KY

Cayman Islands

KZ

Kazakhstan

LA

Laos

LB

Lebanon

LBY

Libya

LC

St. Lucia

LK

Sri Lanka

LR

Liberia

LT

Lithuania

LU

Luxembourg

LV

Latvia

MAR

Morocco

MD

Moldova

MDV

Maldives

MG

Madagascar

MK

North Macedonia

ML

Mali

MMR

Myanmar

MN

Mongolia

MNE

Montenegro

MO

Macau

MR

Mauritania

MS

Montserrat

MT

Malta

MU

Mauritius

MW

Malawi

MX

Mexico

MY

Malaysia

MZ

Mozambique

NA

Namibia

NE

Niger

NG

Nigeria

NI

Nicaragua

NL

Netherlands

NO

Norway

NP

Nepal

NRU

Nauru

NZ

New Zealand

OM

Oman

PA

Panama

PE

Peru

PG

Papua New Guinea

PH

Philippines

PK

Pakistan

PL

Poland

PT

Portugal

PW

Palau

PY

Paraguay

QA

Qatar

RO

Romania

RU

Russia

RWA

Rwanda

SA

Saudi Arabia

SB

Solomon Islands

SC

Seychelles

SE

Sweden

SG

Singapore

SI

Slovenia

SK

Slovakia

SL

Sierra Leone

SN

Senegal

SR

Suriname

SRB

Serbia

ST

Sao Tome and Principe

SV

El Salvador

SZ

Swaziland

TC

Turks and Caicos Islands

TD

Chad

TH

Thailand

TJ

Tajikistan

TM

Turkmenistan

TN

Tunisia

TON

Tonga

TR

Turkey

TT

Trinidad and Tobago

TW

Taiwan

TZ

Tanzania

UA

Ukraine

UG

Uganda

US

United States

UY

Uruguay

UZ

Uzbekistan

VC

St. Vincent and the Grenadines

VE

Venezuela

VG

British Virgin Islands

VN

Vietnam

VUT

Vanuatu

XKS

Kosovo

YE

Yemen

ZA

South Africa

ZMB

Zambia

ZW

Zimbabwe

App Store localizations

You can localize your app’s metadata, which appears on the App Store, in the following languages and locales. For how to localize the metadata, go to Localize App Store information.

  • Arabic

  • Catalan

  • Chinese (Simplified)

  • Chinese (Traditional)

  • Croatian

  • Czech

  • Danish

  • Dutch

  • English (Australia)

  • English (Canada)

  • English (U.K.)

  • English (U.S.)

  • Finnish

  • French

  • French (Canada)

  • German

  • Greek

  • Hebrew

  • Hindi

  • Hungarian

  • Indonesian

  • Italian

  • Japanese

  • Korean

  • Malay

  • Norwegian

  • Polish

  • Portuguese (Brazil)

  • Portuguese (Portugal)

  • Romanian

  • Russian

  • Slovak

  • Spanish (Mexico)

  • Spanish (Spain)

  • Swedish

  • Thai

  • Turkish

  • Ukrainian

  • Vietnamese

App sandbox information (macOS)

If you use App Sandbox entitlements, Apple needs information on each temporary exception entitlement included in the app. You add a temporary exception entitlement by editing the .entitlements property list file in the Xcode project. For more information, see App Sandbox Design Guide.

Property

Description

Entitlement Key

The entitlement key that corresponds to a temporary exception entitlement implemented in the app.

Usage Information

Information describing how to assess the entitlement and a description of the values in an array value used by the entitlement. If the entitlement works around a missing App Sandbox feature, file a bug report describing the exception using Feedback Assistant and include the bug ID in the usage information.

The description should include:

  • How the entitlement can be assessed

  • Why the entitlement is needed by the app

  • What functionality this entitlement enables

  • If the entitlement uses an array value, provide information on each value in the array

  • If the entitlement works around a missing App Sandbox feature, the ID of the bug you filed describing the exception

App Review information

You must provide the following information to App Review. It isn’t visible on the App Store.

Property

Description

Required

Contact:

Name, email, phone number

Information for the contact person in your organization if the App Review team needs additional information.

Notes

Additional information about your app that can help during the review process. Include information that may be needed to test your app, such as app-specific settings and test registration or account details. If your app delivers streaming video over the cellular network, enter a test stream URL. The Notes field can contain up to 4000 bytes. You can write notes in any language.

Sign-in required:

Username and password

Sign-in information for a demo account. If your app uses a single sign-on service, such as Facebook or Twitter, include the demo account login information for it. The demo account is used during the App Review process and must not expire. Details for additional accounts should be included in the Notes field.

If your app requires a login to use it.

Maximum build file sizes

For iOS and tvOS apps, verify that your app doesn’t exceed the maximum file sizes on the supported operating systems. Your app’s total uncompressed size must be less than 4GB. Apple Watch apps must be less than 75MB. In addition, each Mach-O executable file—for example, app_name.app/app_name—must not exceed these maximum file sizes.

For how to compute the memory usage, read “Viewing Virtual Memory Usage” in Memory Usage Performance Guidelines.

For OS version

Maximum executable file size

Notes

iOS 9.0 and later

tvOS 9.0 and later

500 MB

For the total of all __TEXT sections in the binary.

iOS 7.X through iOS 8.X

60 MB

For the __TEXT sections in each architecture slice.1

Earlier than iOS 7.0

80 MB

For the total of all __TEXT sections in the binary.

1 An architecture slice is a part of the fat binary layout that targets a specific architecture. For example, a fat binary might include slices for 32-bit and 64-bit architectures.

Export compliance documentation for encryption

Depending on the kind of encryption algorithm your app uses, you may need to provide documentation in App Store Connect, or to the U.S. Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS) directly.

Encryption algorithm in use

Required documentation

Your app uses ATS or makes a call to HTTPS

No documentation required in App Store Connect. Submit a Self Classification Report to the U.S. Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS) directly.

Your app uses encryption limited to that within the Apple operating system

No documentation required in App Store Connect. Submit a Self Classification Report to the U.S. Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS) directly.

If your app qualifies for one or more exemptions provided under category 5 part 2, of the BIS Export Administration Regulation, including but not limited to apps that are:

  • Specially designed for medical end-use

  • Limited to intellectual property and copyright protection

  • Limited to authentication, digital signature, or the decryption of data or files

  • Specially designed and limited for banking use or “money transactions”; or Limited to “fixed” data compression or coding techniques

No documentation required in App Store Connect.

Your app uses an industry standard algorithm, not provided within the Apple operating system

Upload your French encryption declaration in App Store Connect.1

Your app uses proprietary encryption algorithms not accepted by international standard bodies (such as IEEE, IETF, or ITU)

Upload your:

  • U.S. Commodity Classification Automated Tracking System (CCATS)

  • French encryption declaration in App Store Connect1

1French encryption declaration form is only required if you are distributing your app on the App Store in France.

Beta tester feedback

The table below shows all of the information that is available in the detailed tester feedback view. You can view this information by clicking into each feedback item. See View tester feedback.

Data

Description

Tester

The name of the tester, if available.

Email

The email address of the tester, if available.

Group

The name of the tester group, or groups, the tester is added to.

App Version

The version and build a tester has installed on their device.

App Uptime

The length of time the app was open and running at the time the tester feedback was sent.

Device

The model of the tester's device.

iOS Version

The version of iOS the tester's device is running.

Battery

The tester's battery level at the time the feedback was sent.

Carrier

The tester's wireless service provider.

Time Zone

The timezone the tester's device is set to.

Architecture

The type of Central Processing Unit (CPU) for the tester's device.

Connection Type

Whether the tester was connected to WiFi, cellular, or not connected at the time that the feedback was sent and the tester's mobile network type.

Paired Apple Watch

If the tester is testing on an Apple Watch app, the Apple Watch model and watchOS version is shared with you.

Disk Free

The amount of disk space the tester has available at the time the feedback was sent.

Screen Resolution

The screen resolution of the tester's device.

App previews and screenshots

App preview specifications

You can provide app previews in tH.264 and ProRes 422 (HQ only) formats, with the following specifications.

Video Specifications

H.264 format

ProRes 422 (HQ only) format

Target bit rate

10-12 Mbps

VBR ~220 Mbps

Video characteristics

Progressive, up to High Profile Level 4.0

Progressive, no external references

Max frame rate

30 frames per second

30 frames per second

Audio

  • Stereo

  • Codec: 256kbps AAC

  • Sample Rate: 44.1kHz or 48kHz

  • All tracks should be enabled

Stereo configuration:

  • 1 track with 2-channel stereo (1st channel L and 2nd channel R)

  • 2 tracks with 1-channel stereo (1st track L and 2nd track R)

  • Stereo

  • Codec: PCM or 256kbps AAC

  • Bit Depth (for PCM): 16-, 24-, or 32-bit

  • Sample Rate: 44.1 or 48kHz

  • All tracks should be enabled

Stereo configuration:

  • 1 track with 2-channel stereo (1st channel L and 2nd channel R)

  • 2 tracks with 1-channel stereo (1st track L and 2nd track R)

Supported extensions

.mov, .m4v, .mp4

.mov

App Preview Resolutions

You can deliver app previews with the following resolutions.

Device size or platform

Native resolutions

Accepted resolutions

App Preview source

6.5 inch (iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone 11, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR)

2688 x 1242 pixels (19.5:9 aspect ratio)

886 x 1920 pixels (portrait)

1920 x 886 pixels (landscape)

Upload 6.5-inch previews

5.8 inch Super Retina Display (iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone XS, iPhone X)

2436 x 1125 pixels (19.5:9 aspect ratio)

886 x 1920 pixels (portrait)

1920 x 886 pixels (landscape)

Default: scaled 6.5-inch previews

Alternative: upload 5.8-inch previews

5.5 inch (iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 6s Plus)

2208 x 1242 pixels (Rendered Pixels)

1920 x 1080 pixels (Physical Pixels)

(16:9 aspect ratio)

1080 x 1920 pixels (portrait)

1920 x 1080 pixels (landscape)

Upload 5.5-inch previews

4.7 inch (iPhone SE (2nd generation), iPhone 8, iPhone 7, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6)

1334 x 750 pixels (16:9 aspect ratio)

750 x 1334 pixels (portrait)

1334 x 750 pixels (landscape)

Default: scaled 5.5-inch previews

Alternative: upload 4.7-inch previews

4 inch (iPhone SE (1st generation))

1136 x 640 pixels (16:9 aspect ratio)

1080 x 1920 pixels (portrait)

1920 x 1080 pixels (landscape)

Default: scaled 5.5- or 4.7-inch previews

Alternative: upload 4-inch previews

12.9 inch (iPad Pro (4th generation, 3rd generation))

2732 x 2048 pixels (4:3 aspect ratio)

1200 x 1600 pixels (portrait)

1600 x 1200 pixels (landscape)

Upload 12.9-inch iPad Pro (3rd generation) previews

12.9 inch (iPad Pro (2nd generation))

2732 x 2048 pixels (4:3 aspect ratio)

1200 x 1600 pixels (portrait)

1600 x 1200 pixels (landscape)

900 x 1200 pixels (portrait)

1200 x 900 pixels (landscape)

Upload 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) previews

11 inch (iPad Pro)

2388 x 1668 pixels (4.3:3 aspect ratio)

1200 x 1600 pixels (portrait)

1600 x 1200 pixels (landscape)

Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (3rd generation) preview

Alternative: upload 11-inch previews

10.5 inch (7th generation iPad, iPad Pro, iPad Air)

2224 x 1668 pixels (4:3 aspect ratio)

1200 x 1600 pixels (portrait)

1600 x 1200 pixels (landscape)

Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) previews

Alternative: upload 10.5-inch previews

9.7 inch (iPad, iPad mini)

2048 x 1536 pixels (4:3 aspect ratio)

900 x 1200 pixels (portrait)

1200 x 900 pixels (landscape)

Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) or 10.5-inch previews

Alternative: upload 9.7-inch previews

Apple TV

1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9 aspect ratio)

1920 x 1080 pixels

Upload Apple TV previews

Mac

1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9 aspect ratio)

1920 x 1080 pixels

Upload Mac previews

App Preview Requirements

The following are required to create your app preview and upload it to App Store Connect.

Context

Description

Maximum file size

500MB

Minimum length

15 Seconds

Maximum length

30 Seconds

Default poster frame setting

5 Seconds (See Set an app preview poster frame.)

Orientation

Portrait or Landscape (Note: macOS app previews accept landscape only.)

OS device capture and play

iOS 8 or later

Upload and playback on App Store Connect

Safari 8 and macOS 10.10 or later

Screenshot specifications

Device size or platform

Screenshot size

Requirement

Screenshot source

6.5 inch (iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone 11, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR)

1242 x 2688 pixels (portrait)

2688 x 1242 pixels (landscape)

Required if app runs on iPhone

Upload 6.5-inch screenshots

5.8 inch (iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone XS, iPhone X)

1125 x 2436 pixels (portrait)

2436 x 1125 pixels (landscape)

Required if app runs on iPhone and 6.5 inch screenshots are not provided

Default: scaled 6.5-inch screenshots

Alternative: upload 5.8-inch screenshots

5.5 inch (iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 6s Plus)

1242 x 2208 pixels (portrait)

2208 x 1242 pixels (landscape)

Required if app runs on iPhone

Upload 5.5-inch screenshots

4.7 inch (iPhone SE (2nd generation), iPhone 8, iPhone 7, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6)

750 x 1334 pixels (portrait)

1334 x 750 pixels (landscape)

Required if app runs on iPhone and 5.5-inch screenshots are not provided

Default: scaled 5.5-inch screenshots

Alternative: upload 4.7-inch screenshots

4 inch (iPhone SE (1st generation))

640 x 1096 pixels (portrait without status bar)

640 x 1136 pixels (portrait with status bar)

1136 x 600 pixels (landscape without status bar)

1136 x 640 pixels (landscape with status bar)

Required if app runs on iPhone and 5.5- or 4.7-inch screenshots are not provided

Default: scaled 5.5- or 4.7-inch screenshots

Alternative: upload 4-inch screenshots

3.5 inch (iPhone 4s)

640 x 920 pixels (portrait without status bar)

640 x 960 pixels (portrait with status bar)

960 x 600 pixels (landscape (without status bar)

960 x 640 pixels (landscape with status bar)

Required if app runs on iPhone and 5.5 inch iPhone screenshots are not provided

Default: scaled 5.5-, 4.7-, or 4-inch screenshots

Alternative: upload 3.5-inch screenshots

12.9 inch (iPad Pro (4th generation, 3rd generation))

2048 x 2732 pixels (portrait)

2732 x 2048 pixels (landscape)

Required if app runs on iPad

Upload 12.9-inch iPad Pro (3rd generation) screenshots

12.9 inch (2nd generation iPad Pro)

2048 x 2732 pixels (portrait)

2732 x 2048 pixels (landscape)

Required if app runs on iPad

Upload 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) screenshots

11 inch (iPad Pro, 4th generation iPad Air)

1668 x 2388 pixels (portrait)

2388 x 1668 pixels (landscape)

1640 x 2360 pixels (portrait)

2360 x 1640 pixels (landscape)

Required if app runs on iPad and 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) screenshots are not provided

Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (3rd generation) screenshots

Alternative: upload 11-inch screenshots

10.5 inch (iPad (8th generation, 7th generation), iPad Pro, iPad Air)

1668 x 2224 pixels (portrait)

2224 x 1668 pixels (landscape)

Required if app runs on iPad and 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) screenshots are not provided

Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) screenshots

Alternative: upload 10.5-inch screenshots

9.7 inch (iPad, iPad mini)

High Resolution:

1536 x 2008 pixels (portrait (without status bar)

1536 x 2048 pixels (portrait with status bar)

2048 x 1496 pixels (landscape without status bar)

2048 x 1536 pixels (landscape with status bar)

Standard resolution:

768 x 1004 pixels (portrait without status bar)

768 x 1024 pixels (portrait with status bar)

1024 x 748 pixels (landscape (without status bar)

1024 x 768 pixels (landscape with status bar)

Required if app runs on iPad and 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) or 10.5-inch screenshots are not provided

Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) or 10.5-inch screenshots

Alternative: upload 9.7-inch screenshots

Mac

One of the following, with a 16:10 aspect ratio.

1280 x 800 pixels

1440 x 900 pixels

2560 x 1600 pixels

2880 x 1800 pixels

Required for Mac apps

Upload Mac screenshots in one of the listed sizes

Apple TV

1920 x 1080 pixels

3840 x 2160 pixels

Required for Apple TV apps

Upload Apple TV screenshot in one of the listed sizes

Apple Watch

One of the following:

312 x 390 pixels (Series 3)

368 x 448 pixels (Series 6, Series 5, Series 4, and SE)

Required for Apple Watch apps

Upload Apple Watch screenshot in one of the listed sizes

Users and Access

Role permissions

The tasks you are able to perform depends on your user role. The Account Holder can access all aspects of App Store Connect and the Apple Developer website, and is the only user that can sign legal agreements, renew membership, remove auto-renewable subscriptions from sale, submit Safari Extensions, or create developer ID certificates.

Members of an organization’s team in the Apple Developer Program also have access to membership resources on the Apple Developer website and other membership benefits. Users who have been given access to App Store Connect by an individual enrolled in the Apple Developer Program only have access to App Store Connect.

Additional Permissions

  • Access to reports is an additional privilege for users with the App Manager, Developer, Marketing, or Sales role. Users with access to reports can download reports associated with their role. If this privilege is added, the user has access to reports for all of your apps. Users with this role can't be given access to only a subset of apps, they will get access to all apps when the access level is added.

  • Access to Certificates, Identifiers & Profile is an additional privilege for users with the App Manager, or Developer role that are members of an organization’s team. If this privilege is added, the user sees certificates, identifiers, and profiles associated with all of your apps.

Role

Description

Account Holder

The person who completes program enrollment is assigned the Account Holder role. This user is responsible for entering into legal agreements with Apple.

Admin

Serves as a secondary contact for teams and has many of the same responsibilities as the Account Holder. Admins have access to all apps. If the Admin is part of an organization team, they have Certificates, Identifiers & Profiles by default.

Finance

Manages financial information, including downloading reports and uploading tax forms. They can view all apps in Payments and Financial Reports, Sales and Trends, and App Analytics.

App Manager

Manages all aspects of an app, such as pricing, App Store information, and app development and delivery.

Developer

Manages development and delivery of an app.

Marketing

Manages marketing materials and promotional artwork. They’ll be contacted by Apple if your app is considered for featuring on the App Store.

Sales

Analyzes sales, downloads, and other analytics for an app.

Customer Support

Analyzes and responds to customer reviews on the App Store. If a user has the Customer Support role only, when they click on an app in My Apps, they’ll go straight to the Ratings and Reviews section.

In the tables below, App Mgr. signifies App Manager, Dev. signifies Developer, Mktg. signifies Marketing, and Cust. Support signifies Customer Support.

Agreements, Tax, and Banking

Task

Account Holder

Admin

Finance

App Mgr.

Dev.

Mktg.

Sales

Cust. Support

Manage agreements, tax, and banking

Membership Benefits on the Apple Developer Website (Organizations only)

Task

Account Holder

Admin

Finance

App Mgr.

Dev.

Mktg.

Sales

Cust. Support

Eligible for events and additional benefits

Purchase and submit Technical Support Incidents

Download beta software

Post in Developer Forums

Accept legal agreements

Renew membership

Submit certificate signing requests

Create and revoke development certificates

Create and revoke distribution certificates

Create Developer ID certificates

Create other certificate types

Create development provisioning profiles

+

Delete development provisioning profiles

Create and delete distribution provisioning profiles

Download provisioning profiles

Register and configure App IDs

+

Delete App IDs

Add UDIDs

+

Disable UDIDs

Create keys

Create and revoke Safari Extension Certificates

○ Requires access to Certificates, Identifiers & Profiles. This includes access to CloudKit Dashboard.

+ Can be done in Xcode 7 or later, if the users has access to Certificates, Identifiers & Profiles.

Users and Access

Task

Account Holder

Admin

Finance

App Mgr.

Dev.

Mktg.

Sales

Cust. Support

View Users and Access

Manage users and access

+

Manage app access

+

Manage sandbox testers

Access can be limited to certain apps

Can generate API Keys

Can be granted the “Access to Reports” permission

Can be granted access to Certificates, Identifiers, and Profiles

○ If the user is a member of an organization’s team.

+ Can add Developer or Marketing users. The user can only edit and grant access to apps they have permission to view.

My Apps: App Store

Task

Account Holder

Admin

Finance

App Mgr.

Dev.

Mktg.

Sales

Cust. Support

Create apps and submit versions

Edit App Store details

Edit app clip details

Edit app pricing and availability

Transfer apps

Remove and restore apps

Reset summary rating

○ Read Only

My Apps: Features

Task

Account Holder

Admin

Finance

App Mgr.

Dev.

Mktg.

Sales

Cust. Support

Create in-app purchases

Submit in-app purchases

Edit in-app purchases

Manage Game Center

Manage leaderboard scores

Manage promo codes and promo art

Set or change a pricing and availability for an auto-renewable subscription

Generate a receipt validation code for auto-renewable subscriptions

Enable server notifications for auto-renewable subscriptions

Remove an auto-renewable subscription from sale

Enable and Disable Billing Grace Period for your app

○ Read Only

My Apps: TestFlight

Task

Account Holder

Admin

Finance

App Mgr.

Dev.

Mktg.

Sales

Cust. Support

Manage TestFlight builds

Manage TestFlight testers

+

+

Manage app clip experiences

○ Read Only

+ Internal Testers Only

My Apps: Activity

Task

Account Holder

Admin

Finance

App Mgr.

Dev.

Mktg.

Sales

Cust. Support

Upload builds

View Ratings and Reviews

Respond to customer reviews

○ Requires access to Certificates, Identifiers & Profiles.

Reporting and Analytics

Task

Account Holder

Admin

Finance

App Mgr.

Dev.

Mktg.

Sales

Cust. Support

View app analytics

View sales and trends

View sales and trends reports

View payments and financial reports

Download catalog reports

○ Requires access to reports, which can be provided in Users and Access

User notifications

Users may receive a user notification for events that happen in their App Store Connect account such as an app being approved for sale or an agreement expiring. The types of user notifications are:

Type

Description

Applicable user roles

App Status Reports

Provides email alerts when an app changes state.

Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, Marketing

App Analytics Weekly Email Summary

Provides an email summarizing App Analytics data for the week for the top apps.

Account Holder, Admin, Sales, Finance

Agreements

Provides email alerts with agreement status updates. Examples are agreement expiration warnings or requests for more information from you to complete your agreement setup.

Account Holder

Developer Response

Provides email alerts when a customer edits a review you’ve responded to.

Account Holder, Admin, Customer Support

Financial Report

Provides email alerts when finance reports are available for download in App Store Connect.

Account Holder, Admin, Finance

Payments

Provides email alerts when a payment to your bank is returned. See Resolve a returned payment error.

Account Holder, Admin, Finance

Catalog reports

App catalog report

The app catalog report includes a row for each version of each app in your account. Each column shows metadata you entered or other properties that appear in the My Apps section.

For full property descriptions, go to App information and Platform version information.

Column

Description

APPLE_ID

The Apple ID (an app identifier).

APP_NAME

The name of the app.

APP_TYPE

The app type or platform: iOS, tvOS, or Mac.

PRIMARY_LANGUAGE

The default language for the metadata on the App Store (see App information).

SKU

The SKU.

VERSION_STRING

The version number.

ITC_STATUS

The app status.

LATEST_STATUS_CHANGE_DATE

The date the app status last changed.

RATING

The app rating.

PRIMARY_GENRE

The primary category.

SECONDARY_GENRE

The secondary category.

COUNT_IN_APP_APPROVED

The number of in-app purchase products that have been approved for sale.

BUNDLE_IDENTIFIER

The bundle ID.

BUNDLE_VERSION

The build string.

BUNDLE_DEVICE_FAMILY

The devices that this app supports that is specified in the build. If the app status is Prepare for Submission, this is empty.

MINIMUM_OS_VERSION

The minimum operating system required for this app that is specified in the build.

BUNDLE_LOCALIZATIONS

The localizations supported by your app that are derived from the .lproj folders in the build.

PRE_RENDERED_ICON

For iOS apps only, indicates whether the app has a prerendered icon. If Y, it is enabled; otherwise, it is not.

CURRENT_PRICE_TIER

The price of the app.

GAME_CENTER_ENABLED

Indicates whether Game Center is enabled. Y if it is enabled.

NEWSSTAND_ENABLED

Indicates whether Newsstand is enabled. Y if it is enabled.

APPROVED_LEADERBOARD_COUNT

Number of approved Game Center leaderboards.

APPROVED_ACHIEVEMENT_COUNT

Number of approved Game Center achievements.

LOCALE

Localizations that you added to your app. The languages are separated by vertical bar (|) symbols. Two-character IETF language tags are used, including the country code if it applies (for example, en-US).

List of country codes

The territory availability. The App Store countries and regions where the app is available. Y indicates that the app is available for sale in that territory; otherwise, it is not.

The report includes a column with the two-letter code for each possible territory.

Game Center achievement catalog report

The Game Center achievement catalog report contains a row for each of the achievements associated with Game Center apps in your account. Each column shows metadata or a setting for your app in My Apps.

For full descriptions of the properties, go to “Game Center Properties” in Game Center Configuration Guide for App Store Connect.

Column

Description

APP_APPLE_ID

The Apple ID (an app identifier) of the associated app.

REFERENCE_NAME

The achievement reference name.

APP_NAME

The name of the app. If the achievement is for an app that’s in a group, this column lists the names of all apps in the group.

ACHIEVEMENT_ID

The achievement ID.

Display_Order

The position in which this achievement appears in the list of achievements for the app.

POINTS_VALUE

The number of points that the achievement is worth.

IS_HIDDEN

Indicates whether the achievement is hidden from the player until the player meets the achievement’s requirements.

IS_RECYCLABLE

Indicates whether the achievement can be earned multiple times.

GROUP

The name of the group that the app belongs to, if any.

ACHIEVEMENT_STATUS

The current status of the achievement.

LOCALIZATIONS

A comma–separated list of the languages that you added to the achievement.

Game Center leaderboard catalog report

The Game Center leaderboard catalog report contains a row for each of the leaderboards associated with Game Center apps in your account. Each column shows metadata you entered or a setting for your app in My Apps.

For full descriptions of the properties, go to “Game Center Properties” in Game Center Configuration Guide for App Store Connect.

Column

Description

APP_APPLE_ID

The Apple ID (an app identifier) of the associated app.

REFERENCE_NAME

The leaderboard reference name.

APP_NAME

The name of the app. If the leaderboard is for an app that’s in a group, this column lists the names of all apps in the group.

LEADERBOARD_ID

The leaderboard ID.

SCORE_FORMAT_TYPE

The score format type.

Display_Order

The position in which this leaderboard appears in the list of leaderboards for the app.

SORT_ORDER

The leaderboard sort order. Scores can display from low to high or high to low.

MIN_SCORE_RANGE

The minimum allowable score for the leaderboard.

MAX_SCORE_RANGE

The maximum allowable score for the leaderboard.

PARENT_LEADERBOARD

If this leaderboard is a child in a combined leaderboard, the leaderboard reference name of the parent leaderboard.

LEADERBOARD_STATUS

The current status of the leaderboard.

IS_DEFAULT

Indicates that this leaderboard is the first leaderboard that users see in Game Center.

GROUP

The name of the group that the app belongs to, if any.

LEADERBOARD_TYPE

The leaderboard type.

LOCALIZATIONS

A comma–separated list of the languages that you added to the leaderboard.

In-app purchases catalog report

The in-app purchases catalog report contains a row for each of the in-app purchase products associated with apps in your account. Each column shows metadata you entered or a setting for the in-app purchase.

For full descriptions of the properties, see in-app purchase information.

Column

Description

Apple_ID

The unique Apple ID for the in-app purchase.

REFERENCE_NAME

The reference name.

PRODUCT_ID

The Product ID.

ADDON_TYPE

The type of in-app purchase product.

ADDON_ITC_STATUS

The status of the product in App Store Connect.

AUTO_RENEWABLE_DURATION

The duration for an auto-renewable subscription.

FREE_TRIAL_DURATION

The free trial duration set for an auto-renewable subscription.

MARKETING_OPTIN_INCENTIVE_DURATION

Indicates whether there’s a free subscription extension if users opt in to share their contact information. Y if it is enabled.

CLEARED_FOR_SALE

Indicates whether the product is ready for sale. Y indicates the product is available for purchase within the app.

APP_NAME

The name of the app.

APP_APPLE_ID

The Apple ID (an app identifier) of the associated app.

LOCALE

Localizations that you added to your in-app purchase. The languages are separated by vertical bar (|) symbols. Two-character IETF language tags are used, including the country code if it applies (for example, en-US).

In-app purchases

In-app purchase types

In-app purchase types refer to the different types of in-app purchase options available.

Column

Description

Consumable

A product that is used once, after which it becomes depleted and must be purchased again. Example: fish food in a fishing app.

Non-Consumable

A product that is purchased once and does not expire or decrease with use. Example: Race track for a game app. Apple can host your non-consumable products for you.

Auto-Renewable Subscription

A product that allows users to purchase dynamic content for a set period. This type of Subscription renews automatically unless cancelled by the user. Example: Monthly subscriptions for an app offering streaming services.

Non-Renewing Subscription

A product that allows users to purchase a service with a limited duration. The content of this in-app purchase can be static. This type of Subscription does not renew automatically. Example: One year subscription to a catalog of archived articles.

In-app purchase information

General Information

The main in-app purchase properties identify the product in App Store Connect and in the app.

Property

Description

Apple ID

A unique identifier automatically generated for your in-app purchase when you add the in-app purchase to your account.

Note: This identifier is not the same as your Apple ID that you use to sign in to App Store Connect and your developer account.

Reference Name

A unique name you give to your in-app purchase for internal tracking that is not visible to customers, but used App Store Connect and in Sales and Trends reports. The reference name can include any characters and can be as long as 64 characters.

The reference name can be edited at any time without review.

Product ID

A unique ID you give to your in-app purchase to identify the product. The product ID can contain letters, numbers, hyphens, periods, and underscores can be as long as 255 characters. You need separate identifiers for in-app purchases in your macOS app and your iOS app.

When your app uses StoreKit to communicate with the App Store, it uses product identifiers to retrieve the configuration data you provided for the in-app purchase. Later, when a user wants to make a purchase, your app identifies the in-app purchase using its product identifier.

The Product ID is not editable after you save the in-app purchase. After you use a Product ID for one product, it can’t be used again, even if the product is deleted.

Review Notes

Additional information about the in-app purchase that might help Apple review the submission, such as test user accounts and passwords. Review notes should not exceed 4000 characters.

Promotional Image

A promotional image is required if you want to promote your in-app purchase on your App Store product page. This image will represent your in-app purchase in all territories where your app is available for devices running iOS 11 or later. You can submit up to 20 in-app purchases with a promotional image for review at a time. Your promotional image must meet the following requirements:

  • JPG or PNG.

  • Dimensions of 1024 x 1024 pixels.

  • 72 dpi, RGB, flattened and no rounded corners.

Show to all App Store users, even those who don’t have the app installed

An indication that you would like all customers to see your promoted in-app purchases, which is based on the user device information. By default, this is selected. If you deselect the checkbox, but haven’t implemented the SKProductStorePromotionController API, your in-app purchase will not be visible on the App Store. See Promote in-app purchases to relevant customers only. Note that a customer needs to have opened your app on their device at least once to see your order and visibility settings inside your app.

App Review Screenshot

A screenshot of the in-app purchase that represents the item being sold. For example, if it's a book, you can submit a screenshot of the book image. Or you can submit a screenshot of the purchase page. This screenshot is used for Apple’s review only and is not displayed on the App Store.

Screenshots requirements are outlined below:

  • iOS requires at least 640 x 920 pixels.

  • tvOS requires 1920 x1080 pixels.

  • macOS requires 1280 x 800 pixels.

After you upload an app review image, you can replace it, but you can’t remove it. You can’t update the screenshot while your in-app purchase is in review.

Localizable information

Add localizable in-app purchases information used in the product display. You must include these properties for at least one language. For a list of languages, see App Store localizations.

Changes to the localized information require review. The existing text displays on the store until the new text is approved. The change has its own status separate from the overall status of the in-app purchase. Before your changes are reviewed, you can revert the change.

Property

Description

Display Name

The name of the in-app purchase that is displayed to customers. The display name must be at least two characters and no more than 30 characters.

Description

A description of the in-app purchase that potentially displays to users. If you make your in-app purchase available for promotion, this displays under your in-app purchase name on the App Store. The description must be no more than 45 characters.

Auto-renewable subscription information

Property

Description

Subscription Groups

A set of in-app purchase subscriptions that you can create to provide users with a range of content offerings, service levels, or durations.

Subscriptions within a subscription group are mutually exclusive, meaning that users are only able to subscribe to one option within a group at a time. If you want users to be able to purchase more than one subscription at a time, you can put these in-app purchases in different subscription groups.

Subscription Levels

You can assign every in-app purchase within a subscription group to a subscription level. Your subscription levels should be listed starting with the one that offers the highest level of service. You can add more than one subscription to each level if the service provided is determined to be equal. Customers can move between subscription levels, with upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades. If a subscriber is paying a preserved price, and then upgrades, downgrades, or crossgrades, they will pay the current price for the subscription, not the preserved price.

Upgrade. When a customer switches from a subscription in a lower level to a subscription in a higher level. The customer’s prorated amount from the prior in-app purchase is refunded to the original payment method. The new in-app purchase is charged and goes into effect immediately at the full price, which changes the customer’s renewal date to the upgrade date.

Downgrade. When a customer switches from a subscription in a higher level to a subscription in a lower level. Customers will be billed the new rate on their next renewal date.

Crossgrade. When a customer switches between subscriptions within the same level. If the in-app purchases are of the same duration, The customer’s prorated amount from the prior in-app purchase is refunded to the original payment method. The new in-app purchase is charged and goes into effect immediately at the full price, which changes the customer’s renewal date to the upgrade date. If the in-app purchase are of different durations, the crossgrade goes into effect on the customer’s next renewal date.

Subscription Group Reference Name

An internal name you choose for your subscription group. The subscription group reference name will only appear on App Store Connect and in Sales and Trends reports. It won’t appear on the App Store.

Subscription Group Display Name

A customer-facing name you choose for your subscription group. This is the subscription group display name as it will appear to users for this localization.

App Name Display Options

An option that lets you choose between using your app’s name or providing a custom name to display above the Subscription Group Display Name on a customer’s Manage Subscriptions page on their device.

Duration

The length of time between auto-renewals. Each auto-renewable subscription must have one duration. The duration can be 1 week, 1 month, 2 months, 3 months, 6 months, or 1 year. The duration can’t be changed after you submit your in-app purchase for review.

Auto-renewable subscriptions renew on the same day as the calendar date of the original purchase, rather than the number of days in a month. If a customer begins a one month free trial on January 7th, the trial ends on February 7th. If a one month duration begins on a date that does not occur in the following month, the trial will end on the last day of the final month, but will revert back to the original date once it’s available. For example, if a customer subscribes on January 30, the next renewal date will be February 28 (or February 29 in a leap year), and then March 30.

Marketing Incentive Duration

The length of an auto-renewable subscription extension if customers choose to opt-in to share contact information. This property is only available to Magazines & Newspapers developers who have implemented Newsstand Kit.

Users’ contact information is available in Sales and Trends of App Store Connect.

The opt-in incentive is not available for macOS.

Pricing and availability

Pricing and availability properties describe when the in-app purchase is available and at what price.

Property

Description

Cleared for Sale

An indication of whether you want this in-app purchase to be available.

In-app purchases are available worldwide and aren’t limited by territory.

Price

The price you choose for the in-app purchase, which determines both the customer price and your proceeds. Click All Prices and Currencies from Pricing to view the to see price values in each currency.

Start Date

The date when the price becomes available.

End Date

The date that a price is no longer in effect. The price is the last tier scheduled if this value is No end Date.

These properties describe pricing and availability options for auto-renewable subscriptions.

Property

Description

Subscription Prices

Pricing for your auto-renewable subscriptions. Auto-renewable subscriptions can be priced by territory, with up to 200 price tier options in each available currency. You have the option to preserve the current price for existing subscribers if you increase the price. Promotional and introductory price points are also available.

Introductory Offers

A discounted introductory price you can set for your auto-renewable subscriptions with a specified duration and type (pay as you go, pay up front, free) for new customers. Introductory offers can be used to acquire new customers. Keep in mind that:

  • Customers are eligible for one introductory offer per subscription group

  • You can have one current and one future introductory offer set up per territory

  • You can manage territory availability and start and end dates in App Store Connect

  • Introductory offers display on your App Store product page if you've promoted your in-app purchase

  • Introductory offers are available to customers running iOS 10, tvOS 10, and macOS 10.12.6 and later

Promotional Offers

A discounted price you can set for your auto-renewable subscriptions for a specific duration and type (pay as you go, pay up front, free) for existing and previously subscribed customers. Offers can be used to help win back subscribers who have canceled their subscriptions or promote an upgrade to a higher-ranked subscription at a special price. Keep in mind that:

  • You determine when to present the offers through StoreKit APIs

  • Customers that have completed an introductory offer are still eligible to get a promotional offer

  • You must generate a subscription key in Users and Access to validate your offers

  • You can have up to 10 active offers per subscription

  • Offers don't display on your App Store product page

  • Customers running iOS 12.2, macOS 10.14.4, and tvOS 12.2 can accept these offers.

Promotional Offer Reference Name

An internal name for a promotional offer that you can reference.

Promotional Offer Product Code

A code that you create. This code is case sensitive and must be unique for each offer you create. You won't be able to re-use an offer code, even if it's been deleted.

Duration (for promotional and introductory offers)

The length of time between auto-renewals that you select for your promotional or introductory offers. The offer durations available to you depend on the standard duration of your subscription.

Pay As You Go

If you select Pay as you go, customers pay a discounted price for each billing period for a selected duration (for example, $1.99 per month for 3 months for a subscription with a standard price of $9.99).

The duration can be:

  • 1 Week subscription, 1 to 12 Weeks

  • 1 Month subscription, 1 to 12 Months

  • 2 Month subscription, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 and 12 Months

  • 3 Month subscription, 3, 6, 9 and 12 Months

  • 6 Month subscription, 6 and 12 Months

  • 1 Year subscription, 1 Year

Pay Up Front

If you select Pay up front, customers pay a one-time discounted price for a selected duration (for example, $1.99 for 2 months for a subscription with a standard price of $9.99).

The duration can be: 1 Month, 2 Months, 3 Months, 6 Months, 1 Year

Free

If you select Free, customers access the subscription for free for a selected duration. The duration can be 3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, 1 month, 2 months, 3 months, 6 months, or 1 year. A one month trial can vary between 28 days and 31 days

In-app purchase statuses

The in-app purchase status indicates whether your in-app purchase is available or if it needs your attention.

In-app purchase products have statuses such as “Ready to Submit” or “Approved” or a status indicator. The status tells you immediately whether your product needs attention.

  • A red status indicator () means that you need to perform some action before a product can be made available.

  • A yellow status indicator () means that some process is ongoing, controlled either by you or by Apple.

  • A green status indicator () means that the in-app purchase is available.

Status

Description

Missing Metadata

Your in-app purchase has been created, but you have not yet uploaded a screenshot or completed your metadata.

Ready to Submit

You uploaded all the metadata needed, but you have not yet sent it to Apple for review.

Waiting for Upload

Your in-app purchase content has not been uploaded yet. This status only applies to non-consumable products that are set to be hosted by Apple.

Processing Content

Your in-app purchase product content delivery is processing.

Pending Binary Approval

The app this in-app purchase is associated with is currently in review.

Waiting for Review

You have submitted your in-app purchase to be reviewed by Apple. You can make edits to the product while it is in this status.

In Review

Your in-app purchase product is currently being reviewed by Apple. Only edits to the product’s reference name, pricing, and availability can be made when it has this status.

Approved

Apple has approved your in-app purchase to go live on the App Store with its associated app.

For this status to appear, the in-app purchase must be Set availability for in-app purchases. If it is not cleared for sale, the status appears as Developer Removed from Sale.

If the product is being released with an app version, the product won’t have an Approved status until the app is approved.

Rejected

Apple has rejected your in-app purchase product during the review process. If you have not already been contacted by Apple with more information about your rejection, you can inquire through Contact Us.

You cannot resubmit a rejected in-app purchase and will need to submit a new one.

Your in-app purchase product status changes to Developer Action Needed if there is a detail in the in-app purchase that requires a change by you.

Developer Action Needed

The in-app purchase product changes that you submitted have been rejected. You are required to take action to edit the detail information or cancel the request to change the detail information before this in-app purchase can be reviewed again.

Developer Removed from Sale

You removed the in-app purchase from sale. When you remove an in-app purchase product from sale, customers that already purchased the product can't restore it to their device or renew the in-app purchase if it's an auto-renewable subscription.

If you clear the product for sale, the status changes to Approved.

Removed from Sale

Appears when Apple removes an in-app purchase product from sale.

Game Center information

Leaderboards

Leaderboard metadata identifies each leaderboard in App Store Connect, describe its scores, and collects language-specific text used in leaderboard display. App Store Connect tracks metadata for the type of leaderboard and displays a status indicating whether the leaderboard has been approved and made live with the app.

Set these properties in the Leaderboard section of the Game Center page for an app, as described in Configure leaderboards.

Leaderboard properties

The main leaderboard properties identify each leaderboard in App Store Connect. These properties describe how the scores are organized and formatted.

Properties

Description

Leaderboard Reference Name

An internal name that you must provide for each leaderboard. This is the name that you use if you search for your leaderboard in App Store Connect.

Leaderboard ID

An alphanumeric identifier you choose for your leaderboard. This ID is limited to 100 characters (assumes single-byte characters). Note that the leaderboard ID is equivalent to the “category” in GameKit API. Your leaderboard ID is a permanent setting and therefore can’t be edited at a later date.

Score Format Type

The type of format in which you want scores for this app to be expressed in your leaderboard—for example, integer, elapsed time, or money.

Score Submission Type

The score from players to display in the leaderboard: Best Score or Most Recent Score.

Sort Order

The order of the score. Choose between “Low to High” and “High to Low.” Choose “Low to High” if you want lowest scores displayed first. Choose “High to Low” if you want highest scores displayed first.

Score Range

The score range using 64-bit signed integers. The values must be between the long min (-2^63) and long max (2^63 - 1). Any scores outside of this range are deleted. Score range values are optional, but if they’re added, both values must be set and they must not be equal. When first adding a score range, or when changing it in the future to a smaller range that will restrict data, all data outside of the range is lost and can’t be recovered.

Start Date and Time1

The date and time in which scores begin posting to your leaderboard.

Duration1

The length of time scores on this leaderboard are posted for.

Resets Every1

How often scores on this leaderboard are reset.

1This property is only available for recurring leaderboards.

Leaderboard language properties

Leaderboard language properties collect language-specific text used in a leaderboard’s display. You must include these properties for at least one language.

Property

Description

Language

The language in which your leaderboard appears. There must be at least one language defined.

Name

The display name of the leaderboard in the specified language.

Score Format

This format determines how your scores are displayed on your leaderboard for the specified language. For example, if your app is scored with money, you may want to specify different types of money based on the language you select. The values in this menu reflect the Score Format Type for the leaderboard.

Score Format Suffix (Singular)

This suffix is added to the end of scores displayed in the singular form. This suffix is optional but is useful for clarifying the type of score stored in the leaderboard. Examples include “point,” “coin,” and “hit.”

Score Format Suffix (Plural)

This suffix is added to the end of scores displayed in the plural form. This suffix is optional but is useful for clarifying the type of score stored in the leaderboard. Examples include “points,” “coins,” and “hits.”

Image

A localized image that represents the leaderboard. The image must be a .jpeg, .jpg, .tif, .tiff, or .png file that’s 512 x 512 or 1024 x 1024 pixels, at least 72 dpi, and in the RGB color space. This property is optional.

Leaderboard types

App Store Connect tracks different data for each type of leaderboard. The leaderboard type determines which scores are included in a leaderboard.

Type

Description

Classic

A leaderboard where score data will never reset unless the leaderboard is deleted.

Recurring

A recurring leaderboard will continually reset based on your preferences.

Combined

A leaderboard that combines and ranks together the players’ scores from multiple single leaderboards.

Attached

A single leaderboard that’s combined with other leaderboards—the attached child of a combined leaderboard.

Leaderboard statuses

Leaderboard statuses indicate whether the leaderboard has been approved and made live with the app.

Status

Description

In Review

The leaderboard was submitted to Apple for review.

Live

The leaderboard was approved with the app.

Not Live

The leaderboard has not been approved with a version of the app. Leaderboards will also have this status if they were previously Live for an app, moved to a group, and haven’t been approved with the group yet.

Achievements

Achievement metadata identifies each achievement and its behavior in App Store Connect. You can input the language-specific text used in the achievement display and track the status to determine if the achievement has been approved and made live with the app.

Set these properties in the Achievements section of the Game Center page for an app, as described in Configure achievements.

Achievement properties

The main achievement properties in App Store Connect identify each achievement and how they behave.

Properties

Description

Achievement Reference Name

An internal name that you must provide for each achievement. This is the name you use if you search for the achievement within App Store Connect.

Achievement ID

A chosen alphanumeric identifier for your achievement. This ID is limited to 100 characters (assumes single-byte characters). Your Achievement ID is a permanent setting and therefore can’t be edited at a later date.

Point Value

The points that your achievement is worth. There is a maximum of 100 points per achievement and a maximum of 1000 points total for all achievements.

Hidden

Achievements marked as Hidden remain hidden in Game Center until a player has achieved them.

Achievable More Than Once

An indication of whether the player can earn the achievement multiple times.

Achievement language properties

Achievement language properties collect language-specific text used in achievement display. You must include these properties for at least one language.

Property

Description

Language

The language in which you’d like this achievement to appear. There must be at least one language defined.

Title

The localized title of this achievement as you’d like it to appear in Game Center.

Pre-earned Description

The description of your achievement as it appears to Game Center users before they earn it.

Earned Description

The description of your achievement as it appears to Game Center users after they earn it.

Image

A localized image that represents the achievement. The image must be a .jpeg, .jpg, .tif, .tiff, or .png file that’s 512 x 512 or 1024 x 1024 pixels, at least 72 dpi, and in the RGB color space. This property is required.

Achievement statuses

Achievement statuses indicate whether the achievement has been approved and made live with the app.

Property

Description

In Review

The achievement was submitted to Apple for review.

Live

The achievement was approved with the app.

Not Live

The achievement has not been approved with a version of the app. Achievements will also have this status if they were previously Live for an app, moved to a group, and haven’t been approved with the group yet.

Group properties

Group properties identify the apps, leaderboards, and achievements that are included in a group. Set these properties on the Game Center page for the app, as described in Create a group.

Property

Description

Reference Name

An internal name that you must provide for each group. This is the name you see in App Store Connect.

Apps in this Group

The apps attached to this group.

Group Leaderboard

The shared leaderboards for this group.

Group Achievements

The shared achievements for this group.

Default Leaderboard

The leaderboard that’s displayed by default in your app.

App version properties

App version properties allow App Store Connect to track which Game Center properties apply to a specific app version.

Property

Description

Leaderboards

A leaderboard displays the top scores of all Game Center users who play your app. You can’t remove a leaderboard that’s in use in Game Center for any version of your app. Each app can have a maximum of 100 leaderboards. Leaderboards are optional.

Achievements

An achievement is a distinction that a player earns for reaching a milestone or performing an action, defined by your app. You can’t delete an achievement that’s in use in Game Center for any version of your app. Achievements are optional.

Multiplayer Compatibility

Multiplayer Compatibility allows you to describe which versions of your game can see each other during the matchmaking process. Each compatible group of devices and versions of your game are matched as separate groups.

App analytics metrics and dimensions

Metrics

Term

Definition

Metric Type

Availability

Active Devices

The number of devices with at least one session during the selected period. Based on devices running iOS 8 or tvOS 9, or later. Totals are based on app users who agree to share their data with you.

Usage

iOS and tvOS apps

Active in Last 30 Days

The number of active devices with at least one session during the previous 30 days. Totals are based on app users who agree to share their data with you.

Usage

iOS and tvOS apps

App Units

The number of first-time purchases of your app made on the App Store on devices running macOS 10.14.1, iOS 8 or tvOS 9, or later. An app unit is counted when a customer taps the ‘Buy’ or ‘Get’ button for the first-time.

App updates, downloads from the same Apple ID onto other devices, and redownloads to the same device are not counted. Family Sharing downloads are included for free apps, but not for paid apps.

Sales

iOS apps, tvOS, and macOS apps

Crashes

The total number of crashes on devices running iOS 8 or tvOS 9, or later.

Get detailed crash logs and crash reports in Xcode, such as unique totals for each type of crash and how many users experienced it. For more information, View Crash Reports in Xcode Help.

Usage

iOS and tvOS apps

Deletions

The number of times your app was deleted on devices running iOS 12.3 or tvOS 9 or later by users who agree to share their data with you. This data includes deletions of the app from the Home Screen and deletions of the app through Manage Storage. Data from resetting or erasing a device's content and settings is not included.

Usage

iOS and tvOS apps

Impressions

The number of times your app was viewed on the Today, Games, Apps, and Search tabs of the App Store. Includes Product Page Views.

App Store

iOS, tvOS, and macOS apps

In-App Purchases

The number of in-app purchases on devices running macOS 10.14.1, iOS 8 or tvOS 9, or later.

Introductory price subscriptions and subscription renewals are included in this metric. Restored in-app purchases, whether on the same or different device, are not counted.

Sales

iOS apps, macOS apps

Installations

The total number of times your app has been installed on devices with iOS 8 or tvOS 9, or later. Redownloads on the same device, downloads to multiple devices sharing the same Apple ID, and Family Sharing installations are included. Totals are based on app users who agree to share their data with you.

Usage

iOS and tvOS apps

Paying Users

The number of unique users, based on Apple ID, that paid for an app or an In-App Purchase.

Sales

iOS, tvOS, and macOS apps

Product Page Views

The number of times your App Store product page was viewed on devices running macOS 10.14.1, iOS 8 or tvOS 9, or later.

Includes when apps use StoreKit to load your product page.

App Store

iOS, tvOS, and macOS apps

Sales

The total amount billed to customers for purchasing apps, app bundles, and In-App Purchases. Taxes are only included in the sales if those taxes were included in the App Store price. Note that sales totals are not the same as your proceeds. You can see your payments in Payments and Financial Reports on App Store Connect if you have the Admin or Finance roles.

Sales

iOS, tvOS, and macOS apps

Sessions

The number of times the app has been used for at least two seconds. If the app is in the background and is later used again, that counts as another session. Totals are based on app users who agree to share their data with you.

Usage

iOS and tvOS apps

Dimensions

Term

Definition

App Purchase Date

The date an app was first purchased by a customer, based on Apple ID. Redownloads on the same device and downloads to other devices by the same customer are not included. Family Sharing downloads of free apps are included, but Family Sharing downloads of paid apps are not counted.

App Version

The version of your app displayed on the App Store.

Campaigns

Custom App Store links you can use in your marketing material, websites, or advertising. Campaign links allow you to see your app sales, usage, and monetization for specific campaigns. Campaigns only appear in App Analytics after five or more unique Apple IDs have installed the app associated with that campaign.

Device

  • iPhone

  • iPad

  • Apple TV

  • iPod

  • Desktop

App Units, In-App Purchases, and Sales are based on the platform on which the app is downloaded. Active in Last 30 Days, Product Page Views, Retention, and Sessions are based on the platform on which the app is used.

Platform Version

The OS version on which the app was downloaded or used. App Units, In-App Purchases, and Sales are based on the version on which the app is downloaded. Active in Last 30 Days, Product Page Views, Retention, and Sessions are based on the iOS version on which the app is used.

Purchasable Item

The app or in-app purchase, by name or Apple ID.

View or filter by purchasable item to see data for your app or individual in-app purchases.

Region

The App Store region in which purchases were made, based on the customer’s billing address. Regions include:

  • USA and Canada

  • Europe

  • Latin America and The Caribbean

  • Asia Pacific

  • Africa, The Middle East, and India

Source Type

The source from which a customer tapped a link to your App Store product page to view your app or download it for the first time. You can view metrics based on the source from which users are finding your app. Source types include:

  • App Store Browse

  • App Store Search

  • App Referrers

  • Web Referrers

Territory

The App Store as determined by the customer’s billing address.

App Performance Rates and Ratios

Term

Definition

Availability

Retention Rate

Retention measures the usage of your app over time.

Daily Retention = (Active Devices on day X of the retention period) / (Active Devices during the entire retention period)

For example, if your app was first downloaded by customers on 100 devices on May 1st, and seven days later (on May 8th) 20 devices are still active with at least one session, then retention on May 8th is 20% (or 20 active devices out of 100).

iOS and tvOS apps

Conversion Rate

App Units / Unique Device Impressions. For example, if your app was viewed on 100 devices on the Today, Games, Apps, and Search tabs of the App Store and downloaded 50 times, your conversion rate for the selected period is 50%

iOS, tvOS, and macOS apps

Sales Per Paying User

Your app’s total sales (including associated in-app purchases) / your app’s total number of paying users for the selected period. For example, if your app’s total sales for the period is $100, and your app has 100 paying users, your sales per paying user is $1

iOS, tvOS, and macOS apps

Sessions Per Active Device

The number of times your app was opened for at least two seconds / the number of active devices for your app in the selected period. For example, if your app was opened 100 times, and you have 10 active devices for the same period, then your Sessions Per Active Device ratio is 10.

iOS and tvOS apps

Payments and Financial Reports

View payment information

Payment information will display in the corresponding currency of each region where sales occur.

Field Title

Description

Region

This is where the unit sale took place. Hover over a region name to reveal all App Store territories included in that region.

Units Sold

This is the total number of units sold in the corresponding region. Note that this value only includes purchases.

Balance*

This consists of any amounts not paid out from previous months, or amounts returned.

Earned

This displays the gross earnings amount per region for that fiscal period.

Total*

This displays the total earnings per region, including both the previous months and the current months balances.

Taxes and Adjustments

This displays the net of all input taxes, adjustments, or withholding taxes for that region. Hover over the amount to see a breakdown of all taxes and adjustments included in the net total presented.

  • Withholding Tax. Withholding tax represents amounts withheld by Apple and remitted to taxing authorities in accordance with government requirements specific to the territory. Withholding taxes can vary based on your location, the completion of any optional tax forms and the tax treaties entered into by your country or region. See Tax forms overview for more information.

  • Input Taxes. Input taxes are amounts added to your payment to meet your tax requirements in certain territories. For example, Goods and Services Tax (GST) generally applies if you are either based in Australia or based outside of Australia but registered for GST.

Total Owed

This is the sum of Earned and Taxes and Adjustments and displays the estimated amount owed to you in the currency of each reported region and revenue type. If there is a carry forward balance, this is the sum of Total, and Taxes and Adjustments.

Exchange Rate

This is the exchange rate at the time of payment, used to calculate total proceeds in your bank account currency. The exchange rate is only displayed if the payment for the report month selected has been disbursed.

Per Schedule 2 to your Developer Agreement, our bank converts payment amounts into the currency of your bank account. The exchange rate is established by our bank and, due to Apple’s volume, is generally a more favorable rate than used by your local bank. The rates are typically the spot rate on the date of payment and no more than three business days prior to the date the proceeds are received into your account.

Proceeds or Total Estimated Proceeds

The name of this column will vary depending on whether or not a payment has been executed for the report month selected.

  • Total Estimated Proceeds. This is displayed if payment to you has not yet been made. This is the estimated amount of proceeds that will be dispersed in your bank account currency.

    If iTunes does not have an exchange rate for a particular currency, you will see the amount converted to USD by default. This is for display purposes only, and payment will be made in your chosen bank account currency.

  • Proceeds. This is displayed if payment has been transferred to your bank account. This is the actual amount of proceeds paid for the corresponding region and report period. Values are displayed in your bank account currency.

Payment Date

The payment date displayed in Payments and Financial Reports is the date the payment leaves Apple’s bank.

* Balance and Total columns will only be displayed if there is a running balance from the previous payment period.

Financial report fields

All Countries or Regions (Single File, Multiple File) report fields:

Report Field

Values

Notes

Start Date

MM/DD/YYYY

This is the period start date, based on Apple’s fiscal calendar.

End Date

MM/DD/YYYY

This is the period end date, also based on Apple’s fiscal calendar.

UPC

Up to 20 characters

This field is not applicable to developers. This will display as blank.

ISRC / ISBN

Up to 20 characters

For apps, this is your SKU. For details, see App information. For in app purchases, this is the product ID. See In-app purchase information for details.

Vendor Identifier

Up to 20 characters

This is the “SKU” that was provided for an app, or a “Product ID” provided for an in-app purchase.

Quantity

Number with no decimal places (positive or negative)

Aggregated number of units sold.

Partner Share

Number with two decimal places (always positive)

The proceeds you receive per unit. This is the Customer Price minus applicable taxes and Apple’s commission, per Schedule 2 of your Paid Applications agreement.

Extended Partner Share

Number with two decimal places (positive or negative)

Quantity multiplied by Partner Share.

Partner Share Currency

Three characters

Three-character ISO code for the currency of the amounts earned.

Sale or Return

“S” or “R”

S indicates a Sale, R indicates a Return

Apple Identifier

Up to 18 characters

Apple ID, a unique identifier automatically generated for your app when you add the app to your account. You can view this property in the App Information section in App Store Connect. This identifier is also used in the URL for the App Store on desktop computers. You can’t edit this property.

Note: This identifier is not the same as your Apple ID that you use to sign in to App Store Connect and your developer account.

Artist / Show / Developer / Author

Up to 1000 characters

Your legal entity name.

Title

Up to 5000 characters

The name you entered for your app as described in App information.

Label / Studio / Network /

Developer / Publisher

Up to 1000 characters

This field is not applicable to developers. This will display as blank.

Grid

Up to 30 characters

This field is not applicable to developers. This will display as blank.

Product Type Identifier

Up to five characters

The type of product purchased. See Product Type Identifiers for more information.

ISAN / Other Identifier

Up to 50 characters

This field is not applicable to developers. This will display as blank.

Country of Sale

Two characters

Two-character ISO code (such as US for the United States) that indicates the country or region for the App Store where the purchase occurred. This is based on the customer Apple ID country or region.

Pre-order Flag

“P” or null

Promo Code

Up to 10 characters

If the transaction was part of a promotion, a gift, or was downloaded through the Volume Purchase Program for Education, this field will contain a value. This field is empty for all non-promotional items. For more information, see Promotional Codes.

Customer Price

Number with two decimal places (positive or negative)

The price per unit billed to the customer, which you set for your app or in-app purchase in App Store Connect. *Customer price is inclusive of any applicable taxes we collect and remit per Schedule 2 of the Paid Applications agreement.

Customer Currency

Three characters

Three-character ISO code for the currency type paid by the customer. For example, USD for United States Dollar.

An asterisk (*) indicates you provided this information to us. Sometimes we may change this information for consistency.

All Countries or Regions (Detailed) report fields:

Field Name

Date Type

Notes

Vendor Name

String

Provided by you when signing your Paid Applications Agreement

Start Date

MM/DD/YYYY

This is the period start date, based on Apple’s fiscal calendar.

End Date

MM/DD/YYYY

This is the period end date, also based on Apple’s fiscal calendar.

Transaction Date

MM/DD/YYYY

Date the customer purchased the app or in-app purchase. The transaction date is only populated if it occurred within 30 days of the settlement date. Otherwise the field is blank.

Settlement Date

MM/DD/YYYY

Date when the customer's payment was processed and collected and an invoice was issued.

Apple Identifier

Int

An app Apple ID is a unique identifier automatically generated for your app when you add a new app record in My Apps and cannot be edited. You can view this identifier in the App Information section of the app record. It is also used in your app's App Store link on desktop computers.

SKU

String

“SKU” that was provided for an app, or the “Product ID” that was provided for an in-app purchase.

Title

String

Name you entered for your app in App information.

Developer Name

String

Your legal entity name.

Product Type Identifier

String

Type of product purchased. See Product Type Identifiers.

Country of Sale

String

Two-character ISO code (such as US for the United States) that indicates the country or region of the App Store where the purchase occurred. This is based on the customer's Apple ID country or region.

Quantity

Int

Aggregate number of units sold.

Partner Share

Decimal

Proceeds you receive per unit. This is the Customer Price minus applicable taxes and Apple’s commission, per Schedule 2 of the Paid Applications Agreement.

Extended Partner Share

Decimal

Quantity multiplied by Partner Share.

Partner Share Currency

String

Three-character ISO code for the currency of the amounts earned.

Customer Price

Decimal

Price per unit billed to the customer, which you set for your app or in-app purchase in App Store Connect. This includes any applicable taxes we collect and remit per Schedule 2 of the Paid Applications Agreement.

Customer Currency

String

Three-character ISO code for the currency type paid by the customer. For example, USD for United States Dollar.

Sale or Return

String

S indicates a Sale. R indicates a Return.

Promo Code

String

If the transaction was part of a promotion, a gift, or was downloaded through the Volume Purchase Program for Education, this field will contain a value. This field is empty for all non-promotional items. For more information, see Promotional Codes.

Order Type

String

Indicates the type of transaction for introductory offers: Pay Up Front or Pay As You Go. Shows the offer ID for subscription offers and the order ID for promotional offers. Indicates whether a purchase originated from a pre-order.

Region

String

Shows a two-character state or province code for transactions in the United States and Canada.

Apple legal entities

This table shows the Apple Legal Entity associated with each currency.

Currency

Currency Name

Apple Legal Entity Making Payment

AED

United Arb Emirates Dirham

Apple Distribution International

AUD

Australian Dollar

Apple Pty Ltd.

BGN

Bulgarian Lev

Apple Distribution International

BRL

Brazilian Real

Apple Services LATAM LLC

CAD

Canadian Dollar

Apple Canada, Inc.

CHF

Swiss Franc

Apple Distribution International

CLP

Chilean Peso

Apple Services LATAM LLC

CNY

Chinese Yuan

Apple Distribution International

COP

Colombian Peso

Apple Services LATAM LLC

CZK

Czech Koruna

Apple Distribution International

DKK

Danish Krone

Apple Distribution International

EUR

Euro

Apple Distribution International

EGP

Egyptian Pound

Apple Distribution International

GBP

Pound Sterling

Apple Distribution International

HKD

Hong Kong Dollar

Apple Distribution International

HUF

Hungarian Forint

Apple Distribution International

HRK

Croatian Kuna

Apple Distribution International

IDR

Indonesian Rupiah

Apple Distribution International

ILS

Israeli New Shekel

Apple Distribution International

INR

Indian Rupee

Apple Distribution International

JPY

Japanese Yen

iTunes KK

KRW

Korean Won

Apple Distribution International

KZT

Kazakhstani Tenge

Apple Distribution International

MXN

Mexican Peso

Apple Services LATAM LLC

MYR

Malaysian Ringgit

Apple Distribution International

NGN

Nigerian Naira

Apple Distribution International

NOK

Norwegian Krone

Apple Distribution International

NZD

New Zealand Dollar

Apple Pty Ltd.

PEN

Peruvian Sol

Apple Services LATAM LLC

RUB

Pakistani Rupee

Apple Distribution International

PHP

Philippine Peso

Apple Distribution International

PLN

Polish Zloty

Apple Distribution International

PKR

Pakistani Rupee

Apple Distribution International

QAR

Qatari Riyal

Apple Distribution International

RON

Romanian leu

Apple Distribution International

SAR

Saudi Riyal

Apple Distribution International

SEK

Swedish Krona

Apple Distribution International

SGD

Singapore Dollar

Apple Distribution International

THB

Thai Baht

Apple Distribution International

TRY

Turkish Lira

Apple Distribution International

TWD

New Taiwan Dollar

Apple Distribution International

TZS

Tanzanian Shilling

Apple Distribution International

USD

United States Dollar

Apple Inc.

USD RoW

United States Dollar

Apple Distribution International

USD LatAm

United States Dollar

Apple Services LATAM LLC

VND

Vietnamese Dong

Apple Distribution International

ZAR

South African Rand

Apple Distribution International

Currency codes

Currency will be displayed in reports as a 3 character currency code.

Currency Code

Currency Name

AED

United Arab Emirates Dirham

AUD

Australian Dollar

BGN

Bulgarian Lev

BRL

Brazilian Real

CAD

Canadian Dollar

CHF

Swiss Franc

CLP

Chilean Peso

CNY

Chinese Yuan

COP

Colombian Peso

CZK

Czech Koruna

DKK

Danish Krone

EGP

Egyptian Pound

EUR

Euro

GBP

Pound Sterling

HKD

Hong Kong Dollar

HRK

Croatian Kuna

HUF

Hungarian Forint

IDR

Indonesian Rupiah

ILS

Israeli New Shekel

INR

Indian Rupee

JPY

Japanese Yen

KRW

Korean Won

KZT

Kazakhstani Tenge

MXN

Mexican Peso

MYR

Malaysian Ringgit

NGN

Nigerian Naira

NOK

Norwegian Krone

NZD

New Zealand Dollar

PEN

Peruvian Sol

PKR

Pakistani Rupee

PHP

Philippine Peso

PLN

Polish Zloty

QAR

Qatari Riyal

RON

Romanian Leu

RUB

Russian Ruble

SAR

Saudi Riyal

SEK

Swedish Krona

SGD

Singapore Dollar

THB

Thai Baht

TRY

Turkish Lira

TWD

New Taiwan Dollar

TZS

Tanzanian Shilling

USD

United States Dollar

VND

Vietnamese Dong

ZAR

South African Rand

Financial Report Regions and Currencies

Region codes are used for downloading Financial reports using Reporter.

Report Region

Report Currency

Region Code

Countries or Regions

Americas

USD

US

United States, Uruguay, Venezuela, British Virgin Islands

Australia

AUD

AU

Australia

Brazil

BRL

BR

Brazil

Bulgaria

BGN

BG

Bulgaria

Canada

CAD

CA

Canada

Chile

CLP

CL

Chile

China mainland

CNY

CN

China mainland

Columbia

COP

CO

Columbia

Czech Republic

CZK

CZ

Czech Republic

Croatia

HRK

HR

Croatia

Denmark

DKK

DK

Denmark

Egypt

EGP

EG

Egypt

Hong Kong

HKD

HK

Hong Kong

Hungary

HUF

HU

Hungary

India

INR

IN

India

Indonesia

IDR

ID

Indonesia

Israel

ILS

IL

Israel

Japan

JPY

JP

Japan

Kazakhstan

KZT

KZ

Kazakhstan

Republic of Korea

KRW

KR

Republic of Korea

Malaysia

MYR

MY

Malaysia

Mexico

MXN

MX

Mexico

New Zealand

NZD

NZ

New Zealand

Nigeria

NGN

NG

Nigeria

Norway

NOK

NO

Norway

Pakistan

PKR

PK

Pakistan

Peru

PEN

PE

Peru

Philippines

PHP

PH

Philippines

Poland

PLN

PL

Poland

Qatar

QAR

QA

Qatar

Romania

RON

RO

Romania

Russia

RUB

RU

Russia

Saudi Arabia

SAR

SA

Saudi Arabia

Singapore

SGD

SG

Singapore

South Africa

ZAR

ZA

South Africa

Sweden

SEK

SE

Sweden

Switzerland

CHF

CH

Switzerland

Taiwan

TWD

TW

Taiwan

Thailand

THB

TH

Thailand

Turkey

TRY

TR

Turkey

United Arab Emirates

AED

AE

United Arab Emirates

United Kingdom

GBP

GB

United Kingdom

United Republic of Tanzania

TZS

TZ

United Republic of Tanzania

Vietnam

VND

VN

Vietnam

Euro-Zone

EUR

EU

Austria, Belgium, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Kosovo, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Montenegro, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain

Latin America and the Caribbean

USD

LL

Anguilla, Antigua and Barbuda, Argentina, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, Bolivia, British Virgin Islands, Cayman Islands, Chile, Costa Rica, Dominica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Grenada, Guatemala, Guyana, Honduras, Jamaica, Montserrat, Nicaragua, Panama, Paraguay, Saint Lucia, St. Kitts and Nevis, St. Vincent and the Grenadines, Suriname, Trinidad and Tobago, Turks and Caicos, Uruguay, and Venezuela

Rest of World

USD

WW

Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Angola, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Belarus, Benin, Bhutan, Botswana, Brunei Darussalam, Burkina Faso, Cambodia, Cameroon, Cape Verde, Chad, Republic of the Congo, Democratic Republic of the Congo, Cote d'Ivoire, Croatia, Egypt, Fiji, Gabon, Gambia, Georgia, Ghana, Guinea-Bissau, Iceland, Iraq, Jordan, Kazakhstan, Kenya, Republic of Korea, Kuwait, Kyrgyzstan, Laos, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Macau, North Macedonia, Madagascar, Malawi, Malaysia, Maldives, Mali, Mauritania, Mauritius, Micronesia, Moldova, Morocco, Mozambique, Myanmar, Namibia, Nauru, Nepal, Niger, Nigeria, Oman, Pakistan, Palau, Papua New Guinea, Philippines, Qatar, Rwanda, Sao Tome and Principe, Senegal, Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Solomon Islands, Sri Lanka, Swaziland, Tajikistan, United Republic of Tanzania, Tonga, Tunisia, Turkmenistan, Uganda, Ukraine, Uzbekistan, Vanuatu, Vietnam, Yemen, Zambia, Zimbabwe

Consolidated Financial Reports

Multiple

ZZ

All Countries or Regions

Financial Detail Reports

Multiple

Z1

All Countries or Regions

Minimum payment threshold

Before payment can be sent to your bank, your account must meet the minimum payment threshold.

If your bank territory and bank account currency is listed in the table below, you must exceed a minimum payment threshold of $10 USD. All other bank territories and bank account currencies must exceed a minimum payment threshold of $150 USD.

For KR/KRW, the minimum threshold is not $10 USD like the rest of the low value currencies. The minimum threshold will be $50 USD due to requirements both locally and at the bank.

Bank Territory

Bank Account

Bank Territory

Bank Account

AD

Andorra

EUR

IS

Iceland

EUR

AN

Netherlands

EUR

IT

Italy

EUR

AT

Austria

EUR

JP

Japan

JPY

AZ

Azerbaijan

EUR

LI

Liechtenstein

EUR

BE

Belgium

EUR

LT

Lithuania

EUR

BG

Bulgaria

EUR

LU

Luxembourg

EUR

CA

Canada

CAD

MC

Monaco

EUR

CC

Cocos, Keeling Islands

EUR

ME

Montenegro

EUR

CH

Switzerland

CHF

MM

Myanmar

EUR

CH

Switzerland

EUR

MQ

Martinique

EUR

CY

Cyprus, Republic of

EUR

MT

Malta

EUR

CZ

Czech Republic

EUR

MY

Malaysia

MYR

DE

Germany

EUR

NL

Netherlands

EUR

DK

Denmark

EUR

NO

Norway

EUR

EE

Estonia

EUR

PL

Poland

EUR

ES

Spain

EUR

PM

Saint Pierre and Miquelon

EUR

FI

Finland

EUR

PT

Portugal

EUR

FR

France

EUR

RE

Réunion

EUR

GB

United Kingdom

EUR

RO

Romania

EUR

GB

United Kingdom

GBP

SE

Sweden

EUR

GF

French Guiana

EUR

SG

Singapore

SGD

GP

Guadeloupe

EUR

SI

Slovenia

EUR

GR

Greece

EUR

SK

Slovak Republic

EUR

HK

Hong Kong

HKD

SM

San Marino

EUR

HU

Hungary

EUR

US

United States

USD

ID

Indonesia

IDR

VA

The Holy See (Vatican City)

EUR

IE

Ireland

EUR

YT

Mayotte

EUR

IN

India

INR

Sales and Trends

Summary Sales Report

The below table shows columns for Summary Sales Report Version 1_1.

Tip: To better understand the values below, view a sample Summary Sales Report.

Report Field

Report Data Type

Values

Notes

Provider

CHAR(5) - APPLE

Up to 5 Characters

The service provider in your reports (typically Apple).

Provider Country

CHAR(2) - US

Up to 2 Characters

The service provider country code (typically U.S.).

SKU

VARCHAR(100)

Up to 100 Characters

A product identifier provided by you during app setup.

Developer

VARCHAR(4000)

Up to 4000 Characters

Provided by you during the initial account setup.

Name

VARCHAR(600)

Up to 600 Characters

Provided by you during app setup.

Version

VARCHAR(100)

Up to 100 Characters

Provided by you during app setup.

Product Type Identifier

VARCHAR(20)

Up to 20 Characters

Defines the type of transaction (for example, initial download, update, and so on). For more information, see Product Type Identifiers.

Units

DECIMAL(18,2)

Up to 18 Characters

The aggregated number of units. Negative values indicate refunds, or CMB credits for previously purchased apps when CMB column shows ‘CMB-C’.

Developer Proceeds (per item)

DECIMAL(18,2)

Up to 18 Characters

The amount you receive per unit. This is the Customer Price minus applicable taxes and Apple’s commission, per Schedule 2 of your Paid Applications agreement.

Begin Date

Date

Date in MM/DD/YYYY

Start date of report.

End Date

Date

Date in MM/DD/YYYY

End date of report.

Customer Currency

CHAR(3)

Up to 3 Characters

Three-character ISO code indicating the customer’s currency. For more information, see Currency codes.

Country Code

CHAR(2)

Up to 2 Characters

Two-character ISO country code indicating the App Store territory for the purchase. For more information, see Financial Report Regions and Currencies.

Currency of Proceeds

CHAR(3)

Up to 3 Characters

The currency in which your proceeds are earned. For more information, see Currency codes.

Apple Identifier

DECIMAL(18,0)

Up to 18 Characters

The Apple ID for your app.

Customer Price

DECIMAL(18,2)

Up to 18 Characters

The price per unit billed to the customer, which you set for your app or in-app purchase in App Store Connect. *Customer price is inclusive of any applicable taxes we collect and remit per Schedule 2 of the Paid Applications agreement. Negative values indicate refunds, or CMB credits for previously purchased apps when CMB column shows ‘CMB-C’.

Promo Code

VARCHAR(10)

Up to 10 Characters

If the transaction was part of a promotion, this field will contain a value. This field is empty for all non-promotional items. For more information, see Promotional Codes.

Parent Identifier

VARCHAR(100)

Up to 100 Characters

In-App Purchases will show the SKU of the associated app.

Subscription

VARCHAR(10)

Up to 10 Characters

Defines whether an auto-renewable subscription is new or a renewal.

Period

VARCHAR(30)

Up to 30 Characters

Defines the duration of an auto-renewable subscription purchase. Values include: 7 days, 1 month, 2 months, 3 months, 6 months, and 1 year.

Category

VARCHAR(50)

Up to 50 Characters

Indicates the category of the app, such as Games.

CMB

VARCHAR(5)

Up to 5 Characters

If the transaction involves a “completed” app bundle, this field will contain a value of “CMB.” App credits for completed bundles will show a value of “CMB-C.” Otherwise this field is blank.

Supported Platforms

VARCHAR(12)

Up to 12 Characters

List of platforms that your app supports: iOS, tvOS, iOS and tvOS, or macOS.

Device

VARCHAR(10)

Up to 10 Characters

Type of device used for purchase or redownload: iPhone, iPad, Apple TV, iPod touch, or Desktop.

Preserved Pricing

VARCHAR(3)

Up to 3 Characters

For Renew events, if the price is preserved then this field equals “Yes”. Otherwise it is blank.

Proceeds Reason

VARCHAR(20)

Up to 20 Characters

If a subscription has been active for more than a year then you receive 85% of the customer price, minus applicable taxes, and this field equals “Rate After One Year." Otherwise, you receive 70% and the field is blank.

Client

VARCHAR(30)

Up to 30 Characters

Indicates where the purchase happened: App Store for iMessage, News, or blank.

Order Type

VARCHAR(30)

Up to 30 Characters

For introductory offers or subscription offers, indicates what type of transaction this line item is: Pay Up Front or Pay As You Go. For pre-orders, indicates whether a purchase originated from a Pre-Order. For promotional offers, the field will populate the Order ID.

Sales Events Report

Tip: To better understand the values below, view a sample report.

Report Field

Report Data Type

Description

Date

Date

The date the sales event occurred.

Name

String

Provided by you during app setup.

Event

String

The sales event that occurred.

Metric

String

Type of metric: Units, Sales, or Proceeds.

Territory

String

The territory of the sales event that occurred. Values include the two-character ISO country code, or Worldwide.

Device

String

The device for which the sales event occurred: Values include iPhone, iPad, Apple TV, iPod touch, or Desktop.

Time Frame

String

The time frame of the sales event. For example, All Time.

Apple Identifier

BigInt

The Apple ID for your app or in-app purchase.

Pre-Order Report

Tip: To better understand the values below, view a sample report.

Report Field

Report Data Type

Values

Notes

Provider

CHAR(5) - APPLE

Up to 5 Characters

Service provider in your reports (typically Apple).

Provider Country

CHAR(2) - US

Up to 2 Characters

Service provider country code (typically U.S.).

SKU

VARCHAR(100)

Up to 100 Characters

Product identifier provided by you during app setup.

Developer

VARCHAR(4000)

Up to 4000 Characters

Provided by you during the initial account setup.

Title

VARCHAR(600)

Up to 600 Characters

Provided by you during app setup.

Pre-Order Start Date

DATE

Date in MM/DD/YYYY

Date the app becomes available for pre-order.

Pre-Order End Date

DATE

Date in MM/DD/YYYY

Last date the app is available for pre-order, after which the app is available for sale.

Ordered

DECIMAL(18,2)

Up to 18 Characters

Aggregated number of pre-orders for the period.

Canceled

DECIMAL(18,2)

Up to 18 Characters

Aggregated number of canceled pre-orders for the period.

Cumulative Ordered

DECIMAL(18,2)

Up to 18 Characters

Total number of pre-orders since the start of the pre-order period.

Cumulative Canceled

DECIMAL(18,2)

Up to 18 Characters

Total number of canceled pre-orders since the start of the pre-order period.

Start Date

DATE

Date in MM/DD/YYYY

Start date of report.

End Date

DATE

Date in MM/DD/YYYY

End date of report.

Country Code

CHAR(2)

Up to 2 Characters

Two-character ISO country code indicating the App Store territory of the Pre-Order. For more information, see Financial Report Regions and Currencies.

Apple Identifier

DECIMAL(18,0)

Up to 18 Characters

Apple ID for your app.

Device

VARCHAR(10)

Up to 10 Characters

Type of device used for purchase: iPhone, iPad, Apple TV, iPod touch, or Desktop.

Supported Platforms

VARCHAR(12)

Up to 12 Characters

List of platforms that your app supports: iOS, tvOS, iOS and tvOS, or macOS.

Category

VARCHAR(50)

Up to 50 Characters

Indicates the category of the app, such as Games.

Client

VARCHAR(30)

Up to 30 Characters

Indicates where the purchase happened: App Store, App Store for iMessage, or blank.

See alsoSample Pre-Order Report

Subscription Report

The below table shows columns for Subscription Report Version 1_2.

Tip: To better understand the values below, view a sample report.

Report Field

Data Type

Notes

App Name

String

Title of your subscription’s parent app.

App Apple ID

BigInt

Apple ID of your subscription’s parent app.

Subscription Name

String

Title of your subscription.

Subscription Apple ID

BigInt

Apple ID of your subscription.

Subscription Group ID

BigInt

Your subscription’s Group ID (formerly Family ID).

Standard Subscription Duration

Int

Duration of the standard subscription: 7 Days, 1 Month, 2 Months, 3 Months, 6 Months, or 1 Year.

Customer Price

Decimal

Retail Price displayed on the App Store and charged to the customer.

Customer Currency

String

Three-character ISO code indicating the customer’s currency. For more information, see Currency codes.

Developer Proceeds

Decimal

The proceeds for each subscription.

Proceeds Currency

String

The currency in which your proceeds are earned. For more information, see Currency codes.

Preserved Pricing

String

For Renew events, if the price is preserved then this field equals “Yes”. Otherwise, it is blank.

Proceeds Reason

String

For Renew events, if the subscription has been active for more than a year then you receive 85% of the customer price, minus applicable taxes, and this field equals “Rate After One Year”. Otherwise, you receive 70% and the field is blank.

Promotional Offer Name

String

The promotional offer reference name used in App Store Connect when setting up the subscription offer.

Promotional Offer ID

String

An identifier that you set for your subscription offers in App Store Connect. This is the value entered in the Promotional Offer Product Code field when setting up a subscription offer. For details on implementation see Generating a Signature for Subscription Offers.

State

String

State field in the address submitted by the customer when signing up for their Apple ID. This field is not validated and may be blank.

Country

String

Two-character ISO country code indicating the App Store territory for the purchase. For more information, see Financial Report Regions and Currencies.

Device

String

Type of device used for subscription purchase: iPhone, iPad, Apple TV, iPod touch, or Desktop.

Client

String

If the subscription was purchased from News then this field equals “News”. Otherwise, it is blank.

Active Standard Price Subscriptions

Int

Total number of auto-renewable standard paid subscriptions currently active, excluding free trials, subscription offers, introductory offers, and marketing opt-ins. Subscriptions are active during the period for which the customer has paid without cancellation.

Active Free Trial Introductory Offer Subscriptions

Int

Total number of introductory offer subscriptions currently in a free trial.

Active Pay Up Front Introductory Offer Subscriptions

Int

Total number of introductory offer subscriptions currently with a pay up front introductory price.

Active Pay as You Go Introductory Offer Subscriptions

Int

Total number of introductory offer subscriptions currently with a pay as you go introductory price.

Free Trial Promotional Offer Subscriptions

Int

Total number of promotional offers currently in a free trial.

Pay Up Front Promotional Offer Subscriptions

Int

Total number of promotional offers with a pay up front promotional price.

Pay As You Go Promotional Offer Subscriptions

Int

Total number of promotional offers with a pay as you go promotional price.

Marketing Opt-Ins

Int

Total number of subscriptions currently in a marketing opt-in bonus period.

Billing Retry

Int

Total number of subscriptions in the Billing Retry status. This indicates that the App Store is still attempting to automatically renew a subscription when billing issues arise (for example, an expired credit card). Available in reports for dates starting December 7, 2017.

Grace Period

Int

Total number of subscriptions in the Billing Grace Period state. This indicates that subscriber can continue accessing your content for a certain period of time (6 or 16 days) while Apple attempts to correct the billing issue.

Subscription Event Report

The below table shows columns for Subscription Event Report Version 1_2.

Tip: To better understand the values below, view a sample report.

Report Field

Data Type

Notes

Event Date

Date

Date the event occurred.

Event

String

Type of event that occurred. For more information, see Subscription Events.

App Name

String

Title of your subscription’s parent app.

App Apple ID

BigInt

Apple ID of your subscription’s parent app.

Subscription Name

String

Title of your subscription.

Subscription Apple ID

BigInt

Apple ID of your subscription.

Subscription Group ID

BigInt

Your subscription’s Group ID (formerly Family ID).

Standard Subscription Duration

String

Duration of the standard subscription: 7 Days, 1 Month, 2 Months, 3 Months, 6 Months, or 1 Year.

Subscription Offer Type

String

Type of introductory price: Pay Up Front, Pay As You Go, or Free Trial

Subscription Offer Duration

String

Duration of the introductory price if applicable. For example: 3 Days, 7 Days, 2 Weeks, 1 Month, 2 Months, 3 Months, 6 Months, or 1 Year.

Marketing Opt-In

String

If the subscription included a marketing opt-in then this field equals “Yes”. Otherwise, it is blank.

Marketing Opt-In Duration

String

Duration of the opt-in if applicable: 7 Days, 1 Month, 2 Months, 3 Months, 6 Months, or 1 Year.

Preserved Pricing

String

For Renew events, if the price is preserved then this field equals “Yes”. Otherwise, it is blank.

Proceeds Reason

String

For Renew events, if the subscription has been active for more than a year then you receive 85% of the customer price, minus applicable taxes, and this field equals “Rate After One Year”. Otherwise, you receive 70% and the field is blank.

Promotional Offer Name

String

The Promotional Offer Reference Name used in App Store Connect when setting up the offer.

Promotional Offer ID

String

An identifier that you set for your subscription offers in App Store Connect. This is the value entered in the Promotional Offer Product Code field when setting up a subscription offer. For details on implementation see Generating a Signature for Subscription Offers.

Consecutive Paid Periods

Int

The total number of paid periods that the subscription has been active without cancellation. This does not include free trials, marketing opt-in bonus periods, or grace periods.

Original Start Date

Date

Date of the initial subscription purchase.

Device

String

Type of device used for initial subscription purchase: iPhone, iPad, Apple TV, iPod touch, or Desktop.

Client

String

If the subscription was purchased from News then this field equals “News”. Otherwise, it is blank.

State

String

State field in the address submitted by the customer when signing up for their Apple ID. This field is not validated and may be blank.

Country

String

Two-character ISO country code indicating the App Store territory for the purchase. For more information, see Financial Report Regions and Currencies

Previous Subscription Name

String

For upgrade, downgrade, and crossgrade events, the title of the previous subscription.

Previous Subscription Apple ID

BigInt

For upgrade, downgrade, and crossgrade events, the Apple ID of the previous subscription.

Days Before Canceling

Int

For cancel events, the number of days from the start date to when a subscriber canceled, which could be in the middle of the period. This only applies to cancel events where cancellation reason equals ‘canceled.' Otherwise, it is blank.

Cancellation Reason

String

Reason for a cancellation: Billing issue, Price increase, Canceled, Removed from Sale, or Other. For more information, see Cancellation Reasons.

Days Canceled

Int

For reactivate events, the number of days ago that the subscriber canceled.

Quantity

Int

Number of events with the same values for the other fields.

Subscriber Report

The below table shows columns for Subscriber Report Version 1_2.

Tip: To better understand the values below, view a sample report

Report Field

Data Type

Notes

Event Date

Date

Date the event occurred.

App Name

String

Title of your subscription’s parent app.

App Apple ID

BigInt

Apple ID of your subscription’s parent app.

Subscription Name

String

Title of your subscription.

Subscription Apple ID

BigInt

Apple ID of your subscription.

Subscription Group ID

BigInt

Your subscription’s Group ID (formerly Family ID).

Standard Subscription Duration

String

Duration of the standard subscription: 7 Days, 1 Month, 2 Months, 3 Months, 6 Months, or 1 Year.

Promotional Offer Name

String

The Promotional Offer Reference Name used in App Store Connect when setting up the Offer.

Promotional Offer ID

String

A code that you create for customers to enter and redeem the subscription offer.

Introductory Price Type

String

Type of introductory price: Pay Up Front, Pay As You Go, or Free Trial

Subscription Offer Duration

String

Duration of the introductory price if applicable: For example, 3 Days, 1 Week, 2 Weeks, 1 Month, 2 Months, 3 Months, 6 Months, or 1 Year.

Marketing Opt-In Duration

String

Duration of the marketing opt-in if applicable: 7 Days, 1 Month, 2 Months, 3 Months, 6 Months, or 1 Year.

Customer Price

Decimal

The price of your auto-renewable subscription.

Negative values indicate refunds.

Customer Currency

String

Three-character ISO code indicating the customer’s currency. For more information, see Currency codes.

Developer Proceeds

Decimal

The proceeds for each item delivered.

Proceeds Currency

String

The currency in which your proceeds are earned. For more information, see Currency codes.

Preserved Pricing

String

For renewals, if the price is preserved then this field equals “Yes”. Otherwise, it is blank.

Proceeds Reason

String

If a subscription has been active for more than a year then you receive 85% of the customer price, minus applicable taxes, and this field equals “Rate After One Year." Otherwise, you receive 70% and the field is blank.

Client

String

If the subscription was purchased from News then this field equals “News”. Otherwise, it is blank.

Device

String

Type of device used for subscription purchase: iPhone, iPad, Apple TV, iPod touch, or Desktop.

Country

String

Two-character ISO country code indicating the App Store territory for the purchase. For more information, see Financial Report Regions and Currencies.

Subscriber ID

BigInt

The randomly generated Subscriber ID that is unique to each customer and developer.

Subscriber ID Reset

String

If a customer cancels all of their subscriptions with you and does not resubscribe within 180 days, the Subscriber ID will be deleted. If the same customer resubscribes after 180 days, then we create a new Subscriber ID and this field equals “Yes." Otherwise, it is blank.Subscriber IDs are reset when an app is transferred to another developer account.

Refund

String

For full or partial refunds, this field equals “Yes." Otherwise, it is blank.

Purchase Date

Date

For refunds, the date of the original purchase.

Units

Decimal

The aggregated number of units.

Magazines & Newspapers Report

Tip: To better understand the values below, view a sample report.

Report Field

Report Data Type

Values

Notes

Provider

CHAR(5)

Up to 5 Characters

The service provider in your reports (typically Apple).

Provider Country

CHAR(2)

Up to 2 Characters

The service provider country code (typically US).

SKU

VARCHAR(100)

Up to 100 Characters

The product identifier provided by you during app setup.

Developer

VARCHAR(4000)

Up to 4000 Characters

Provided by you during the initial account setup.

Title

VARCHAR(600)

Up to 600 Characters

Provided by you during app setup.

Version

VARCHAR(100)

Up to 100 Characters

Provided by you during app setup.

Product Type Identifier

VARCHAR(20)

Up to 20 Characters

Defines the type of transaction (for example, initial download, update, and so on). For more information, see Product Type Identifiers.

Units

DECIMAL(18,2)

Up to 18 Characters

The aggregated number of units.

Developer Proceeds (per item)

DECIMAL(18,2)

Up to 18 Characters

The proceeds for each item delivered.

Customer Currency

CHAR(3)

Up to 3 Characters

Three-character ISO code indicating the customer’s currency. For more information, see Financial Report Regions and Currencies.

Country Code

CHAR(2)

Up to 2 Characters

Two-character ISO country code indicating the App Store territory for the purchase. For more information, see Financial Report Regions and Currencies.

Currency of Proceeds

CHAR(3)

Up to 3 Characters

The currency in which your proceeds are earned. For more information, see Currency codes.

Apple Identifier

DECIMAL(18,0)

Up to 18 Characters

The Apple ID for your app.

Customer Price

DECIMAL(18,2)

Up to 18 Characters

Retail Price displayed on the App Store and charged to the customer.

Promo Code

VARCHAR(10)

Up to 10 Characters

If the transaction was part of a promotion, this field will contain a value. This field is empty for non-promotional items. For more information, see Promotional Codes.

Parent Identifier

VARCHAR(100)

Up to 100 Characters

In-App Purchases will show the SKU of the associated app.

Subscription

VARCHAR(10)

Up to 10 Characters

Defines whether an auto-renewable subscription is new or a renewal.

Period

VARCHAR(30)

Up to 30 Characters

Defines the duration of an auto-renewable subscription purchase. Values include: 7 days, 1 month, 2 months, 3 months, 6 months, and 1 year.

Download Date (PST)

TIMESTAMP(0)

Date in MM/DD/YYYY

The download date.

Customer Identifier

DECIMAL(18,0)

Up to 18 Characters

The customer identification.

Report Date (Local)

DATE

Date in MM/DD/YYYY

The date of the report. The date and time is always the local.

Sales/Return

CHAR(1)

Up to 1 Character

Can be S or R. R is a refund and not a reversal.

Category

VARCHAR(50)

Up to 50 Characters

Indicates the category of the app, such as Games.

CMB

VARCHAR(5)

Up to 5 Characters

Credits for Magazine & Newspaper apps that are part of a “completed” app bundle purchase will show a value of “CMB-C.” Otherwise, this field is blank.

Preserved Pricing

VARCHAR(3)

Up to 3 Characters

For Renew events, if the price is preserved then this field equals “Yes.” Otherwise it is blank.

Proceeds Reason

VARCHAR(20)

Up to 20 Characters

If a subscription has been active for more than a year then you receive 85% of the customer price, minus applicable taxes, and this field equals “Rate After One Year.” Otherwise, you receive 70% and the field is blank.

Client

VARCHAR(30)

Up to 30 Characters

If the subscription was purchased from News then this field equals “News.” Otherwise, it is blank.

Device

VARCHAR(10)

Up to 10 Characters

Type of device used for purchase or redownload: iPhone, iPad, Apple TV, iPod touch, or Desktop.

Supported Platforms

VARCHAR(12)

Up to 12 Characters

List of platforms that your app supports: iOS, tvOS, iOS and tvOS, or macOS.

Reports for Opt-In and Magazines & Newspapers are only available for apps in the Magazines & Newspapers category, with auto-renewable In-App Purchases, and include the Newsstand Kit framework.

Opt-In Report

Tip: To better understand the values below, view a sample report.

Report Field

Report Data Type

Values

Notes

First Name

VARCHAR(100)

Up to 100 Characters

Customer’s first name.

Last Name

VARCHAR(100)

Up to 100 Characters

Customer’s last name.

Email Address

VARCHAR(100)

Up to 100 Characters

Customer’s email address.

Postal Code

VARCHAR(50)

Up to 50 Characters

Customer’s postal code.

Apple Identifier

DECIMAL(18,0)

Up to 18 Characters

The Apple ID for your app.

Report Start Date

DATE

Date in MM/DD/YYYY

Date of start of report.

Report End Date

DATE

Date in MM/DD/YYYY

Date of end of report.

Report File Names

The file names for downloaded reports follow the naming convention below:

Report Type

Report Subtype

Date Type

Naming Convention

Example

Sales

Summary

Daily

S_D_<vendor_id>_<date>

S_D_80012345_20130919

Sales

Summary

Weekly

S_W_<vendor_id>_<date>

S_W_80012345_20130915

Sales

Summary

Monthly

S_M_<vendor_id>_<date>

S_M_80012345_201309

Sales

Summary

Yearly

S_Y_<vendor_id>_<date>

S_Y_80012345_2013

Subscription

Summary

Daily

Subscription_<vendor_id>_<date>

Subscription_80012345_20160915

Subscription Event

Summary

Daily

Subscription_Event_<vendor_id>_<date>

Subscription_Event_80012345_20160915

Subscriber

Detailed

Daily

Subscriber_<vendor_id>_<date>

Subscriber_80012345_20161201

Magazines & Newspapers

Detailed

Daily

N_D_D_<vendor_id>_<date>

N_D_D_80012345_20130919

Magazines & Newspapers

Detailed

Weekly

N_D_W_<vendor_id>_<date>

N_D_W_80012345_20130915

Sales

Opt-In

Weekly

O_S_W_<vendor_id>_<date>

O_S_W_80012345_20130915

Pre-Order

Summary

Daily

P_S_D_<vendor_id>_<date>

P_S_D_80012345_20130919

Pre-Order

Summary

Weekly

P_S_W_<vendor_id>_<date>

P_S_W_80012345_20130915

Pre-Order

Summary

Monthly

P_S_M_<vendor_id>_<date>

P_S_M_80012345_201309

Pre-Order

Summary

Yearly

P_S_Y_<vendor_id>_<date>

P_S_Y_80012345_2013

Subscription Events

Activations

Event

Definitions

Event Type

Start Introductory Price

This is when an introductory price begins.

Activations

Subscribe

Start of a subscription, without an introductory price or marketing opt-in bonus period.

Activations

Opt-In

Start of a subscription with a marketing opt-in bonus period.

Activations

Cancellations

Event

Definitions

Event Type

Cancel

Subscriber opted not to renew your subscription from within their Apple ID account settings. A subscription will count as canceled when the subscription period ends, as opposed to when the subscriber turned off auto-renew which could be in the middle of the period.

Cancellations

Canceled from Billing Retry

The App Store was unable to complete the transaction and the subscription is canceled.

Cancellations

Canceled from Billing Grace Period

The App Store was unable to complete the transaction within the 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window and the subscription is canceled.

Cancellations

Conversion to Standard Price

Event

Definitions

Event Type

Paid Subscription from Introductory Offer

Subscriber switched from an introductory offer to a standard price subscription.

Conversion to Standard Price

Crossgrade From Introductory Offer

When a customer switches between an introductory offer and a standard price subscription within the same level. If the in-app purchases are of the same duration, the customer’s prorated amount from the introductory price is refunded to the original payment method. The new in-app purchase is charged and goes into effect immediately at the full price, which changes the customer’s renewal date to the upgrade date. If the in-app purchases are of different durations, the crossgrade goes into effect on the customer’s next renewal date.

Conversion to Standard Price

Downgrade From Introductory Offer

When a customer switches from an introductory offer in a higher level to a standard price subscription in a lower level. A customer downgrade will not take into effect immediately. If a customer is in a pay as you go introductory price, they will be charged for the downgraded subscription at the next billing cycle in the introductory period. If a customer is in a pay up front introductory price, they will be charged for the downgraded subscription after the entire introductory period ends.

Conversion to Standard Price

Upgrade From Introductory Offer

When a customer switches from an introductory offer subscription in a lower level to a standard price subscription in a higher level. The introductory price will end immediately and the customer’s prorated amount from the prior in-app purchase is refunded to the original payment method. The new in-app purchase is charged and goes into effect immediately at the full price, which changes the customer’s renewal date to the upgrade date.

Conversion to Standard Price

Paid Subscription From Opt-In

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to a standard price subscription.

Conversion to Standard Price

Crossgrade From Opt-In

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to a standard price subscription within the same level in the same subscription group. The crossgrade goes into effect at the end of the opt-in bonus period.

Conversion to Standard Price

Downgrade from Opt-In

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to a standard price subscription in a lower level in the same subscription group. The downgrade goes into effect at the end of the opt-in bonus period.

Conversion to Standard Price

Upgrade from Opt-In

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to a standard price subscription in a higher level in the same subscription group. The upgrade goes into effect at the end of the opt-in bonus period.

Conversion to Standard Price

Paid Subscription from Introductory Offer

Subscriber switched from an introductory offer to a standard price subscription.

Conversion to Standard Price

Crossgrade from Introductory Offer

When a customer switches between subscriptions within the same level. If the in-app purchases are of the same duration, the customer’s prorated amount from the introductory offer is refunded to the original payment method. The new in-app purchase is charged and goes into effect immediately at the full price, which changes the customer’s renewal date to the upgrade date. If the in-app purchases are of different durations, the crossgrade goes into effect on the customer’s next renewal date.

Conversion to Standard Price

Downgrade from Introductory Offer

When a customer switches from a subscription in a higher level to a subscription in a lower level. A customer downgrade will not take into effect immediately. If a customer is in a pay as you go introductory price, they will be charged for the downgraded subscription at the next billing cycle in the introductory period. If a customer is in a pay up front introductory price, they will be charged for the downgraded subscription after the entire introductory period ends.

Conversion to Standard Price

Upgrade from Introductory Offer

When a customer switches from a subscription in a lower level to a subscription in a higher level. The introductory offer will end immediately and the customer’s prorated amount from the prior in-app purchase is refunded to the original payment method. The new in-app purchase is charged and goes into effect immediately at the full price, which changes the customer’s renewal date to the upgrade date.

Conversion to Standard Price

Paid Subscription from Promotional Offer

Subscriber switched from a promotional offer to a standard price subscription.

Conversion to Standard Price

Paid Subscription from Promotional Offer with Upgrade

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to a paid subscription in a higher level in the same subscription group. The upgrade goes into effect at the end of the opt-in bonus period.

Conversion to Standard Price

Paid Subscription from Promotional Offer with Downgrade

Subscriber switched from a subscription offer to a standard price subscription of a lower level.

Conversion to Standard Price

Paid Subscription from Promotional Offer with Crossgrade

Subscriber switched from a subscription offer to a standard price subscription of an equal level.

Conversion to Standard Price

Entered Billing Retry

Event

Definitions

Event Type

Billing Retry from Introductory Price

The App Store was unable to complete the transaction of switching a subscription from an introductory price to a Paid Subscription due to a billing issue.

Entered Billing Retry

Billing Retry from Paid Subscription

The App Store was unable to complete the transaction of renewing a subscription due to a billing issue.

Entered Billing Retry

Billing Retry from Opt-In

The App Store was unable to complete the transaction of renewing a subscription with a marketing opt-in bonus period due to a billing issue.

Entered Billing Retry

Billing Retry from Grace Period

The App Store was unable to complete the transaction of renewing a subscription during a Billing Grace Period 6 or 16 day window due to a billing issue.

Entered Billing Retry

Reactivations

Event

Definitions

Event Type

Reactivate to Introductory Offer

Subscriber signed up for an introductory offer after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivate

Subscriber signed up for a standard price subscription after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivate with Crossgrade

Subscriber signed up for a paid subscription of an equal level from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivate with Downgrade

Subscriber signed up for a paid subscription of a lower level from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivate with Upgrade

Subscriber signed up for a paid subscription of a higher level from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivate with Upgrade

Subscriber signed up for a paid subscription of a higher level from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivate with Crossgrade to Introductory Offer

Subscriber signed up for an introductory offer of an equal level from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivate with Downgrade to Introductory Offer

Subscriber signed up for an introductory offer of a lower level from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivate with Upgrade to Introductory Offer

Subscriber signed up for an introductory offer of a higher level from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivation to Promotional Offer

Subscriber signed up for a subscription offer after previously canceling.

Reactivations

Reactivation to Promotional Offer with Upgrade

Subscriber signed up for a subscription offer of a higher level from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivation to Promotional Offer with Downgrade

Subscriber signed up for a subscription offer of a lower level from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivation to Promotional Offer with Crossgrade

Subscriber signed up for a subscription offer of an equal level from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Reactivation to Opt-In

Subscriber signed up for a marketing opt-in from the same subscription group after previously canceling. The reactivation goes into effect immediately.

Reactivations

Refunds

Event

Definitions

Event Type

Refund

Subscriber received a refund of the subscription.

Refunds

Renewals

Event

Definitions

Event Type

Introductory Offer from Introductory Offer

Subscriber signed up for an introductory offer previously being subscribed to an introductory offer of a different subscription group.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Opt-In

Subscriber moved from a marketing opt-in bonus period to a subscription offer.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Opt-In with Upgrade

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to a subscription offer of a higher level.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Opt-In with Downgrade

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to a subscription offer of a lower level.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Opt-In with Crossgrade

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to a subscription offer within the same level in the same subscription group. The crossgrade goes into effect at the end of the opt-in bonus period.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Paid Subscription

Subscriber switched from a subscription at the standard price to a subscription offer.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Paid Subscription with Upgrade

Subscriber signed up for a subscription of a higher level from the same subscription group after redeeming a subscription offer. The Upgrade goes into effect immediately.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Paid Subscription with Downgrade

Subscriber signed up for a subscription of a lower level from the same subscription group after redeeming a subscription offer. The Downgrade goes into effect immediately.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Paid Subscription with Crossgrade

Subscriber signed up for an subscription of the same level from the same subscription group after redeeming a subscription offer. The Crossgrade goes into effect immediately.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Introductory Offer

Subscriber signed up for a subscription offer after previously redeeming a promotional offer.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Introductory Offer with Upgrade

Subscriber switched from an introductory offer to a subscription offer of a higher level.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Introductory Offer with Downgrade

Subscriber switched from an introductory offer to a subscription offer of a lower level.

Renewals

Promotional Offer from Introductory Offer with Crossgrade

Subscriber switched from an introductory offer to a subscription offer of an equal level.

Renewals

Introductory Offer from Promotional Offer

Subscriber signed up for an introductory offer after previously being subscribed to a subscription offer of a different subscription group.

Renewals

Introductory Offer from Promotional Offer with Upgrade

Subscriber signed up for an introductory offer of a higher level after previously being subscribed to a subscription offer of a different subscription group.

Renewals

Introductory Offer from Promotional Offer with Downgrade

Subscriber signed up for an introductory offer of a lower level after previously being subscribed to a subscription offer of a different subscription group.

Renewals

Introductory Offer from Promotional Offer with Crossgrade

Subscriber signed up for an introductory offer of an equal level after previously being subscribed to a subscription offer of a different subscription group.

Renewals

Upgrade

Subscriber switched from a standard price subscription in a lower level to a subscription in a higher level in the same subscription group. A Subscription will count as upgraded when it goes into effect immediately.

Renewals

Downgrade

Subscriber switched from a standard price subscription in a higher level to a subscription in a lower level in the same subscription group. A subscription will count as downgraded when it goes into effect on the subscriber’s next renewal date, as opposed to when the subscriber switches their subscription, which could be in the middle of the period.

Renewals

Crossgrade

Subscriber switched between standard price subscriptions of the same level in the same subscription group. If the subscriptions are of the same duration, the crossgrade will be counted when it goes into effect immediately. If the subscriptions are of different durations, the crossgrade will be counted when it goes into effect on the subscriber’s next renewal date, as opposed to when the subscriber switches their subscription, which could be in the middle of the period.

Renewals

Opt-in from Promotional Offer

Subscriber moved to a marketing opt-in bonus period from a subscription offer.

Renewals

Introductory Offer from Paid Subscription

Subscriber moved from a paid subscription on a standard price to an introductory offer of a subscription in a different group

Renewals

Introductory Offer from Paid Subscription with Crossgrade

Subscriber moved from a paid subscription on a standard price to an introductory offer of a subscription in a different group of the same level.

Renewals

Introductory Offer from Paid Subscription with Downgrade

Subscriber moved from a paid subscription on a standard price to an introductory offer of a subscription in a different group of a lower level.

Renewals

Introductory Offer from Paid Subscription with Upgrade

Subscriber moved from a paid subscription on a standard price to an introductory offer of a subscription in a different group of a higher level.

Renewals

Opt-in from Introductory Offer

Subscriber switched from an introductory offer to marketing opt-in bonus period.

Renewals

Introductory Offer from Opt-In

Subscriber moved from a marketing opt-in bonus period to an introductory offer.

Renewals

Introductory Offer Crossgrade from Opt-In

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to an introductory offer within the same level.

Renewals

Introductory Offer Downgrade from Opt-In

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to an introductory price offer of a lower level.

Renewals

Introductory Offer Upgrade from Opt-In

Subscriber switched from a marketing opt-in bonus period to an introductory offer of a higher level.

Renewals

Renewal from Billing Retry

Event

Definitions

Event Type

Introductory Offer from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed to a subscription with an introductory offer.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Introductory Offer Upgrade from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed to a subscription with an introductory offer of a higher level.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Introductory Offer Crossgrade from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed to a subscription with an introductory offer of the same level.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Introductory Offer Downgrade from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed to a subscription with an introductory offer of a lower level.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Introductory Offer from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed to a subscription with an introductory price.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Opt-In from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed the subscription with a marketing opt-in bonus period.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Renewal from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed the subscription.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Crossgrade from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and switched between subscriptions within the same level.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Downgrade from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and switched from a subscription in a higher level to a subscription in a lower level.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Upgrade from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and switched from a subscription in a lower level to a subscription in a higher level.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Promotional Offer from Billing Retry

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed to a subscription with a subscription offer.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Promotional Offer from Billing Retry with Crossgrade

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed to a subscription offer of an equal price

Renewal from Billing Retry

Promotional Offer from Billing Retry with Downgrade

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed to a subscription offer of a lower price.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Promotional Offer from Billing Retry with Upgrade

The App Store successfully completed the transaction and renewed to a subscription offer of a higher price.

Renewal from Billing Retry

Enter Billing Grace Period

Event

Definitions

Event Type

Grace Period from Paid Subscription

The App Store was unable to complete the transaction of renewing a standard paid subscription due to a billing issue, and the subscription enters a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window.

Enter Grace Period

Grace Period from Introductory Offer

The App Store was unable to complete the transaction of renewing an introductory offer to a paid subscription due to a billing issue, and the subscription enters a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window.

Enter Grace Period

Grace Period from Promotional Offer

The App Store was unable to complete the transaction of renewing a subscription on a promotional offer to a paid subscription due to a billing issue, and the subscription enters a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window.

Enter Grace Period

Grace Period from Opt-In

The App Store was unable to complete the transaction of renewing a subscription with a marketing opt-in bonus period due to a billing issue and the subscription enters a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window.

Enter Grace Period

Renewals from Billing Grace Period

Event

Definitions

Event Type

Renewals from Grace Period

The App Store successfully completed the transaction within a 6 or 16 Billing Grace Period window, and renewed to a standard paid subscription. Includes upgrades, downgrades, or crossgrades.

Renewals from Grace Period

Introductory Offer from Grace Period

The App Store successfully completed the transaction within a 6 or 16 Billing Grace Period window, and renewed to an introductory offer. Includes upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades.

Renewals from Grace Period

Promotional Offer from Grace Period

The App Store successfully completed the transaction within a 6 or 16 Billing Grace Period window, and renewed to a promotional offer. Includes upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades.

Renewals from Grace Period

Opt-In from Grace Period

The App Store successfully completed the transaction within a 6 or 16 Billing Grace Period window, and renewed the subscription with a marketing opt-in bonus period. Includes upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades..

Renewals from Grace Period

Promotional Codes

Promo Code

Description

CR - RW

Promotional codes where the proceeds have been waived. The customer price will be 0, and the proceeds will be 0. These transactions are redemptions of App Store Connect Developer Codes.

CR - RB

Promotional codes where the proceeds have not been waived. The customer price and the proceeds will be greater than 0.

GP

Purchase of a gift.

GR

Redemption of a gift. (Deprecated in September 2013.)

EDU

Volume purchase for education transaction.

BUS

Volume purchase for business transaction.

Product Type Identifiers

These are the different product type identifiers used in your financial reports:

Product type identifier

Type

Description

1

Free or paid app

iPhone, iPod touch (iOS), Apple watch

1-B

App Bundle

iPhone, iPod touch (iOS)

F1-B

App Bundle

Mac app

1E

Paid app

Custom iPhone and iPod touch (iOS)

1EP

Paid app

Custom iPad (iOS)

1EU

Paid app

Custom universal (iOS)

1F

Free or paid app

Universal (iOS), excluding tvOS

1T

Free or paid app

iPad (iOS)

3

Re-download

Update (iOS, watchOS, and tvOS), excluding iPad only

3F

Re-download

Universal (iOS), excluding tvOS

7

Update

Update (iOS, watchOS, and tvOS), excluding iPad only

7F

Update

Universal (iOS), excluding tvOS

7T

Update

iPad (iOS)

F1

Free or paid app

Mac app

F7

Update

Mac app

FI1

In-App Purchase

Mac app

IA1

In-App Purchase

Purchase (iOS)

IA1-M

In-App Purchase

Purchase (Mac)

IA3

Restored In-App Purchase

Non-consumable

IA9

In-App Purchase

Subscription (iOS)

IA9-M

In-App Purchase

Subscription (Mac)

IAY

In-App Purchase

Auto-renewable subscription (iOS)

IAY-M

In-App Purchase

Auto-renewable subscription (Mac)

Cancellation Reasons

Cancellation Reason

Definition

Billing Issue

Subscription automatically ended because the subscriber could not be billed, for example, if the customer’s credit card was declined.

Price Increase

Subscription automatically ended because the price of the subscription increased but the subscriber did not consent.

Canceled

Subscriber canceled their subscription.

Removed From Sale

Subscription was removed from sale, by the developer or Apple.

Other

Subscription ended for another reason not listed above.

Sales and Trends Metrics and Dimensions

Metrics

Term

Definition

Page

Active Paid Subscriptions

The total number of auto-renewable subscriptions currently active, including paid subscription offers and introductory offers. Excluding Free Trials and marketing opt-ins. Subscriptions are active during the period for which the customer has paid without cancellation.

Subscriptions

Auto-renewable Subscriptions

A product that allows users to purchase dynamic content for a set period. This type of subscription renews automatically unless canceled by the user. For example, monthly subscriptions for an app offering streaming services.

Subscriptions

Introductory Offer

A period during which the subscription is provided at discounted price or at no cost, after which it is automatically renewed, unless the subscriber cancels. Introductory Pricing types include: Pay Up Front, Pay As You Go, and Free Trials.

Subscriptions

In-App Purchases

The number of in-app purchases. Restored purchases are not counted.

Sales

Marketing Opt-In

The action taken by a subscriber to elect to share personal information. This applies to Magazines & Newspapers apps that use Newsstand Kit and offer auto-renewable In-App Purchase subscriptions.

Subscriptions

Non-Renewing Subscriptions

A product that allows users to purchase a service and use for a limited duration. The content of this in-app purchase can be static. This type of subscription does not renew automatically. For example, a one year subscription to a catalog of archived articles.

Subscriptions

Pre-Orders

The total number of pre-orders placed, minus cancelations.

Sales

Proceeds (Developer Proceeds)

The estimated amount of proceeds you will receive from your sales. This is the Customer Price minus applicable taxes and Apple’s commission, per Schedule 2 of your Paid Applications agreement. For actual proceeds based on closed transactions, see Payments and Financial Reports.

Sales

Sales

The total amount billed to customers for purchasing apps, app bundles, and In-App Purchases. Taxes are only included in the sales if those taxes were included in the App Store price. Note that sales totals are not the same as your proceeds.

Sales

Subscription Sales

The total amount billed to subscribers, in U.S. dollars. Taxes are only included in sales if those taxes were included in the App Store price. Note that sales totals are not the same as your proceeds.

Subscriptions

Subscription Units

The total number of subscription purchases, renewals, and reactivations. Excludes free trials. Includes paid subscriptions with introductory pricing. Refunds subtract from the total. For example, if a customer purchases a subscription and then renews, two units are counted. If a refund is issued for the renewal, the total is reduced by one.

Subscriptions

App and Bundle Units

The number of first-time purchases of your app or bundle. An app unit or bundle unit is counted when a customer taps the ‘Buy’ or ‘Get’ button for the first time. App updates, downloads from the same Apple ID onto other devices, and redownloads to the same device are not counted. Family Sharing downloads are included for free apps, but not for paid apps.

Sales

In-app purchases

The number of in-app purchases, including consumables, non-consumables, auto-renewable subscriptions, and non-renewable subscriptions. In-app purchases restored by users are not counted. For more information, see in-app purchase types.

Sales

Dimensions and Filters

Term

Definition

Page

App

The app, by name or Apple ID.

Filter by app to see data for its associated auto-renewable subscriptions.

Subscriptions

Cancellation Reasons

The reason why the subscription was canceled. See Cancellation Reasons.

Subscription State

Category

The App Store category of your app, for example Games, or Food & Drink.

Sales

Client

A dimension that indicates where the purchased happened. Values include: App Store (for iOS and tvOS), App Store for iMessage, and News (Apple News).

Sales

Complete My Bundle (CMB)

The action taken by a customer to purchase the remaining apps in a bundle beyond those already purchased.

Sales

Content

The app or in-app purchase, by name or Apple ID.

Filter by app to see data for the app, excluding associated in-app purchases. Or, filter by one or more in-app purchases.

Sales

Content Type

The content type of your app. This includes App, App Bundle, and In-App Purchases for iOS apps, tvOS apps, and Mac apps.

Sales

Current State

The state your subscription is in. For example, introductory offer, promotional offer, billing retry, etc.

Subscription State

Device

The device on which your app was downloaded. Values include: Apple TV, Desktop, iPad, iPhone, and iPod Touch.

Sales

Event Type

The type of subscription event. For a complete list of subscription events by type, see Subscription Events.

Subscription Event

Parent App

The app, by name or Apple ID.

Filter by parent app to see data for the app and its associated in-app purchases.

Sales

Preserved Pricing

Whether or not the subscription has preserved pricing enabled. Can be either Preserved Price or Non-Preserved Price. For more information, see Manage pricing for auto-renewable subscriptions

Subscription State, Subscription Event

Promotional Offer

The promotional offer reference name used in App Store Connect when setting up the subscription offer.

Subscription State, Subscription Event

Store Currency

The currency of the App Store on which your app was purchased.

Note: When filtering by store currency, the sales reflected only represent purchases made in that currency. The figures are not your total sales converted into the selected currency.

Sales

Subscription

One of your app’s auto-renewable subscription offerings.

Filter by one or more auto-renewable subscriptions.

Subscriptions

Duration

Duration of the auto-renewable subscription: 3, Days, 1 Week, 2 Weeks, 1 Month, 2 Months, 3 Months, 6 Months, or 1 Year.

Filter by subscription duration to see data for subscriptions with that duration.

Subscriptions

Territory

The App Store territory in which purchases were made, based on the customer’s billing address.

Sales, Subscriptions

Transaction Type

The transaction type of the download. Values include: Free, Paid, Redownload, Refund, and Updates. Paid indicates transactions with payment by the customer. Free indicates free transactions, including free trial transactions.

Sales

Version

The version of your app displayed on the App Store.

Sales

Performances Rates and Ratios

Term

Definition

Page

Retention Rate

The number of subscriptions that renewed during a specific period, divided by the number of subscriptions that were up for renewal during the same period. Upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades do not count as a subscription renewal. Average retention rate is the average of these rates across the last 12 months.

Subscription Summary

Introductory Offer Conversion Rate

The number of introductory offer subscriptions that converted to a standard price divided by the number of introductory offer subscriptions that ended in the past 30 days.

Subscription Retention

Promotional Offer Conversion Rate

The number of Promotional Offer subscriptions that converted to a standard price divided by the number of Promotional Offer subscriptions that ended in the past 30 days.

Subscription Retention

Sales and Trends Reports Availability

Sales and Trends reports are available to download at the following times:

  • Daily reports are available the following day.

  • Weekly reports are available on Mondays.

  • Monthly reports are available five days after the end of the month.

  • Yearly reports are available six days after the end of the year.

Reports are generally available by 8 AM Pacific Standard Time (PST).

Note: Daily, weekly, and monthly reports are saved for one year after they become available. Yearly reports are saved indefinitely. We don’t store or regenerate reports for download after these time periods expire.

Name

Frequency

Availability/Access

Versions

Summary Sales

Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Yearly

At least one app unit sold.

1_0

Sales Events

Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Yearly

At least one app or in-app purchase with 10,000 units sold, or $10,000 USD in sales.

1_1

Subscription

Daily

At least one auto-renewable subscription sold, including introductory prices.

1_1

Subscription Event

Daily

At least one auto-renewable subscription sold, including introductory prices.

1_1

Subscriber

Daily

At least one auto-renewable subscription sold, including introductory prices.

1_0

Magazines & Newspapers Detailed Sales Report

Daily, Weekly

Magazines & Newspapers apps that use Newsstand Kit and have sold at least one auto-renewable subscription, including introductory prices.

1_0

Opt-In

Weekly

Magazines & Newspapers apps that use Newsstand Kit and have sold at least one auto-renewable subscription, including introductory prices.

1_0

Pre-Order

Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Yearly

At least one pre-ordered item.

Banking information

Banking information is required to receive payment from Apple.

Term

Definition

Bank Territory

The country or region for the branch of your bank. This is not the same as where your bank’s headquarters is located.

Bank Code

This is is a routing or clearing number, but you will see a different field depending on the location of your country or region. If you don’t know this information, other search criteria are available to locate your bank in App Store Connect, such as Bank Name, City, and Postal Code. If you can’t identify your bank in App Store Connect, it may be that Apple can’t send payments to that bank.

Bank Account Number

An account number can be found on your checks or statements and must be in English letters or numbers only. Keep in mind that some bank account numbers have leading zeros, so be sure to include all leading zeros. If you have an IBAN, your bank account number and your IBAN are two separate numbers. Don’t enter your IBAN into the bank account number field.

Account Holder Name

The Account Holder Name for your account. This must be entered in English letters or numbers, or Katakana for accounts based in Japan. It is important that the name matches exactly as it appears on the bank account you are using, including punctuations. If your account is a joint account, both names should be included in the Account Holder Name field. In addition to the 26 english characters and 10 digits, only the characters ,/?-)( are permitted.

The account holder name for your bank account doesn’t have to match the legal entity name for your agreement

Account Holder Type

Individual or Corporation

Bank Account Type

Checking or Savings. These options may vary depending on your bank country or region.

Bank Account Currency

The currency of your bank account. This will usually be the currency shown for your bank balance in your bank statements. This is also the currency you will be paid in. Note that most bank accounts only accept a single currency. Don’t enter a currency you’re not sure your bank account supports.